User Manual: SBO 24/24 - #13115

Translation of the original technical documentation
User Manual
SBO 24/24 - N° 13115
CRYSTAL GEYSER WATER COMPANY

USA
©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
30/03/2015
SIDEL "BLOWING & COATING DIVISION" - Avenue de la patrouille de France - Octeville sur mer - BP 204 - 76 053 Le Havre Cedex FRANCE
Tel : 00 33 (0)2.32.85.86.87 - Fax : 00.33 (0)2.32.85.81.00 - Email : service@fra.sidel.com
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Revision history
REVISION HISTORY
The information contained within this document is the property of SIDEL. Except in the case of authorizations
expressly accorded by means of a contract, no part of this document may be copied or disclosed without the
prior written agreement of SIDEL
This document has been written in the original language of the manufacturer. All other versions are
translations of the original version. In the case of contradictions with regard to any translated versions of this
manual, the original version written in the language of the manufacturer will take precedence.
m Creation and revision
Date
Creation 30/03/2015
30/03/2015 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Revision history
2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Contents
INFORMATION ON THE MANUAL Part I

DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE Part II
OPERATION Part III
INSTALLATION AND START-UP Part IV
MAINTENANCE Part V
APPENDIX Part VI
CONTENTS
Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
Using this manual .................................................................................................................................................. 2
General Information ............................................................................................................................................... 3

Principles ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
Main components .................................................................................................................................................. 2
Control and command panel ................................................................................................................................. 3
High pressure air circuit ......................................................................................................................................... 4
Steam sterilization module (option) ....................................................................................................................... 5
Low pressure air circuit .......................................................................................................................................... 6
Hydraulic system ................................................................................................................................................... 7
Water characteristics and treatment ...................................................................................................................... 8
Electrical cabinet and boxes .................................................................................................................................. 9
Transmission ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
Preform feeder ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
Preform decontamination module ........................................................................................................................ 12
Surface disinfection system ................................................................................................................................. 13
Feeding ................................................................................................................................................................ 14
Preform loading/offloading ................................................................................................................................... 15
Spindle chain system ........................................................................................................................................... 16
External preform decontamination ....................................................................................................................... 17
Infrared oven ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
False lamp support ............................................................................................................................................. 19
Oven ventilation system ...................................................................................................................................... 20

Aeraulic systems in the oven ............................................................................................................................... 21
Ventilation cabinet ............................................................................................................................................... 22
Filtration cabinet .................................................................................................................................................. 23
Oven extractor unit .............................................................................................................................................. 24
Transfer arm and turntable .................................................................................................................................. 25
Transfer wheel ..................................................................................................................................................... 26
Transfer arm ........................................................................................................................................................ 27
Item ejection system ........................................................................................................................................... 28
Recovery carriage ............................................................................................................................................... 29
Blowing station .................................................................................................................................................... 30
Blowing machine aeraulic system ....................................................................................................................... 31
Retractable bottle outfeed ................................................................................................................................... 32
30/03/2015 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Contents
Bottle outfeed wheel ............................................................................................................................................ 33

Bottle outfeed retractable guide ........................................................................................................................... 34
Blower/filler separating wall ................................................................................................................................. 35
Bottle outfeed air circuit ....................................................................................................................................... 36
Access glove ....................................................................................................................................................... 37
Automatic grease spray system .......................................................................................................................... 38
Automated self-lubricating system ....................................................................................................................... 39
Blowing machine safety system .......................................................................................................................... 40
OPERATION Part III

General safety precautions .................................................................................................................................... 1
Counter-indications ................................................................................................................................................ 2
Presentation of the PCC application ...................................................................................................................... 3
Setting up the machine for production ................................................................................................................... 4
Assistance with starting the machine and commencing production ...................................................................... 5

General information ............................................................................................................................................... 1
MAINTENANCE Part V
General safety precautions .................................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance guide ................................................................................................................................................ 2
Production item changes ....................................................................................................................................... 3
APPENDIX Part VI
Bolt tightening torques ........................................................................................................................................... 1
Vocabulary used in this manual ............................................................................................................................. 2
Safety recommendations related to the use of hydrogen peroxide (Decontamination option) .............................. 3
Document package survey .................................................................................................................................... 4
2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Table of Contents Part I

OPERATION Part III
MAINTENANCE Part V
APPENDIX Part VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD 1
General observations ......................................................................................................................................... 1.1
Aims of this manual ............................................................................................................................................ 1.2
Documents supplied with the machine ...................................................................................................... 1.2.1
USING THIS MANUAL 2

Writing conventions ............................................................................................................................................ 2.1
Vocabulary used in this manual .......................................................................................................................... 2.2
GENERAL INFORMATION 3
Information relating to safety, hygiene and limits of use ..................................................................................... 3.1
Qualified personnel ............................................................................................................................................. 3.2
Standards and certifications ............................................................................................................................... 3.3
Warranty and responsibility ................................................................................................................................ 3.4
Registered trademark ......................................................................................................................................... 3.5
Supplementary assistance ................................................................................................................................. 3.6
30/03/2015 I - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part I User Manual / Table of Contents
I - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Foreword Part I
1 FOREWORD
1.1 General observations
The machine has been designed to ensure excellent results when all of the operating and maintenance
instructions, as well as the recommendations included in this manual are followed.
To obtain the best results SIDEL recommends that all of the maintenance operations be carried out on a regular
basis in order to ensure that the installation remains in the best possible condition.
It is particularly important to train machine managers and users in the following:
- operation,
- machine maintenance,
- production set-up,
- safety procedures and recommendations.
1.2 Aims of this manual
This manual forms an integral part of the machine.
This manual was written by the manufacturers in their original language (French). Any version in another language
is a translation.
The illustrations included in this manual show a standard machine. Some elements may appear differently on your
machine according to its configuration, however their functions remain identical.
This manual and the technical documentation should be accessible to all users of the machine.
This manual is aimed at:
- the person responsible for installation,
- the operators who run the machine,
- the technicians who carry out maintenance.
This manual provides general information on the following:
- the description of the operating assemblies and sub-assemblies,
- machine usage and operation,
- maintenance operations,
Additional information located in a sub-chapter or another chapter in this manual or another manual.
1.2.1 Documents supplied with the machine

- Presentation Manual.
- User Manual.
- Servicing Procedure Catalog (inspection / cleaning, removal / refit, setting, lubrication, etc.).
- Spare-parts catalog "Machine" (assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature).
- Spare-parts catalog specific to articles to be produced, otherwise known as "Personalized" or "Custom"
parts(assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature).
- Back-up copy of the PCC (DVD-ROM) application.
30/03/2015 I - 1 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part I User Manual / Foreword
I - 1 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Using this manual Part I
2 USING THIS MANUAL

Users must read this manual in its entirety, making sure that they have fully understood the instructions contained
within.
This manual should be used as a reference and consultation document in cases where it is useful in the
accomplishment of a procedure or an operation.
The manual should be available for consultation at all times to personnel involved in maintenance and the operation
of the machine.
The manual has been structured to facilitate access to all of the information contained within: operation, control and
maintenance.
Several entries have been made to allow you to find the information you require more easily:
- the contents pages at the start of the manual allow you to find the subject heading,
- the manual has been divided into sections and the contents for each section also provides subject headings,
- the page headings in each chapter indicate their exact location within the manual,
- symbols are used to characterise various categories of information,
- a glossary covers essential technical and specific terms used in the manual.
2.1 Writing conventions
In order to facilitate your comprehension of the manual, a certain number of rules have been established.
m Symbols
Important sections of text will be accompanied by the following symbols:
Strictly prohibited.
Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.
Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.
Remark or observation on the results of an operation.
Additional information located in a sub-chapter or another chapter in this manual or another manual.
m Pictogram
On certain pages in the manual, a pictogram positioned in a table indicates the type of procedure associated with
the sub-assembly being described.
Pictogram Signifies
Safety procedure
Operating procedure
Production process procedure
Inspecting / cleaning procedure
30/03/2015 I - 2 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part I User Manual / Using this manual
Pictogram Signifies
Removal/Refit procedure
Adjustment procedure
Greasing procedure
m "List of procedures" table

On certain pages withing the manual, a List of Procedures table summarises the procedures associated with the
sub-assembly being described.
The procedure files are grouped together in the servicing procedure catalog.
Example of a "Servicing Procedure List".
xSU-001, xSU-002
xCU-005, xCU-009
xPU-003, xPU-008
xNM-041, xNM-052, xNM-065, xNE-003, xNE-012
xDM-002, xDM-010, xDM-025
xRM-005, xRM-009, xRM-012, xRE-003, xRE-015, xRE-020, xRE-027
xGM-001, xGM-004
m Words in bold in the text

Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier.
m Words in blue in the text

Indicate supplementary information relating to this word in the current manual’s glossary.
2.2 Vocabulary used in this manual
For further information, please refer to chapter "Vocabulary used in this manual".
I - 2 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / General Information Part I
3 GENERAL INFORMATION
3.1 Information relating to safety, hygiene and limits of use
Information relating to safety is included at the start of each chapter. Where necessary, the information is repeated
or supplemented throughout the manual.
Other information relating to safety, hygiene and limits of use are included in the Presentation manual.
For further information, please refer to chapter "General safety precautions", in the Presentation Manual.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Limits of use", in the Presentation Manual.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Hygiene", in the Presentation Manual.
3.2 Qualified personnel

The machine must be started up and operated according to the recommendations included in these
documents. Only qualified personnel are authorized to carry out work on the machine.
3.3 Standards and certifications
For further information, please refer to chapter "Declaration of conformity", in the Presentation Manual.
3.4 Warranty and responsibility
The machine sale contract stipulates, very precisely, the rights, guarantees and limits of responsibility of each
party.
Only a SIDEL technician is authorized to carry out the installation of the machine.
3.5 Registered trademark

UniversalTM is a registered trademark of SIDEL.
Other designations appearing in this document may also be trademarks the use of which by a third party for their
own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the proprietors of the said trademarks.
m Copyright SIDEL 2005
All reproduction or use of the contents of this information support is prohibited, except where express permission
has been by SIDEL.
3.6 Supplementary assistance
For further information on the operation of the machine or any of its components, please contact your SIDEL
business manager.
For training on the operation of the machine or specific components, please contact your SIDEL business
manager.
For all your remarks concerning the technical documentation, do not hesitate to send us back the documentation
package evaluation form situated in the manual appendix.
30/03/2015 I - 3 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part I User Manual / General Information
I - 3 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Table of Contents Part II

OPERATION Part III
MAINTENANCE Part V
APPENDIX Part VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRINCIPLES 1
MAIN COMPONENTS 2
Blowing machine component parts ..................................................................................................................... 2.1
Component parts of ultra-clean preform feeder .................................................................................................. 2.2
CONTROL AND COMMAND PANEL 3

Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 3.1
Description .......................................................................................................................................................... 3.2
PCC (Control and Command station) ................................................................................................................. 3.3
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.3.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.3.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 3.3.3
PCC touch screen ............................................................................................................................. 3.3.3.1
Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................... 3.3.3.2
DVD-ROM drive ................................................................................................................................ 3.3.3.3
Diskette drive .................................................................................................................................... 3.3.3.4
Gate .................................................................................................................................................. 3.3.3.5
Beacon stack ..................................................................................................................................... 3.3.3.6
Operating mode switch ....................................................................................................................................... 3.4
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.4.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.3
Printer ................................................................................................................................................................. 3.5
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.5.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.5.2

Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 3.5.3
UPS .................................................................................................................................................................... 3.6
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.6.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.6.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 3.6.3
"Remote access" Kit ........................................................................................................................................... 3.7
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.7.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.7.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 3.7.3
Air conditioning ................................................................................................................................................... 3.8
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.8.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.8.2
30/03/2015 II - 1/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Table of Contents
Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 3.8.3
HIGH PRESSURE AIR CIRCUIT 4

Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 4.1
Description .......................................................................................................................................................... 4.2
Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 4.3
High pressure air supply interface panel .................................................................................................... 4.3.1
Preblow, blow and service air system ........................................................................................................ 4.3.2
Pilot system ................................................................................................................................................ 4.3.3
Direct compensation .................................................................................................................................. 4.3.4
STEAM STERILIZATION MODULE (OPTION) 5

Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.1
Description .......................................................................................................................................................... 5.2
Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.3
LOW PRESSURE AIR CIRCUIT 6

Blowing machine low pressure air circuit ............................................................................................................ 6.1
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 6.1.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 6.1.2
Rotating section ................................................................................................................................ 6.1.2.1
Fixed section ..................................................................................................................................... 6.1.2.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 6.1.3
Low pressure air supply interface panel ............................................................................................ 6.1.3.1
Distribution system ............................................................................................................................ 6.1.3.2
preform distributor low pressure air circuit .......................................................................................................... 6.2
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 6.2.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 6.2.2
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 7
Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 7.1
Description .......................................................................................................................................................... 7.2
Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 7.3
Hydraulic interface panel ........................................................................................................................... 7.3.1
Blow wheel distribution system .................................................................................................................. 7.3.2
Oven distribution system ............................................................................................................................ 7.3.3
WATER CHARACTERISTICS AND TREATMENT 8

Ryznar index ....................................................................................................................................................... 8.1
pH(potential Hydrogen) ...................................................................................................................................... 8.2
TH (Total Hardness) ........................................................................................................................................... 8.3

TAC (Total Alkalinity) .......................................................................................................................................... 8.4
Conductivity ........................................................................................................................................................ 8.5
Turbidity .............................................................................................................................................................. 8.6
Larson – Skold index .......................................................................................................................................... 8.7
Sampling and analysis ........................................................................................................................................ 8.8
Water treatment .................................................................................................................................................. 8.9
Diagnosis of state of corrosion of system .................................................................................................. 8.9.1
"Treatable" water specifications ................................................................................................................. 8.9.2
Follow-up of dosage ................................................................................................................................... 8.9.3
ELECTRICAL CABINET AND BOXES 9

Functions ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.1
II - 2/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Description .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.2
Blowing machine ........................................................................................................................................ 9.2.1
TM Preform distributor ............................................................................................................................... 9.2.2
Operation ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.3
Main switch ................................................................................................................................................ 9.3.1
Blowing machine ............................................................................................................................... 9.3.1.1
Preform feeder .................................................................................................................................. 9.3.1.2
Air conditioning .......................................................................................................................................... 9.3.2
Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 9.3.2.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................ 9.3.2.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................... 9.3.2.3
Beacon stack ............................................................................................................................................. 9.3.3
Speed drives .............................................................................................................................................. 9.3.4
Programmable logic controller (PLC) ......................................................................................................... 9.3.5
TRANSMISSION 10
Blowing machine transmission ......................................................................................................................... 10.1
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 10.1.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 10.1.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 10.1.3
Reducer motor ................................................................................................................................ 10.1.3.1
Torque limiter .................................................................................................................................. 10.1.3.2
Braking system ................................................................................................................................ 10.1.3.3
Synchronization ............................................................................................................................... 10.1.3.4
Belts ................................................................................................................................................ 10.1.3.5
Drive gears and rings ...................................................................................................................... 10.1.3.6
Manual rotation ............................................................................................................................... 10.1.3.7
JOG ................................................................................................................................................. 10.1.3.8
Preform distributor transmission ....................................................................................................................... 10.2
PREFORM FEEDER 11
PREFORM DECONTAMINATION MODULE 12

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 12.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 12.2
Conveyor system .............................................................................................................................................. 12.3
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 12.3.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 12.3.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 12.3.3
Transmission .................................................................................................................................................... 12.4

Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 12.4.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 12.4.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 12.4.3
Dedust module (option) .................................................................................................................................... 12.5
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 12.5.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 12.5.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 12.5.3
Dedust air treatment line ................................................................................................................. 12.5.3.1
Dedust wheel .................................................................................................................................. 12.5.3.2
Aspiration system ............................................................................................................................ 12.5.3.3
Evaporation station and treatment wheel ......................................................................................................... 12.6
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 12.6.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 12.6.2
30/03/2015 II - 3/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 12.6.3

Fluid lines ......................................................................................................................................................... 12.7
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 12.7.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 12.7.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 12.7.3
SURFACE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 13

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 13.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 13.2
FEEDING 14
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 14.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 14.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 14.3
PREFORM LOADING/OFFLOADING 15
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 15.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 15.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 15.3
SPINDLE CHAIN SYSTEM 16

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 16.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 16.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 16.3
EXTERNAL PREFORM DECONTAMINATION 17

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 17.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 17.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 17.3
INFRARED OVEN 18
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 18.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 18.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 18.3
FALSE LAMP SUPPORT 19

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 19.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 19.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 19.3
OVEN VENTILATION SYSTEM 20

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 20.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 20.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 20.3
Ventilation cabinet .................................................................................................................................... 20.3.1
Oven ventilation filtration system (option) ................................................................................................ 20.3.2
Functions ......................................................................................................................................... 20.3.2.1
Description ...................................................................................................................................... 20.3.2.2
Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 20.3.2.3
AERAULIC SYSTEMS IN THE OVEN 21

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 21.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 21.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 21.3
II - 4/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
VENTILATION CABINET 22
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 22.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 22.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 22.3
FILTRATION CABINET 23
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 23.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 23.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 23.3
OVEN EXTRACTOR UNIT 24

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 24.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 24.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 24.3
TRANSFER ARM AND TURNTABLE 25

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 25.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 25.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 25.3
TRANSFER WHEEL 26
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 26.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 26.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 26.3
TRANSFER ARM 27
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 27.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 27.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 27.3
ITEM EJECTION SYSTEM 28

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 28.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 28.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 28.3
RECOVERY CARRIAGE 29
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 29.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 29.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 29.3
BLOWING STATION 30
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 30.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 30.2
Mold support unit .............................................................................................................................................. 30.3
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 30.3.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 30.3.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 30.3.3
Mold support unit assembly .............................................................................................................................. 30.4
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 30.4.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 30.4.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 30.4.3
The "Push-up" system (option) ......................................................................................................................... 30.5
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 30.5.1
30/03/2015 II - 5/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 30.5.2

Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 30.5.3
"Pushed-up base" system (option) ................................................................................................................... 30.6
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 30.6.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 30.6.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 30.6.3
"TORNADO" nozzle cylinder and solenoid valves ............................................................................................ 30.7
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 30.7.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 30.7.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 30.7.3
Stretching system ............................................................................................................................................. 30.8
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 30.8.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 30.8.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 30.8.3
Production cycle diagram ................................................................................................................................. 30.9
BLOWING MACHINE AERAULIC SYSTEM 31

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 31.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 31.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 31.3
RETRACTABLE BOTTLE OUTFEED 32

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 32.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 32.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 32.3
BOTTLE OUTFEED WHEEL 33

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 33.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 33.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 33.3
BOTTLE OUTFEED RETRACTABLE GUIDE 34

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 34.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 34.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 34.3
BLOWER/FILLER SEPARATING WALL 35

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 35.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 35.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 35.3
BOTTLE OUTFEED AIR CIRCUIT 36

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 36.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 36.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 36.3
ACCESS GLOVE 37
Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 37.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 37.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 37.3
AUTOMATIC GREASE SPRAY SYSTEM 38

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 38.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 38.2
II - 6/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 38.3
AUTOMATED SELF-LUBRICATING SYSTEM 39

Functions .......................................................................................................................................................... 39.1
Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 39.2
Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 39.3
BLOWING MACHINE SAFETY SYSTEM 40

Emergency stop buttons ................................................................................................................................... 40.1
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 40.1.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 40.1.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 40.1.3
Doors open sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 40.2
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 40.2.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 40.2.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 40.2.3
30/03/2015 II - 7/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
II - 8/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Principles Part II
1 PRINCIPLES
This chapter does not cover the operation of any associated options.
5 4 3 2 1
1-010398-01-xx.svg
1 The bulk-stored preforms are aligned

2 The preforms are decontaminated
3 The preforms are heat conditioned
4 The preforms are blown in a mold
5 The finished articles (bottle, jar, or flask) are fed out of the machine
30/03/2015 II - 1 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Principles
II - 1 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Main components Part II
2 MAIN COMPONENTS
2.1 Blowing machine component parts
17 20 19 20 11 10 9
16
18
20
12
14
13
15
20
21 5 4 8 3 1 2 6 7
1-017204-02-xx.svg
1 Preform infeed rail 13 Preform and bottle transfer turntable

2 UV infeed rail (option) 14 Blow wheel
3 Preform infeed wheel 15 Item outfeed
4 PredisTM electrical cabinet (option) 16 Steam sterilization module (option)
Preform decontamination module PredisTM Electrical cabinet for the steam sterilization
5 17
(option) module (option)
6 Dedust wheel (option) 18 Pneumatic interface
7 Dedust aspirator (option) 19 Hydraulic interface panel
8 Preform disinfection wheel (option) 20 Blowing machine aeraulic system (option)
9 Preform conditioning oven 21 Control and command panel
External preform decontamination (Oven UV
10 None Bottle vision system (option)*

cabin) (option)
11 PredisTM and oven air extractor (option) None Surface disinfection system (option)*
12 Main electrical cabinet
* Not shown
30/03/2015 II - 2 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Main components
2.2 Component parts of ultra-clean preform feeder
9 1
12
8 11 10 6 5 4 3
1-008758-11-xx.svg
1 Hopper 9 Elevator column and hopper electrical cabinet

2 Elevator column 10 Unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet
3 Intermediate conveyor 11 Aspiration system electrical cabinet
4 Mini-hopper assembly 12 UV 3M infeed rail electrical cabinets (option)
5 Ejection and recycle conveyor None Aspiration system*
6 Orienting roller assembly None Preform ionizer*
7 Infeed rail None UV 3M infeed rail (option)*
8 Gantry
* Not shown
II - 2 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Control and command panel Part II
3 CONTROL AND COMMAND PANEL

3.1 Functions
The command and control panel is the work station from where the operator is able to:
- Operate the machine.
- Access the command and control station (PCC).
- Observe the machine visually.
3.2 Description
8
6
2
10
1-015617-01-xx.svg
1 PCC (Control and Command station) 6 Work table

2 Operating mode switch 7 "Remote access" Kit (not shown)
JOG. For further informationplease refer to
3 8 Air conditioning PCC (option)*
chapter "Control and command panel ".
4 Printer 9 Control panel box
5 UPS 10 Emergency stop button
* Not shown
3.3 PCC (Control and Command station)
BCU-004, BCU-009
BNE-002
3.3.1 Functions
The PCC is an industrial PC with a touch screen which controls and monitors the machine.
30/03/2015 II - 3 - 1/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Control and command panel
3.3.2 Description
1 5 3 4 2
1-006288-01-02.svg
1 PCC touch screen 4 Diskette drive

2 Keyboard 5 Gate
3 DVD-ROM drive A PCC application main page screen
3.3.3 Operation
The user controls the machine through a structure based on families within the PCC application. The plc processes
information sent from the PCC application and sends commands to the machine. Operator actions are transmitted
through the (1) touch screen and the keys on the (2) keyboard. The operator can print reports, charts and
parameters displayed on the screen.
Exit the PCC application before turning off the PCC in order to avoid any malfunctions on the PCC
application.
3.3.3.1 PCC touch screen
The touch screen is very fragile.
Never clean the screen using abrasive materials.
Never place any object on the screen that may cause damage.
You can point to objects and information on the (1) touch screen using your finger. Press on objects on the screen
or use the keys to select them. Keep your finger on a cursor or window and drag across the screen. The screen
switches to standby when the PCC application has not been used for at least 15 min. Press the screen to reactivate
it.
3.3.3.2 Keyboard
The keyboard has F1 to F10(2) keys through which machine operating commands can be executed.
3.3.3.3 DVD-ROM drive
The DVD-ROM(3) drive allows the PCC application to be updated.
3.3.3.4 Diskette drive
The 3"1/2 diskette drive (4) allows you to import or export production recipes and maintenance schedules.
3.3.3.5 Gate
The gate (5) protects the various drives and connectors.
II - 3 - 2/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.3.3.6 Beacon stack
For further information, please refer to chapter "Electrical cabinet and boxes".
3.4 Operating mode switch

3.4.1 Functions
Securely lock in the operator’s choice of one of the operating modes:
- "Settings" mode (A) is reserved for process tests and machine settings.
- "Production" mode (B) is reserved for putting the machine in production.
- "JOG" mode (C) is reserved for machine rotation, at low speed, using "JOG".
3.4.2 Description
A B C
1-015644-01-xx.svg
A "Settings" mode C "JOG" mode

B Production mode 1 Switch key
3.4.3 Operation
Position the switch key (1) on the desired operating mode (A, B, C).
Remove the switch key (1) once the operating mode is in the desired position.
3.5 Printer
3.5.1 Functions
The printer prints information from the PCC:
- Production recipes.
- Production reports.
- Event history.
- Machine configuration.
- Alarm history.
3.5.2 Description
The display of the printer may change but the functions remain the same.
30/03/2015 II - 3 - 3/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3 2
1-008527-01-xx.svg
1 Start/stop button 3 Ink cartridge status lamp

2 Cancel print button
3.5.3 Operation
For further information please refer to the manual supplied with the printer.
Press the button (1) to turn the printer on and off.
3.6 UPS
3.6.1 Functions
If the mains power supply is cut off, the UPS continues to provide power to the PCC while the PCC application
shuts down correctly.
The UPS protects the PCC from:
- Mains power cuts and micro-power cuts.
- Mains power surges and troughs.
- Mains power pollution (parasites).
II - 3 - 4/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.6.2 Description
2 3 4
1-011906-01-xx.svg
1 Mute button 2 Start/stop button

3 Menu/display button 4 Circuit breaker
A Display interface
3.6.3 Operation
For further information, see the technical documentation supplied with the UPS.
Press the button (2) to turn the UPS on or off.
3.7 "Remote access" Kit

3.7.1 Functions
The "Remote access" kit allows SIDEL, upon request from the client, to access remotely the PCC application of the
machine via an ADSL internet connection.
3.7.2 Description
2
30/03/2015 II - 3 - 5/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-008632-01-xx.svg
1 Server 3 ON / OFF switch

2 Modem
3.7.3 Operation
The server (1) links different components (PCC, controller, ...) between themselves using an internet connection.
The remote access control (2) is connected to the server (1) and to the internet connection.
The switch (3) allows the client to authorize or not the remote connection.
To activate the remote connection, the switch (3) must be turned to position *2.
3.8 Air conditioning

3.8.1 Functions
The air conditioning unit (1):
- removes the heat produced by the active components fitted in the interior of the electrical cabinet (2),
- protects components which are sensitive to heat by cooling the air inside the electrical cabinet (2).
3.8.2 Description
4 5 6 3 1 2
1-010627-01-xx.svg
1 Air conditioning unit 5 Indicator

2 Electrical box 6 Indicator
3 Regulator 7 Condensate outlet
4 Display
II - 3 - 6/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.8.3 Operation
When the electrical cabinet is switched on (2):
- the air conditioning unit (1) starts,
- the regulator (3) monitors and regulates the air conditioning unit (1).
The display (4) shows the operating status of the air conditioning unit:
- the green lamp (5) indicates that the device is operating normally,
- the red lamp (6) indicates a fault.
An alarm message appears at the PCC.
Never alter the seals on the electrical cabinet (2) as this may cause condensation.
Never block the interior and exterior air conditioning vents on the electrical cabinet (2).
Make sure there is a drain or a receptacle to collect the flow of condensates (7).
30/03/2015 II - 3 - 7/8
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
II - 3 - 8/8 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / High pressure air circuit Part II
4 HIGH PRESSURE AIR CIRCUIT
BSU-004
BCU-005, BCU-008
BPU-002, BPU-012
4.1 Functions
The high pressure air circuit regulates, filters and distributes the air required for the preblowing and blowing of the
products.
4.2 Description
6
1 2 5
1-006897-04-xx.svg
30/03/2015 II - 4 - 1/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / High pressure air circuit
1 High pressure air supply interface panel 5 Compensation system

2 Preblow, blow and service air system 6 High pressure air flowmeter (option)
3 "TORNADO" solenoid valve pilot system 7 Steam sterilization module (option)
4 Double filtration (option)
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 High pressure air supply interface panel
BDM-006, BDE-013 (option)
The characteristics of the air and fluid supplies are described in the "Presentation Manual", please refer to
chapter "Air quality", in the Presentation Manual.
The general interface panel has been designed for air which satisfies the required characteristics.
The general interface panel has been dimensioned to preserve the characteristics of the air as it enters the
machine until its final use.
The local air supply must maintain both the flowrate and a constant pressure of 40 bar minimum.
For certain simple production processes the pressure required may be lower (to 35 bar). Consult SIDEL to
determine the real minimum pressure.
II - 4 - 2/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
12 9 3 2
15
10 4
13 5
14 7
16
11 8 17
1-010619-06-xx.svg
The general high pressure air interface panel regulates and filters air before it is supplied to the machine.
- The manual control valve (1) opens and closes the circuit before regulation.
Padlock the manual control valve (1) in closed position before working on the high air pressure circuit.
Check that the pressure gauges (5 ; 12) show no pressure before carrying out any works on the air system.
- The safety valve (2) releases the air via the silencer (3) if there is excess pressure (50 bar) before regulation.
- The pressure switch (4) along with the indicator at the PCC inform the plc of the pressure in the circuit before
regulation.
- The pressure gauge (5) indicates the pressure in the circuit before regulation.
- The filter (6) retains undesirable particles down to 1 µm (99,999 %) and 0,01 µm (99,9 %).
- The indicator (7) indicates the level of saturation in the filter (6).
- The automatic purge (8) clears condensates which have accumulated in the filter (6).
- The plc controls the regulator (9). The regulator (9) adjusts the service pressure.
The regulator (9) is set up at the PCC, see procedure "BPU-002".
- The safety valve (10) releases the pressure in the circuit via the silencer (11) if there is excess pressure (42 bar)
after regulation.
- The pressure gauge (12) indicates the pressure in the circuit after regulation.
- The pressure switch (13), fitted with a PCC indicator, controls the pressure in the circuit after regulation.
30/03/2015 II - 4 - 3/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- The pneumatically controlled purge valve (14) opens and closes the circuit after regulation. The regulator (9)
pilots the purge valve (14).
- The S22.0 sensor (15) indicates to the plc that the regulator (9) is in purge position.
If there is a fault an alert message appears at the PCC.
m Dewpoint sensor (16) (option)

- The sensor (16) located on the general high pressure air intake panel indicates the dewpoint temperature to the
PCC.
- The tube (17) allows a leak away from the sensor (16) to avoid disturbances during measurement.
- If there is a fault, an information message appears at the PCC: "Dewpoint temperature eceeds limits".
4.3.2 Preblow, blow and service air system
High pressure
Preblow pressure
- The rotary union (1) provides the pneumatic interface (high and low pressure) between the rotary and fixed
sections of the blow wheel.
- The distributor (2) supplies blowing air, preblowing air and service air to the blowing stations.
- The release valve (3) reduces the blowing pressure down to preblowing pressure and supplies the reserve
(4). The pressure reducer (3) is connected to a regulator valve (5). The plc controls the regulator (5).
The regulator valve (5) is adjusted at the PCC, see procedure "BPU-012".
- The reserve tank (4) supplies the air capacity required for preblowing the products.
- The safety valve (6) releases the air from the preblowing circuit (via the silencer (7)) if there is excess pressure
after regulation.
- The pressure gauge (8) indicates the preblowing pressure.
- The compensation air circuit (9) is connected to the "TORNADO" solenoid valve mounting (10). The
compensation air circuit varies according to the type of machine.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Blowing station".
II - 4 - 4/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4.3.3 Pilot system
5 2
6 7 4
1-006597-01-xx.svg
Low pressure air inlet (rotary union) 8 bar air (released from the high pressure circuit)
5 bar air (released from the low pressure circuit) 6 bar air (released from the 8 bar)
5 bar air (start up or regulation) or 6 bar air (in
High pressure air inlet (rotary union)
production)
Machine start up activates only the low pressure air system. The low pressure air distributor (1) (on the rotary air
union) supplies the piloting system for the "TORNADO" solenoid valves (2) via the (5 bar) pressure regulator (3)
and the selector (4).
The authorization for preform feeding activates the high pressure circuit. The distributor (5) feeds the "TORNADO"
solenoid valve (2) pilot system via the (8 bar) pressure release valve (6), the pressure regulator (7) and the selector
(4).
The difference in pressure between the 2 pressure regulators (3 ; 7)(5 bar & 6 bar) will cause a change in the air
circuit at the selector (4).
m Conclusion:
- When the machine starts up, the "TORNADO" solenoid valves (2) are piloted by air (5 bar) taken from the
machine low pressure circuit.

- In production, the "TORNADO" solenoid valves (2) are piloted by air (6 bar) taken from the high pressure circuit.
When the machine is in setting mode, the "TORNADO" solenoid valves (2) are piloted by the air (5 bar) taken
from the machine low pressure circuit.
m Required pressures:
- The pressure regulator (3) should be set to 5 +0,1/-0,2 bar.
- The pressure regulator (6) should be set to 8 +1/0 bar.
- The pressure regulator (7) should be set to 6 +0,2/-0,2 bar.
30/03/2015 II - 4 - 5/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4.3.4 Direct compensation
1-007207-01-xx.svg
1 "TORNADO" solenoid valve base 2 Mold support unit
The hose (3) connected to the "DC" orifice on the base (1) of the "TORNADO" solenoid valves carries air at the
pressure of the item in production to the compensation circuit:
- During preblowing, the compensation circuit is supplied with preblowing air.
- During blowing, the compensation circuit is supplied with blowing air.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Blowing station".
II - 4 - 6/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Steam sterilization module (option) Part II
5 STEAM STERILIZATION MODULE (OPTION)

5.1 Functions
The steam sterilization module sterilizes filters 40 bar "SRF" (A) before the machine is put into production..
This function is automated at the PCC.
The PCC allows the operation to be monitored in real time.
5.2 Description
5 6 3 4
A 1 2
1-017335-01-xx.svg
A High-pressure air circuit filter(s) (SRF) 3 High pressure air inlet

Filtered high-pressure air outlet to the blower’s
B High-pressure air circuit filter(s) (AK) 4
rotary union
1 Steam inlet 5 Solenoid valve (EV41)
2 Valve control air inlet 6 Solenoid valve (EV40)
5.3 Operation
Certain elements require specific maintenance.

For further information, please refer to chapter "Maintenance schedule".
Production must be stopped in order to start the sterilization cycle.
Production can not be started while the sterilization cycle is in progress.
The number of filters (A ;B) varies depending on the machine model and configuration.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Double filtration (option)".
The "SRF" (A) filters are sterilized in 3 steps:

- the temperature of the "SRF" filters (A) is raised,
30/03/2015 II - 5 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Steam sterilization module (option)
- the temperature of the "SRF" filters (A) is maintained,

- the "SRF" filters (A) are cooled.
The sterilization cycle is entirely automated.
The sterilization cycle is started and monitored at the PCC.
For further information, please refer to chapter The "Hygiene" family.
For further information, see procedure "BCU-044".
The solenoid valves on the steam sterilization module are controlled by the plc and can be tested by the operator
using the PCC application.
For further information, see procedure "BPU-006".
II - 5 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Low pressure air circuit Part II
6 LOW PRESSURE AIR CIRCUIT

6.1 Blowing machine low pressure air circuit
BSU-004
BCU-005, BCU-008, BCU-018
6.1.1 Functions
The low pressure air circuit (7 bar) regulates, filters and distributes the air required for the actuators and various
other service requirements on the machine.
6.1.2 Description
6.1.2.1 Rotating section
1 Low pressure air supply interface panel 3 Blowing station

2 Distribution system (rotary)
6.1.2.2 Fixed section
11 7 13 6 5 12
9
10 3 2 1 4
1-010106-01-xx.svg
30/03/2015 II - 6 - 1/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Low pressure air circuit
Permanent low pressure air circuit 6 Bottle ejection
Secured low pressure air circuit 7 Preform ejection
PredisTM preform decontamination module low

8 Infeed guide
pressure air supply circuit
1 Low pressure air supply interface panel 9 Preform infeed and electro-airjet
2 Brake 10 Misloaded preform ejection
3 Brake control 11 Preform decontamination module PredisTM
4 Mold base removal assistance 12 Surface disinfection system
5 Item outfeed 13 Preform ionisation on the infeed rail
6.1.3 Operation
6.1.3.1 Low pressure air supply interface panel
BDM-005
The general interface panel has been designed for air which satisfies the required characteristics.
The general interface panel has been dimensioned to preserve the characteristics of the air as it enters the
machine until its final use.
The low pressure air interface panel regulates and filters air before it is supplied into the machine.
14 11 9 4 1
10 3
2
13
8 ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
12 7
6 5
1-006026-05-xx.svg
Padlock the manual control valve (1) in closed position before any works using the plug (2).
II - 6 - 2/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- The safety valve (3) releases air from the circuit if there is excess pressure before regulation.
- The filter (5) retains undesirable particles down to 5 µm.
- The purge (6) drains off condensates which accumulate in the filter (5).
- The Tee (7) supplies the permanent low pressure circuit with filtered non-regulated air.
The regulation system (8) and the manual regulation valve (9) adjust the service pressure, see
procedure "BCU-018".
- The pressure switch (11), fitted with a PCC indicator, controls the pressure in the circuit after regulation.
- The solenoid valve (12) opens and closes the supply to the secured low pressure air circuit. The PCC pilots the
solenoid valve (12).
- The connector (13) supplies the fixed part of the machine.
- The connector (14) supplies the rotary part of the machine.
6.1.3.2 Distribution system
5
1-006600-01-xx.svg
30/03/2015 II - 6 - 3/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- The rotary union (1) provides the pneumatic interface (high and low pressure) between the rotary and fixed
sections of the blow wheel.
- The distributor (2) distributes service air to the blowing stations.
- The hoses (3) supply the stretching (4) and nozzle (5) cylinders.
A hose connected to the distributor (2) supplies the solenoid valve "TORNADO" piloting system.
For further information, please refer to chapter "High pressure air circuit".
6.2 preform distributor low pressure air circuit
BCU-005, BCU-008
BDM-005
6.2.1 Functions
The (7 bar) low pressure air circuit ensures the following:
- the distribution of air required for ejecting joined preforms,
- the regulation and distribution of air required for the preform ionization system on the infeed rail if the option is
fitted.
6.2.2 Description
The low pressure air crcuit (7 bar) comes from either the permananent blowing machine low pressure air circuit or
from the "Predis" filtered air circuit if the option is fitted.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Low pressure air circuit".
The (7 bar) low pressure circuit continuously supplies the solenoid valves (1) on the joined preform ejection system
in the unscrambler roller assembly.
1
II - 6 - 4/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-008998-01-xx.svg
For further information, please refer to chapter "Preform feeder".
The (7 bar) low pressure air circuit supplies the preform ionization system (2) on the infeed rail.
2
1-008914-01-xx.svg
For further information, please refer to chapter "Preform ionisation on the infeed rail".
30/03/2015 II - 6 - 5/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
II - 6 - 6/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Hydraulic system Part II
7 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
BCU-005, BCU-008
BDM-004, BDM-007, BDM-043
7.1 Functions
The hydraulic system regulates, filters and distributes the coolant for the mold shell supports, the mold bases and
the oven cooling shields.
7.2 Description
3
1-006290-01-xx.svg
1 Hydraulic interface panel 3 Oven distribution system

2 Blow wheel distribution system
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Hydraulic interface panel
BDM-007
30/03/2015 II - 7 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Hydraulic system
3 1
13 12
11 6
10
1-006291-01-xx.svg
The hydraulic interface panel regulates and filters fluids before they are supplied to the machine.
- The manual valves (1 ; 2) isolate the mold base and oven distribution systems both up-circuit and down-circuit.
- The manual valves (3 ; 4) isolate the mold body distribution system both up-circuit and down-circuit.
- The manual valves (5) and (1) isolate the filter (6).
- The manual valves (7) drain the distribution systems.
- The sensors (8) which are connected to PCC indicators measure the temperature of the fluids in the blow wheel
systems.
- The flowmeters (9) connected to PCC indicators measure the quantity of fluid flowing around the blow wheel
distribution systems. If there is a significant difference relative to the flowrate setpoint, production will be
stopped.
- The solenoid valve (10) isolates the mold base distribution system.
- The solenoid valve (11) isolates the mold body system.
- The solenoid valve (12) isolates the oven distribution system.
- The solenoid valves (10 ; 11 ; 12) close if production is stopped in order to prevent condensation.
- The filters (6 ; 13) retain undesirable particles down to 170 µm.
II - 7 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Hydraulic system Part II
7.3.2 Blow wheel distribution system
4 1
1-006292-01-xx.svg
The blow wheel distribution system supplies fluids to each of the machine’s blowing stations.
- The rotary union (1) provides the hydraulic interface between the rotary and fixed sections of the blow wheel.
- The distributor (2) supplies fluids to the blowing stations via the blocks (3 ; 4).
- The block (3) distributes fluids towards the mold bodies (5).
- The block (4) distributes fluids to the mold bases (6).
- The unit (4) distributes water to the mold necks (option) (T°<85°C).
30/03/2015 II - 7 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Hydraulic system
7.3.3 Oven distribution system
1 4 2
1-008322-02-xx.svg
The oven distribution system keeps the shields (1) located below the oven lamps and reflectors at a low
temperature.
- The solenoid valve (2), located on the hydraulic interface table, opens the oven distribution system as soon as
the oven begins heating.
- The sensor (3) on the oven frame (connected to an indicator at the PCC) measures the temperature of the fluid
in the oven distribution system.
- The flowmeter (4) on the oven frame, connected to an indicator at the PCC, measures the quantity of fluid
flowing around the oven distribution system. If there is a significant difference relative to the flowrate setpoint,
production will be stopped.
The distribution system (5 ; 6) is optional depending on the model of the machine.
- The distribution pump (5), in conjunction with non-return valves (6), circulates the water in a closed loop. This
system reduces water consumption and, with finer adjustment, prevents the formation of condensation.
- The pressure gauge (7) indicates the pressure of the water upstream from the flow pump (5).
- The pressure gauge (8) indicates the water pressure downstream from the flow pump (5).
II - 7 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Water characteristics and treatment Part II
8 WATER CHARACTERISTICS AND TREATMENT
Procedure, "Checking the quality of the water": see procedure "BNM-050", in the Servicing Procedure
Catalog.
8.1 Ryznar index
The Ryznar (IR) index is also called the stability index.
The Ryznar (IR) index determines the tendency of water to corrode or scale. The IR index is used to know the
degree of scaling or aggressiveness on installations and, if necessary, to anticipate the protection of the
installations against these phenomena by recommending appropriate treatment.
The Ryznar (IR) index is defined by a scale of 4 to 10.
- For an IR of less than 6, the water is said to scale.
- For an IR of between 6 and 6,7, the water is said to be stable.
- For an IR of more than 6,7, the water is said to be aggressive or corrosive.
- The lower the index, the greater the risk of a fur deposit forming.
- The higher the index, the greater the risk of corrosion of installations.
The IR index is determined by the following characteristics:
- pH,
- TH,
- TAC,
- conductivity,
- the temperature at which the water is used.
Water which is stable when cold will scale when hot and inversely water which is stable when hot will be
corrosive when cold.
The water use temperature to be analysed must be specified.
8.2 pH(potential Hydrogen)

The pH indicates the concentration of hydrogen ions (H+) in the water. The pH is defined by a scale of 0 to 14.
- Water with a pH 7 is said to be neutral.
- For a pH less than 7, the water is said to be acid.
- For a pH greater than 7, the water is said to be alkaline.
A simple pH measurement does not given any definitive indication as to the quality of the water. To know the
aggressiveness or scaling capacity of the water, the TAC (bicarbonate content), TH (water hardness),
temperature of use and conductivity values must also be known.
8.3 TH (Total Hardness)

TH indicates the overall quantity of calcium and magnesium salts. The TH measurement unit is the French degree
(°f).
1 °f corresponds to 10 mg/l of calcium carbonate (CaCO3).
For information, 1 °f corresponds either to:

- 4 mg/l of calcium (Ca2+).
- 2,4 mg/l of magnesium (Mg2+).
The standard NF EN 14743 defines the measurement unit in millimoles per litre (mmol/L). One millimole per
litre of (CaCO3) corresponds to 10°f.
There are several types of TH:
- Total TH: sum of the calcium and magnesium salts.
30/03/2015 II - 8 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Water characteristics and treatment
- Calcium TH: sum of the calcium salts.

- Magnesium TH: sum of the magnesium salts.
TH or water hardness corresponds to the total TH.
- For a TH of 0 to 15 °f, the water is said to be soft.

- For a TH of 15 to 25 °f, the water is said to be calcareous.
- For a TH greater than 25 °f, the water is said to be hard.
The higher the TH, the greater the risk of a fur deposit on the hot parts of the machine.
8.4 TAC (Total Alkalinity)

TAC indicates the bicarbonate, carbonate and hydroxide content. The TAC measurement unit is the French degree
(°f).
1 °f corresponds to 10 mg/l of calcium carbonate (CaCO3).
For information, 1 °f corresponds either to:
- 3,4 mg/l of hydroxides (OH-).
- 6,0 mg/l of carbonates (CO32–).
- 12,2 mg/l of bicarbonates (HCO3-).
8.5 Conductivity
Conductivity is the capacity of water to conduct electricity. The conductivity measurement unit is microsiemens per
centimetre (µS/cm).
Conductivity is directly proportional to the quantity of mineral salts dissolved in the water. The greater the
concentration of dissolved mineral salts, the higher the conductivity, the water is said to be hard. On the contrary,
water which is low in mineral salts has a low conductivity, the water is said to be soft.
The conductivity measurement defines the total quantity of mineral salts dissolved (TDS) in the water. The (TDS)
measurement unit is part per million (ppm).
1 ppm is equal to 1 mg/l.
- Distilled water: 0,5 µS/cm.

- Public network water: 500 to 1055 µS/cm.
- Sea water: 5500 µS/cm.
The measurement depends on the temperature of the water analysed.
The conductivity of the water can be affected by the presence of various materials:_oil, being a poor
conductor, reduces the conductivity of the water.
From a certain limit, the conductivity notably affects the results of the analyses and is used to detect a variation in
the composition of the water.

8.6 Turbidity
Turbidity describes the amount of material in a liquid which makes it cloudy.
The turbidity measurement units are:
- Nephelometric Turbidity Unit (NTU),
- Nephelometric Formazine Unit (NFU),
- Formazine attenuation unit (FAU).
1 NFU equals 1 FAU.
For a turbidity of less than 20 NFU, 1 NFU equals 1 NTU.

For a turbidity of more than 20 NFU, 1 NFU equals 0,6 NTU.
II - 8 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Water characteristics and treatment Part II
Turbidity must be as low as possible to facilitate the spectrometer analysis.
8.7 Larson – Skold index
The Larson-Skold (LSI) index is also called the corrosivity index .
The Larson-Skold index describes the potential of water to cause pitting type corrosion in the installation.
Pitting type corrosion is a very localised form of corrosion and produces small holes in the metal which are difficult
to locate.
The Larson-Skold index is determined by the following characteristics:
- chlorides (Cl-),
- sulphates (SO42–),
- TAC.
For a LSI of less than 0,8, the corrosion potential is low.
For a LSI of 0,8 to 1,2, the chlorides and sulphates may interfere with the formation of the natural protective film in
the installations.
For a LSI of more than 1,2, the corrosion potential is great and must be anticipated with an appropriate treatment.
8.8 Sampling and analysis
The time interval between sampling and analysing the water samples affects the analysis results.
The period between the sample and the analysis must be as short as possible and in all cases less than 5
days.
The longer the period, the greater the corrosive potential of the water sample.
8.9 Water treatment

If the quality of the untreated water does not correspond to the specification (Ryznar Index between 6 and 6.7 and
chloride concentration <50 mg/l, refer to "Water Quality" chapter in the Presentation Manual), treatment is
mandatory.
Various means and advice are recommended by specialized companies:
- Slightly soften the water.
- Avoid using demineralized, osmosis-purified or distilled water.
- Treat by adding a corrosion and scale inhibitor.
In the latter case,
The principle of the treatment is to contribute towards the formation of a protective film in the installation circuits.
The treatment recommended differs according to the temperature at which the water is used.
SIDEL recommends the following treatment:
- "PERFORMAX CL 1300".
SIDEL will not guarantee the quality of the circuit if the water treatment is different from that recommended.
The treatment carried out modifies the characteristics of the water and affects the results of the water analyses.
For the water analyses after treatment, comply with the specifications below.
30/03/2015 II - 8 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Water characteristics and treatment
8.9.1 Diagnosis of state of corrosion of system

If the metal concentrations below exceed the maximum values, the water can no longer be treated. The corrosion is
too advanced for the treatment to effectively act against it.
CORROSION INDICATORS IN THE CIRCUIT

Fe 2+ 1 mg/L
Al 3+ 500 µg/L
Zn 1 mg/L
Cu 2+ 500 µg/L
OTHER PARAMETERS
Turbidity 12 FAU
Color As clear as possible
8.9.2 "Treatable" water specifications

The corrosion and scale inhibitor products cannot treat all types of water.
The tables below indicate the maximum water characteristic values before treatment in order for the treatment to be
effective.
m For "PERFORMAX CL 1300"
Parameter Value maximum / units

RYZNAR INDEX 4,5 to 7,5
pH 7 to 7,8
TH (Total Hardness) 0 to 40 °f
TAC (Total Alkalinity) 15 to 35 °f
Water analysis temperature 20 to 25 °C
LARSON-SKOLD INDEX 2,8
Cl - 200 mg/L
SO4 2- 200 mg/L
8.9.3 Follow-up of dosage

The treatment product concentrations recommended by SIDEL are the following:
- ** "PERFORMAX CL 1300" concentration = 10 000ppm +/- 10% (i.e. approximately 1,1 L for 100 L).
To know the concentration of the product, you must measure the concentration of one of the chemical components
of the product: Orthophosphate (PO43-).
The level of PO43- recommended below corresponds to the difference between the level (of PO43-) recorded after
the treatment and the level (of PO43-) recorded before the treatment.
"PERFORMAX CL 1300" PO43- = 44 mg/L +/- 10 % **

II - 8 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Electrical cabinet and boxes Part II
9 ELECTRICAL CABINET AND BOXES

9.1 Functions
The electrical cabinets and boxes supply power to the various parts of the machine.
9.2 Description
9.2.1 Blowing machine
12 1 2 3 4
11
10
9 8 7 6
1-017452-01-xx.svg
Bottle Switch management electric cabinet PredisTM Preform decontamination module

1 7
(option) electrical cabinet (option)
Blower / filler isolation gate management
2 On-board electrical cabinets (plc inputs/outputs) 8

electrical cabinet (option)
3 Enclosure area management electrical cabinet 9 Filler safety management electric cabinet
Door safety, lighting and "JOG" management Emergency stop and preform and bottle transfer
4 10
electrical cabinet safety management electrical cabinet
Electrical cabinet to manage the external preform Hydraulic and pneumatic panel management
5 11
decontamination module (furnace UV) electrical cabinet
Electric cabinet to manage impeller aeraulics,
6 Blower main electrical cabinet 12 surface disinfection and steam sterilisation of the
"SRF" filters.
30/03/2015 II - 9 - 1/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Electrical cabinet and boxes
m Main electrical cabinet (4)
2
7
3
6
5
4
1-016096-01-xx.svg
1 Main "Q1" circuit breaker switch (lockable) 5 Emergency stop button

2 Machine operation timer 6 Power-on lamp
3 Power-on push button 7 Power-off push button
4 Main key switch
24 26 28 27 20 22
23 25 21
1-008533-09-xx.svg
II - 9 - 2/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
20 "Q1" main circuit breaker 25 Speed drives

21 Primary circuit section switch "Q1A" 26 Programmable logic controller (PLC)
22 Peripheral equipment circuit breaker "Q47A" 27 Striker fuses
23 Air conditioning 28 Mains input
24 Beacon stack
9.2.2 TM Preform distributor
BCU-003, BCU-010
1-010282-01-xx.svg
1 Unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet 3 UV infeed rail electrical cabinet(s) (option)
2 Elevator column and hopper electrical cabinet
30/03/2015 II - 9 - 3/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Description of the unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet (1)
4
7
6 9
8 10
1-007384-06-xx.svg
"Q1KA" circuit breaker in the preform distributor "X1" terminal block (electrical input from main
4 8
electrical cabinet (lockable) (lockable) electrical cabinet)
5 Power-on lamp 9 Speed drive of the mini-hopper elevator column
High / low speed switch of the mini-hopper
6 On-board PLC modules (input/output) 10
elevator column
7 Unscrambler roller speed drive
If "Q1KA" (4) is open and "Q1" (main electrical cabinet) is closed, the terminal "X1" and the orange wiring in
the preform distributor electrical cabinets are still live.
m Description of the hopper and elevator column electrical cabinet (2)
11 12 14 13 16
18
15 17
19
1-007386-08-xx.svg
Hopper and elevator column electrical cabinet

11 16 On-board PLC modules (input/output)
circuit breaker "Q1XA" (lockable)
12 Power-on lamp 17 Hopper belt speed drive
13 Start button 18 Elevator column speed drive
14 Stop button 19 Elevator column low/high speed switch
15 Emergency stop button
The "Q1XA" circuit breaker (11) in the hopper electrical cainet (2) is powered from the "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in
the unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet (1).
If the "Q1XA" (11) is open and the "Q1KA" (4) is closed, the orange wiring in the hopper and elevator column
electrical cabinet is still live.
II - 9 - 4/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The start button (13) and the stop button (14) only control the start and stop for the hopper and column
assembly.
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Main switch
1 3
1-008533-05-xx.svg
9.3.1.1 Blowing machine

The main circuit breaker "Q1" (1) powers or isolates the power circuits on the blowing machine and peripheral
equipment.
When the main "Q1" circuit breaker (1) is open, the primary upstream electrical circuit is still live. Open the
section switch "Q1A"(2) to turn off the primary circuit. The primary electrical circuit uses orange wires.
The primary circuit supplies power to:
- the plc’s,
- the auto-transformer,
- the UPS,
- the air conditioning.
9.3.1.2 Preform feeder
The preform distributor is powered from the "Q47A" peripheral equipment circuit breaker (3) located in the main
electrical cabinet . Turning on the power to the main machine circuit at the main "Q1" circuit breaker (1) supplies
power to the "Q47A" circuit breaker (3). The preform distributor can be isolated at the "Q1" circuit breaker (1) in the
electrical cabinet (blowing machined also isolated) or at the "Q47A" circuit breaker (3) (peripheral equipment and
preform distributor). The "Q47A" circuit breaker (3) is not lockable in standard format.
30/03/2015 II - 9 - 5/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The electrical cabinets for the preform distributor are fited with their own circuit breaker. For further
information, please refer to "Description" in this chapter.
9.3.2 Air conditioning
9.3.2.1 Functions
The air conditioning system controls the temperature inside the main electrical cabient (1). The system protects the
parts inside the cabinet (1) from over-heating.
9.3.2.2 Description
The visual may be different depending on the machine model and configuration: (see illustration (A) or (B)
depending on the model)
A 2 3 4 1 2
B 2 3 4 5
1-010848-01-xx.svg
1 Main electrical cabinet 4 Navigation and configuration keys

2 Regulator 5 Condensate outlet
3 Display
9.3.2.3 Operation
The indicator (3) shows the temperature inside the cabinet (1).
Faults on the air conditioning or the circuit breaker are indicated at the PCC by the "electrical cabinet air
conditioning tripped" alarm. If there is a fault, the display (3) will show the fault number and the temperature
alternately.
For more information on the operation of the air conditioning system, please refer to the technical
documentation provided with this equipment.
The air conditioning is set by SIDEL for optimal operation. Certain parameters may be modified by the SAV
SIDEL for specific requirements.
Never alter the seals on the main electrical cabinet (1) as this may cause condensation.
Never block the vents for the air conditioning inside or outside the electrical cabinet (1).
Make sure there is a drain or a container for condensated water being drained off by the pipe (5).
II - 9 - 6/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The secondary electrical cabinet is also equipped with an air conditioning system.
9.3.3 Beacon stack
BNE-005
1-006073-02-xx.svg
The beacon stack (1) is located on the main electrical cabinet. The color-coded lamps (1) indicate the operating
status of the blowing machine. The alarm siren (2) sounds when there is a fault, allowing action to be taken
quickly.
Color State Description

Red Fixed The fault has been acknowledged at the PCC by the operator
Blinking There is a non-acknowledged fault
If the fault is "Information" the alarm will be intermittent
If the fault is "Critical" the alarm will be continuous
Off No faults
Yellow Blinking The machine is in setting mode (solenoid valve test, use of JOG etc.)
Off The machine is in manual or automatic production mode
Green Fixed Preform loading in progress
Blinking Loading request but waiting for downstream auxiliary equipment
Off The machine is stopped or preform feeding is being forced
Blue Fixed The level of preforms in the hopper is low
Blinking The level of preforms on the infeed rail is low
Off The machine is stopped or the level of preforms is sufficient
9.3.4 Speed drives
BNE-006
30/03/2015 II - 9 - 7/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-006474-01-xx.svg
The speed drives (1) are frequency converters designed to control the machine motors.
- The speed drives control the main motor and the fan motors for the oven are located in the main electrical
cabinet.
- The speed drive which controls the hopper belt motor is located in the hopper and elevator column electrical
cabinet.
- The speed drive which controls the elevator column motor is located in the hopper and elevator column
electrical cabinet.
- The speed drive which controls the unscrambler rollers motor is located in the unscrambler roller assembly
electrical cabinet.
9.3.5 Programmable logic controller (PLC)
BDE-001, BDE-003
1 7
8
1-007067-05-xx.svg
The plc (1) in the electrical cabinet controls machine operation.
II - 9 - 8/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 Programmable logic controller (PLC) 5 On switch

2 Red "BAF" lamp 6 Power module
3 Red "INTF" lamp 7 "All or Nothing" output module
4 Standby switch 8 "EEPROM Flash" card
The PLC program (1) is saved on an "EEPROM Flash" card. PLC data is saved by lithium batteries. If a lithium
battery is flat, a red lamp "BAF"(2) will light up at the corresponding power supply module (6).
The "INTF" lamps (3) indicate an internal fault. The "Diagnostic" window allows you to determine the faulty PLC
system.
For further information, please refer to chapter ""Alarms" family".
The input/output modules are located in:

- the main electrical cabinet,
- the on-board electrical boxes,
- the unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet,
- the hopper elevator column electrical cabinet,
- the remote hopper electrical cabinet (option).
30/03/2015 II - 9 - 9/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
II - 9 - 10/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Transmission Part II
10 TRANSMISSION
10.1 Blowing machine transmission
10.1.1 Functions
The transmission systems rotate and synchronize all of the machine parts.
10.1.2 Description
14 17 15 12 7 5 10 11 19
4 6 18
13 9 8 16 1
1-011825-01-xx.svg
1 Reducer motor 2 Blow wheel drive gear

3 Blow wheel drive ring 4 Transfer wheel drive gear
5 Bottle transfer wheel notched belt 6 Bottle outfeed wheel notched belt*
7 Preform transfer notched belt 8 Oven wheel notched belt
9 Infeed wheel notched belt 10 Bottle transfer wheel shaft
Bottle outfeed wheel shaft or intermediate

11 transfer wheel shaft (in the presence of the bottle 12 Preform transfer wheel shaft
outfeed option on 2 lines)
13 Oven wheel shaft 14 Oven wheel drive gear and drive ring
15 Infeed wheel shaft 16 Manual rotation
Notched belt at bottle outfeed on 2 lines (option)
17 Dedust system (option) 18 *
19 Bottle outfeed wheel shafts (option) *
* Not present with the Combi connection module (option)
If there is a linking module Combi (option), the transmission belt (6) between the bottle transfer wheel (10 )
and the bottle outfeed wheel (11 ) does not exist.
30/03/2015 II - 10 - 1/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Transmission
If there is a linking module Combi (option), the transmission for the filler ensures the rotation of the bottle
outfeed wheel.
For more information please refer to the technical documentation supplied with the machine.
For further information on the dedust system transmission components, please refer to chapter "Dedust
module (option)".
10.1.3 Operation
- The reducer motor rotates the various parts of the machine.
- The gear system drives the oven and blow wheel drive rings.
- The belt and pulley system drives the transfer elements (intermediate shafts, infeed, preform and bottle
transfer).
- The various parts are synchronized by transmission/machine parts linking systems.
- Where necessary, the torque limiters cut transmission to certain parts.
- The manual rotation system allows you to turn certain units slowly when carrying out adjustments and
maintenance on the machine.
- The JOG allows you to drive certain parts of the machine slowly when carrying out certain operations.
- The braking system stops rotation and blocks certain parts of the machine.
10.1.3.1 Reducer motor
BNM-011
BGM-010
1
1-006841-01-xx.svg
The asynchronous 3-phase motor (1) drives the bevel reducer motor (2). The reducer outfeed shaft (2) drives the
blow wheel (4) via a pinion (3). The blow wheel drives a control gear. The control gear drives the various parts of
the machine via a belt.
A heat safety protects the 3-phase asynchronous motor (1). Prolonged use of the JOG may set off the heat
safety. The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
II - 10 - 2/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
10.1.3.2 Torque limiter
BCU-020
BNM-002
BRE-010
3 2
1-006838-02-xx.svg
If there is a linking module Combi (option), the transmission belt between the bottle transfer wheel and the
bottle outfeed wheel does not exist.
If there is a linking module Combi (option), the transmission for the filler ensures the rotation of the bottle
outfeed wheel.
For more information please refer to the technical documentation supplied with the machine.
3 torque limiters are fitted on the machine:

- the "S12.0" torque limiter (1) on the reducer output shaft,
- the "S10.0" torque limiter (2) on the oven wheel shaft,
- the "S10.1" torque limiter (3) on the infeed wheel shaft.
In the presence of the bottle outfeed wheel, an additional torque limiter will be fitted to the blowing machine.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Bottle outfeed wheel".
If there is excess effort on any of the shafts:

- the corresponding torque limiter trips,
- the machine stops immediately,
- an alarm message appears at the PCC.
30/03/2015 II - 10 - 3/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
If a torque limiter trips it must be reset before restarting the machine.
Determine the cause of the over-torque before starting the machine.
For all work on the torque limiters, check the calibration values on the transmission drawings.
Never attempt to modify the torque limiter tares.
Never change the positions of the sensors (4) on the torque limiters unless recommended by SIDEL.
10.1.3.3 Braking system

The braking system stops the machine during a normal shutdown. The braking system stops the machine almost
immediately during an emergency stop or a "Critical" fault. The disc (1) is fitted on to the blow wheel.
1 4 5 2
1-011799-01-xx.svg
The number of brakes on the braking system varies according to the machine.
1 Disc 4 Jaws
2 Friction pads 5 Sensor "S12.1x"
3 Pneumatic jack cylinder 6 Push button
The "S12.1x" sensors (5) detect the position of the jaws (4). The machine can only be started if the "S12.1x"
sensors (5) indicate that the jaws are in open position (4).
When the machine is stopped, the braking system can be released by pressing the button (6), thereby enabling the
manual rotation system to be operated.
Never open the braking system pneumatic cylinder (3).
The braking system is forced open pneumatically and then closes when air is expelled.
II - 10 - 4/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The air supply to the breaking system is released from the high pressure air circuit.
The braking system is designed to operate at 9 bar . Below this level it will not function in the same way, see
procedure "BRM-043".
The PCC measures the efficiency of the brake each time the machine stops. The PCC signals any reduction
in the efficiency of the braking system.
10.1.3.4 Synchronization
The synchronization of the rotating parts with regard to the blow wheel determines the transport and the quality of
the items being produced.
3 2 1
2
1-011817-01-xx.svg
Good synchronization is a key factor for good production.
The synchronization of the machine is broken down into the following:

- synchronization of the preform transfer wheel with the blow wheel,
- synchronization of the bottle transfer wheel with the blow wheel,
- synchronization of the oven wheel with the preform transfer wheel,
- synchronization of the infeed wheel with the oven wheel,
- synchronization of the bottle outfeed wheel with the bottle transfer wheel.
30/03/2015 II - 10 - 5/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
If there i the option Combi, the synchronisation between the bottle outfeed and the bottle transfer wheel is
done automatically at reduced speed during each start up.
For more information on the synchronization of the bottle outfeed wheel for the Combi option, please refer to
chapter "Combi linking module (option)".
There is a fine setting system fitted to each shaft involved with the transfer of items:
- setting system (1) on the infeed wheel shaft,
- setting system (2) on the oven wheel shaft,
- setting system (3) on the prefrom and bottle transfer wheel shafts,
- bottle outfeed wheel adjustment system (4).
Always follow the written procedures when working on the synchronization adjustment systems (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4).
For further details on the synchronization of the optional components, refer to the corresponding chapters and
procedure sheets.
10.1.3.5 Belts
BRM-008
The belts, which have been specially designed for SIDEL, ensure the transmission of specific efforts around
the machine.
Always replace belts with other SIDEL belts.
The correct tension on the belts depends on the following:

- machine synchronization,
- uniform movements,
- the service life of the belts and the bearings.
The maintenance schedule indicates the frequency with which the tensions should be checked.
Always respect the maintenance schedule.
10.1.3.6 Drive gears and rings
BNM-007
BGM-018
2 1
1-006996-01-xx.svg
II - 10 - 6/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The gear system drives the oven and blow wheel drive rings.
When transporting the machine, or during certain maintenance operations, certain parts must be prevented from
moving using the locking pin (1). The locking pin (1) is inserted between 2 teeth on the blow wheel drive gear
(2). The locking pin (1) has a slot enabling it to be locked in position. The "B12.6" sensor indicates the presence of
the locking pin (1) to the plc. The plc prevents the machine from starting.
10.1.3.7 Manual rotation
Manual rotation allows you to position the various machine parts during certain maintenance operations.
Depending on the configuration of your machine, the location of certain parts may differ.
Never use a crank other than the one fitted on the machine safety system.
1-011797-01-xx.svg
Following each use of the manual rotation system, stow the crank (1) on its safety system (2) and pivot the
catch (3) upwards.
Using the manual rotation system requires you to release the brake by pressing the button (4). During some
maintenance operations, the operator may prevent the machine from being rotated using the PCC.
The "S12.51" safety system (5) indicates to the plc the absence of the crank (1) from its safety system (2). The plc
prevents the machine from starting.
The "S12.5" sensor (6) indicates to the plc that the transmission shaft (7) is engaged on the motor shaft. The plc
prevents the machine from starting.

The catch (3) enables the transmission shaft (7) to engage/disengage from the motor shaft.
30/03/2015 II - 10 - 7/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
7
3
1-011796-01-xx.svg
For safety reasons when manual rotation is activated, an alarm siren sounds when the braking system of the
blow wheel opens using the manual device (4).
10.1.3.8 JOG
BCU-013
Position the operating mode switch key (C) on "JOG" mode (D) to use "JOG".
m Functions
To start the machine at a low speed from various safetied work areas.
m Description
All the JOG connectors are connected to a safety PLC.
In each work area the machine is rotated using the JOG button (2), with the doors open.
The system has been designed so that only one JOG can be connected at any one time.
1
D
B 3
1-015494-01-xx.svg
The JOG (A) can be connected at 7 different zones covering the entire machine. Once the JOG mode has been
activated at the PCC, the JOG(A) can be connected at any of the work zones.
II - 10 - 8/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
To use JOG, the machine must be supplied with low-pressure air.
A JOG
1 Secure stop button
2 Start/stop/machine rotation button
B JOG storage area
C Operating mode switch, For further informationplease refer to chapter "Control and command panel ".
3 Switch key
D Key-operated switch in "JOG" mode
m Connection zones and associated doors
1-006265-02-xx.svg
Z3
Z2 Z4 Z6
Z5
Z6
Z1 Z7
Z0
1-012486-06-xx.svg
30/03/2015 II - 10 - 9/10
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Zones Associated doors Zones Associated doors

0 Stowage at PCC 4 5;6;7
1 1 5 13
2 2;3 6 9 ; 10
3 4 7 12
10.2 Preform distributor transmission
BRM-015
The electrical motors drive the belt and the drive ring for the preform distributor unscrambler rollers. The
transmission components do not require any specific maintenance.
The speed drives, located in the preform distributor electrical cabinet, control the speeds of the electrical motors.
For further information on the electrical cabinets and the speed drives, please refer to chapter "Electrical
cabinet and boxes".
The transmission components contribute to the tensions of the conveyor belts.
For further information on how to adjust the tensions of the preform distributor conveyor belts, see
II - 10 - 10/10 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Preform feeder Part II
11 PREFORM FEEDER
30/03/2015 II - 11 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Preform feeder
II - 11 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Preform decontamination module Part II
12 PREFORM DECONTAMINATION MODULE
BCU-032, BCU-033
12.1 Functions
The PredisTM preform decontamination module:
- extracts solid particles from the interior of the preforms via the dedust module,
- reduces bacterial contamination inside the preforms via the preform interior decontamination module.
12.2 Description
You must respect the specific instructions relating to the use of hydrogen peroxide, please refer to chapter
"Safety recommendations related to the use of hydrogen peroxide (Decontamination option)".
Some elements may appear differently on your machine according to its configuration, however their functions
remain identical.
A 7 1 5 6
4
3 8 2
1-016105-01-xx.svg
A Preform decontamination module PredisTM 5 Preform interior decontamination module

1 Preform infeed 6 Airtight cabinet
2 Dedust module 7 Extraction system
PredisTM Preform decontamination module
3 Dedust aspiration system 8
electrical cabinet
4 Dedust air treatment line
30/03/2015 II - 12 - 1/12
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Preform decontamination module
12.3 Conveyor system
BDM-067
12.3.1 Functions
The conveyor system transfers preforms across the various treatment wheels up to the oven .
12.3.2 Description
1 2 4 5 6
1-016103-04-xx.svg
1 Infeed system 4 Transfer wheel

2 Infeed wheel 5 Treatment wheel
3 Dedust wheel 6 Oven infeed wheel
12.3.3 Operation
The infeed system (1) ensures a regular and synchronised supply of preforms to the dedust wheel (3).
At the dedust wheel offload (3), the transfer wheels (4) convey the preforms towards the treatment wheel (5). . The
oven infeed wheel (6) provides a constant and synchronized flow of preforms to the spindle loading position .
For further information, please refer to chapter "Feeding".
12.4 Transmission
BNM-012
BRM-008, BRM-029
12.4.1 Functions
The transmission system rotates and synchronizes all of the components of the decontamination module
"PredisTM".
II - 12 - 2/12 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
12.4.2 Description
2 3
8 6 10 4
1-016104-01-xx.svg
1 Infeed wheel shaft 6 Dedust module notched belt

2 Dedust wheel shaft 7 Decontamination module drive pulley
3 Transfer wheel shaft (A) 8 Infeed wheel torque limiter (S10.1)
4 Treatment wheel shaft 9 Oven infeed wheel torque limiter (S10.0)
5 Oven infeed wheel shaft 10 Tensioner
12.4.3 Operation
- The pulley (7), is driven by a belt which is driven by the oven wheel shaft and rotates the decontamination
module.
- The system of pulleys and belts drives the treatment and transfer components.
- The various parts are synchronized by transmission/machine parts linking systems.
- Where necessary, the torque limiters cut transmission to certain parts. The sensor , and the torque limiter (8 ; 9),
signals the transmission fault to the PLC. The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
12.5 Dedust module (option)
BCU-005, BCU-008
12.5.1 Functions
The dedust module extracts solid particles from the interior of the preforms.
12.5.2 Description
remain identical.
30/03/2015 II - 12 - 3/12
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A B C
1-015409-01-xx.svg
A Dedust air treatment line C Dedust aspiration system

B Dedust wheel
12.5.3 Operation
12.5.3.1 Dedust air treatment line
BCU-030
BDM-051
The characteristics of the air and fluid supplies are described in the "Presentation Manual".
The treatment line for the dedust air is designed for air which meets the required characteristics.
The treatment line for the dedust air is sized to conserve the charcteristics of the air from the local supply up
to final use.
remain identical.
II - 12 - 4/12 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A
4 10 A
8 6 10 12
1 3 2 5 13 11 7 9 11
9 13
1-012622-01-xx.svg
The dedust air treatment line (7 bar) regulates, filters and distributes the air required for the supply to the dedust
wheel injectors.
Lock out the manual control valve (1) in closed position before any works on the low pressure air system.
- The safety valve (2) releases the air via the silencer (3) if there is excess pressure (≥10 bar) before regulation.
- The prefilter (5) retains undesirable particles down to 40 µm.
- The regulator (6) sets the service pressure (3,5 bar).
- The filter (7) retains undesirable particles down to 5 µm.
- The coalescent filter (9) retains undesirable particles to 0,01 µm.
- The pressure drop indicator (10) calculates the most economical moment to replace the filtering element . The
corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
- The pressure sensor "B1006"(12) signals the pressure in the dedust air circuit to the PLC.
- The manual control valve (13) isolates the automatic purge (11).
- The automatic purge (11) clears condensates which have accumulated in the filter (7 ; 9).
The pressure level in the dedust air circuit is signalled at the PCC when dedust is active. For further
information, please refer to chapter ""Wheel" family".
30/03/2015 II - 12 - 5/12
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
12.5.3.2 Dedust wheel
BDM-052, BDM-053, BDM-054, BDM-055
remain identical.
7 2 6
6
3
5
1-015418-01-xx.svg
The filtered air is directed towards the dedust wheel .
The rotary union (1) provides a pneumatic linkage between the fixed and moving parts of the dedust wheel.
The compressed air is distributed to the dedust wheel through the plate (2).
The preforms (3) are supported by the neck-ring and carried to the dedust wheel .
The carriages (4) are guided by the cam (5) and lower the the injectors (6) into the preforms (3).
The air is forced through the injectors (6) and blows any impurities out of the preforms (3).
Before the end of the complete rotation of the dedust wheel the injectors (6) are raised out of the preforms.
The air is then directed through the extraction hood (7). ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
9 8
1-008694-03-xx.svg
Each carriage (4) controls the lowering of the 4 injectors (6). The "B11.1" sensor (8) checks the movement of the
rollers (9).
If the roller (9) is not detected by the "B11.1" sensor (8), the 4 non-dedusted preforms are ejected at the
preform transfer point. The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
II - 12 - 6/12 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
For further information, please refer to chapter "Transfer arm and turntable".
12.5.3.3 Aspiration system
BNM-018
BRM-025, BRE-013
remain identical.
10
6
8 4
5
9
1-015419-01-xx.svg
The aspirator (1) sucks the residual dedust air from under the extractor hood (2) through the conduit (3).
The aspirator (1) filters the air before expelling it to the exterior.
The collecting tank (4) recovers dust and impurities.
The tightening system (5) immobilses the collecting tank (4).
The differential pressure switch (6) controls the level of saturation in the aspiration filters.
If there is a fault with the pressure, the fault will be shown on the PCC.
The drain valve (7) opens and closes the aspirator filter flushing system (1).
The quick connector (8) feeds compressed air to the flushing system via the hose (9).
The quick connector (8) is located near the brake on the blowing machine or near the aspirator (1), depending
on the machine configuration.
The regulator (10) regulates the pressure of the air in the flushing system.
30/03/2015 II - 12 - 7/12
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The regulator (10) is fitted with a gauge which allows the pressure in the compressed air circuit to be
monitored.
12.6 Evaporation station and treatment wheel
BNM-023, BNM-025
BRM-040, BRE-012
12.6.1 Functions
The evaporation station generates the aseptic solution vapor which the treatment wheel applies to the internal
surfaces of the preforms.
12.6.2 Description
1 2 3 6 7 8 5
10 4 9
1-010107-01-xx.svg
Depending on the configuration of the machine, the decontamination module is fitted with 1 or 2 evaporation
stations.
1 Steam generator 6 Carriage

2 Fixed diffuser 7 "B458" fixed diffuser (2) position sensor
3 Mobile diffuser 8 Injection nozzle
4 Temperature sensor 9 Drain
5 Pneumatic jack cylinder
12.6.3 Operation
The steam generator (1):
- receives the mixture of air and aseptic solution,
- transforms that mixture into a vapor (steam),
- conducts the vapor to the fixed diffuser (2).
II - 12 - 8/12 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The aseptic solution is generally hydrogen peroxide H2O2 at a concentration of 25 %. The rise in temperature of the
preforms in the infrared oven activates the aseptic properties of the solution.
The fixed diffuser (2) supplies aseptic solution vapor to the channels in the mobile diffuser (3). . A temperature
sensor (4) indicates to the PCC the temperature at the fixed diffuser (2).
The pneumatic cylinder (5) controls the translation movement of the carriage (6) so that it:
- holds the fixed diffuser (2) against the mobile diffuser (3),
- ensures the airtightness of the aseptic solution vapor circuit.
The "B458" sensor (7) monitors the position of the fixed diffuser (2) in contact with the mobile diffuser (3).
The correct setting of the "B458" sensor (7) is essential. For further information, see procedure "BRE-012".
The nozzles (8), which are mounted on the mobile diffuser (3), apply the vapor to the preforms . The drain (9)
recovers any excess aseptic solution. A heating element keeps the mobile diffuser (3) at the temperature required
to maintain the aseptic solution in a gaseous state. 2 temperature sensors (4) indicate to the PCC the temperature
of the mobile diffuser (3).
12.7 Fluid lines
BPU-018
BNM-024
BDM-064, BDM-065, BDM-066, BDM-086, BDM-093
12.7.1 Functions
The fluid lines carry air and aseptic solution to the various parts of the decontamination module.
30/03/2015 II - 12 - 9/12
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
12.7.2 Description
4 22 2 10 9 8 12
5 1
11 13
38
7
37
14 36 15 16 17
35
33
30
31
18
27
20
29
21
19
23
28 25
26 24 32 34
1-016089-01-xx.svg
1 Disinfectant fluid infeed solenoid valve 20 Pumping drum infeed valve

2 Disinfectant fluid inlet 21 Disinfectant fluid circuit purge valve
3 One way stop valve 22 Level sensor
4 Tank level regulator probe 23 Mixer
5 Pressurized disinfectant fluid tank 24 Water infeed valve
6 Evaporation station air isolation valve 25 Water intake

7 Pressure sensor "P2" 26 Diluted disinfectant fluid circuit outlet to drain
8 Disinfecant fluid flow meter 27 Fixed diffuser actuator pressure regulator
9 Disinfectant fluid and air mixing valve 28 Distribution block
Disinfectant fluid and air mixing purge solenoid
10 29 Distribution block
valve
11 Air flow meter 30 Pressurized tank pressure regulator
Evaporation station disinfectant fluid isolation
12 31 Air reserve pressure regulator
valve
13 Evaporation station 32 Air filter
14 Pressure sensor "P1" 33 Pressure sensor "P3"
15 Purge valve to pumping drum or drain 34 Air intake 7 bars
Evaporation station air circuit infeed solenoid
16 Pressurized tank filling solenoid valve 35
valve
II - 12 - 10/12 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Pressurized tank pressurizing air circuit infeed
17 Safety valve 36
solenoid valve
18 Disinfectant fluid pumping drum 37 Disinfectant fluid filter
19 Pumping drum infeed pump 38 Sampling valve
Air supply line (from local supply) Evaporation station air supply line
Evaporation station liquid supply line Tank pressurization air line
Liquid filling and draining line
12.7.3 Operation
m Liquid filling and draining line
The tank (18) supplies aseptic solution to the pump (19). The filling pump (19) and the "EV5" solenoid (16) control
the filling of the tank (5).
The level sensor (4) signals the level in the tank (5) to the PCC:
- 80 %: Upper level, stop pump.
- 20 %: Lower level, start pump.
- 10 %: Time-set "alert" level alarm triggered (progressive shutdown).
SIDEL recommends maximum usage of aseptic solution (tank reaches low level) before refilling. This will
renew the aseptic solution and limit its degradation over time.
The safety valve (17) protects the filling line . The safety valve (17) is connected to the mixer (23) of used aseptic
solution. The valve (20) drains the filling circuit . The non-return valve (3) isolates the filling circuit and maintains
pressure in the reservoir (5).
m Evaporation station liquid supply line
The tank (5) supplies the system with aseptic solution. The filter (37) removes unwanted particles from the
solution. The "P1" pressure sensor (14) indicates to the PCC the pressure level in the evaporation station (13)
liquid supply line . The flowmeter (8) monitors the quantity of solution introduced into the evaporation station
(13). The regulator (9) supplies the evaporation station (13) with the required quantity of solution. The "EV3"
solenoid valve (16) controls the liquid circuit purge before the start of the process. The drain valve (15) empties the
tank (5) and the filter (37). Draining of the tank (5), filter (37) and liquid circuit is done by the drain outlet (26) after
water dilution of the disinfectant fluid, in the mixer (23).
m Air supply line (from local supply)
A manual valve, upstream from the filter (32), controls the air supply (from the local low pressure supply). The
"SMF" filter (32) eliminates particles coming from the upstream circuit (0,01 µm).
The distribution block (29) supplies the 3 distinct air lines:
- the service air for the actuators and the solenoid valves ,
- the evaporation station air supply line,
- the tank pressurization air line .

m Service air and solenoid valve piloting air
the distribution block (28) supplies:
- the loading ejection airjet ,
- the loading actuator ,
- the retractable guide actuator ,
- the support cylinder for the fixed diffuser ,
- the solenoid valve control .
The pressure sensor (33) indicates to the PCC the pressure level supplying the support valve . The pressure
regulator (27) regulates the pressure to the support valve .
30/03/2015 II - 12 - 11/12
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Evaporation station air supply line

The "EV2" solenoid valve (35) controls the air supply to the evaporation station (13). The pressure regulator (31)
regulates the air supply pressure to the evaporation station (13). The "P2" pressure sensor (7) indicates to the PCC
the pressure in the evaporation station (13) air supply line. The "Mass flowmeter" (11) supplies and controls the
quantity (mass) of air required by the evaporation station (13).
m Tank pressurization air line
The "EV1" solenoid valve (36) controls the pressurization of the tank (5). The (30) pressure regulator regulates the
pressure applied to the tank (5).
II - 12 - 12/12 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Surface disinfection system Part II
13 SURFACE DISINFECTION SYSTEM
BCU-040
BNM-040, BNM-041, BNM-042
BDM-092, BDM-083, BDM-094
BRM-039
13.1 Functions
The surface disinfection system reduces the microbiological contamination of the elements in contact with the
articles by spraying them with a disinfectant solution.
13.2 Description
2 5
4
1-017408-01-xx.svg
Disinfection module for oven wheel infeed plate

1 4 Disinfection module for the article outfeed zone
and oven outfeed guide
2 Transfer grips disinfection module 5 Disinfection product supply panel
Disinfectant module for the top of the mold and
3
the nozzle tip
30/03/2015 II - 13 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Surface disinfection system
m Disinfection product supply panel
11 7 8
12
9
10
1-017431-01-xx.svg
6 Disinfectant tank 10 Disinfectant tank drain valve

7 Air reserve pressure regulator (0,5 bar min) 11 Disinfectant tank low level sensor
8 Pressure sensor 12 Disinfection circuit filter
9 disinfectant tank low pressure supply connection
m Disinfection module for oven wheel infeed plate and oven outfeed guide
13
14
17
20
19
15 18
16
1-008947-04-xx.svg
Solenoid valve supplying the disinfectant to the

13 Solenoid valve supplying air to the spray nozzles 17
spray nozzles
14 Disinfectant circuit drain valve 18 Disinfectant flow controller
15 Spray nozzle 19 Pressure sensor
16 Spray nozzle 20 Low pressure air circuit regulator (1,3 bar min)
II - 13 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Surface disinfection system Part II
m Transfer grips disinfection module
23 27
26
25 21
28 22
24
1-008946-02-xx.svg

21 Solenoid valve supplying air to the spray nozzles 25
spray nozzles
22 Disinfectant flow controller 26 Disinfectant circuit drain valve
23 Spray nozzle 27 Low pressure air circuit regulator (0,7 bar min)
24 Spray nozzle 28 Pressure sensor
m Disinfection module for the article outfeed zone
35 32
36 30
31
33
29
34
1-008949-06-xx.svg
29 Low pressure air circuit regulator (1,3 bar min) 33 Pressure sensor
30 Solenoid valve supplying air to the spray nozzles 34 Disinfectant flow controller
31 Spray nozzle 35 Spray gun

32 36 Disinfectant circuit drain valve
spray nozzles
30/03/2015 II - 13 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Surface disinfection system
m Disinfectant module for the top of the mold and the nozzle tip
38 40
41
37
X 42
X
39
43
44
1-017425-01-xx.svg
37 Spray nozzles 41 Pressure sensor

38 Disinfectant flow controller "B1207.0" 42 Rotary cylinder stroke adjustment limiters
39 Sensor "B1206.3" 43 Pressure regulator (1,3 bar min)
40 Sensor "B1206.2" 44 Pressure regulator (2,5 bar min)
m Disinfection cycle
The disinfection cycle is carried out on a request from the operator:
- Before starting production on the machine.
- After a prolonged shutdown.
- After the intervention of an operator on the machine.
During the cycle, the plc monitors the following:
- the status of the control solenoid valves,
- the flow of the disinfectant via the flow controlers,
- the air pressure and the disinfectant pressure,
- low levels in the disinfectant tank.
The disinfectant cycle is composed of 10 stages:
- the disinfection request from the operatpr at the PCC,
- manual disinfection of the article outfeed zone,
- the operator confirms the manual cycle at the PCC,
- the plc starts the blowing machine at a low speed and heats the preform exterior decontamination modules,
- automatic disinfection of the preform and bottle transfer grips,
- automatic disinfection of the molds and the nozzle tips,
- automatic disinfection of the oven infeed wheel plate,

- automatic disinfection of the oven outfeed guide,
- temperature control of the UV lamps in the preform exterior decontamination modules,
- disinfection by UV treatment of all of the spindle tips.
For further information:

- please refer to chapter "The "Hygiene" family".
- please refer to chapter "External preform decontamination".
- see procedure "BCU-040".
If there is a fault, the disinfection cycle stops and is not confirmed.
II - 13 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Feeding Part II
14 FEEDING
BDM-019, BDM-020, BDM-021, BDM-022
BRE-002, BRE-005
14.1 Functions
The infeed system ensures a regular and synchronised supply of preforms to the dedust wheel .
14.2 Description
1 4
2 7 3 6
1-007175-01-xx.svg
1 Infeed wheel 5 Pin control actuator

2 Fixed neck guide 6 Retractable guide sensor
3 Retractable neck guide 7 Machine infeed preform sensor
4 Stop pin
14.3 Operation
When the machine starts (at the PCC), 2 conditions are required to allow preforms to start loading onto the infeed
wheel (1):
- the infeed rail is supplied with sufficient preforms,

- the temperature of the oven corresponds to that entered in the production set up.
When these conditions are met, the PLC synchronizes the infeed wheel (1) with the retraction of the stop pin (4)
controlled by the actuator (5).
The preforms load onto the wheel (1) and are held under the neck-rings between the wheel (1) and the neck guides
(2 ; 3).
The "B32,1" sensor (7) counts the preforms fed into the machine.
If a preform is jammed at the retractable neck guide (3):
- the "B10.3" sensor (6) signals the plc,
- the plc extends the stop pin (4),
- the plc retracts the neck guide (3),
- the preforms are ejected from the zone,
- the machine continues production.
30/03/2015 II - 14 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Feeding
If a preform blocks at the fixed guide (2) the torque limiter on the infeed wheel is set off, please refer to chapter
"Transmission".
m "PRESSCO" vision system (option)
1-007445-01-xx.svg
The "PRESSCO" option allows the user to control the rim of the preforms. When the "PRESSCO" option is
integrated into the machine, the control camera (8) is located above the preform feeder plate (1).
For more information, consult the technical documents relating to this option.
II - 14 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Preform loading/offloading Part II
15 PREFORM LOADING/OFFLOADING
BNM-005
BDM-012, BDM-023
BGM-020, BGM-039
15.1 Functions
Located at the upper part of the oven wheel, the on-load and off-load systems ensure the following:
- the loading of preforms onto the spindle tips at the oven infeed,
- the offloading of the preforms at the oven outfeed prior to transfer to the molds.
15.2 Description
5 6 4 3 2
1 7 8 9
1-006490-01-xx.svg
1 Spindle tip 6 Fork

2 Spindle shaft 7 Control roller
3 Spindle sprocket 8 Compression spring
4 Ejector 9 Cam
5 Control shaft
15.3 Operation
m Preform loading
The control roller (7) for the control shaft (5) rolls along the cam (9). At the end of the cam (9) the roller (7) drops
down under the action of the compression spring (8).
30/03/2015 II - 15 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Preform loading/offloading
The fork (6), pressing on the spindle sprocket (3), brings the spindle shaft (2) and the spindle tip (1) down. The
spindle tip (1) enters the neck of the preform.
6
5 3
9 4
1-006491-01-xx.svg
If there is excess stress during preform loading, the sensor "B32.0"(12) detects the abnormal position of the fork
(6). The sensor "B10.4"(13) informs the plc of the position of the outer roller (14) and synchronizes the actions of
the cams (15). The plc activates the ejection cams (15). The 3 guide rollers (14 ; 16) roll along the ejection cams
(15).
The rising movement of the 3 forks (6) retracts the spindle tips (1) into the ejectors (4). The misloaded preform is
ejected. In order to ensure that the misloaded preform is ejected, 3 preforms must also be ejected. An airjet (17)
ensures that the ejected preforms are fully cleared.
14 6 14 6
16
15
17
13 12 15
1-006492-02-xx.svg
m Preform offloading
The control roller (7) for the control shaft (5) rolls along the cam (9). The control roller (7) rises and the compression
spring (8) compresses. The control shaft (5) raises the fork (6) and the spindle sprocket (3).
II - 15 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Preform loading/offloading Part II
1-006493-01-xx.svg
The spindle tip (1) returns into the ejector (4). The preform, up against the ejector (4), is released.
The off-load action is simultaneous to the seizure of the preform by the transfer grip.
The load / unload cams are lubricated by the central automatic lubricating system. For further
information, please refer to chapter "Automated self-lubricating system".
30/03/2015 II - 15 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Preform loading/offloading
II - 15 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Spindle chain system Part II
16 SPINDLE CHAIN SYSTEM
BNM-045
BDM-010, BDM-013, BDM-095
BRM-003
BGM-005
16.1 Functions
The spindle chain system ensures the following:
- the preforms are turned over at the oven infed and outfeed,
- the support, the transport and the rotation of the preforms in the oven.
16.2 Description
The spindle chain is a closed chain on which the links are spindles. The kinematics of the spindle chain are assured
by the oven wheel and the tensioner wheel.
30/03/2015 II - 16 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Spindle chain system
10 7 10
11 4 2
3 3
1 10
12 6 1
1-008744-01-xx.svg
1 Spindle link 7 Turnover ramp

2 Connecting piece 8 Oven wheel
3 Spindle shaft 9 Tensioner wheel
4 Spindle sprocket 10 Spindle sprocket orientation system (option)
5 Orienting spindle sprocket (option) 11 Preferential heating sensor "B11.5" (option)
6 Rollers 12 Preform neck orientation system (option)
II - 16 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Spindle chain system Part II
16.3 Operation
m Turn-over
6 1 6
14
8 7 3 4;5
1-006488-04-xx.svg
After preform loading, the roller (6) rolls along the turnover ramp (7) causing the spindle link (1), and thus the
preforms, to rotate. At the ramp (7) offload, the rollers (6) roll along the oven’s V-shaped guide rails (13).
13
1-008631-02-xx.svg
m Conveyor system
99 17
15 16 18
1-006786-02-xx.svg
The oven wheel (8) drives the spindle chain. The sprockets (4 ; 5), which are fixed on the spindle shafts (3), engage
on the fixed chains (14) in the oven. The spindle shafts (3) rotate the preforms as they are transported through the
30/03/2015 II - 16 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Spindle chain system
oven. The fluidity of the preform transport through the oven depends on the correct setting of the tension of the
spindle chain. The tension of the spindle chain is determined by the compression spring (15) on the tensioner
wheel (9) slide (16). The sensor "B32.3"(17) detects the reference screw (18) fixed on the spindle link n°1 and
initializes a counter each time it passes through the oven.
II - 16 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / External preform decontamination Part II
17 EXTERNAL PREFORM DECONTAMINATION

17.1 Functions
The decontamination of the exterior of the preforms reduces the microbiological contamination of the preform
surface through the use of UV rays.
m UV light
The type C UV rays used are extremely dangerous to the skin and eyes. Exposure to UVc light, even for short
periods, may result in acute or chronic medical conditions linked to the penetration and absorption of these
rays into the structure of the skin or eyes.
Turn off the UV lamps (4) before attempting any intervention.
Opening any of the safety doors durng production will automatically switch off the UV lamps (4).
Never obstruct the cooling ducts as this may reduce the bactericidal performance of the lamps.
Visually check the cleanness of the filter (8).
Never operate the machine without the UV protection (panelling, protective film etc.).
17.2 Description
8 3 5 1
4
1-010580-01-xx.svg
30/03/2015 II - 17 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / External preform decontamination
1 External preforms decontamination module 6 Fan

2 Cooling system 7 Air filter
External preform decontamination system
3 Cabin 8
electrical cabinet
4 UV lamps Lamp cooling
5 Reflectors
17.3 Operation
The decontamination of the exterior of the preforms is composed of 2 decontamination modules (1) located on
either side of the tensioner wheel (9) on the oven, as well as a ventilation system (2).
- Certain elements require specific maintenance, please refer to chapter " Maintenance schedule".
- Inspection/cleaning - preform external decontamination modules, see procedure "BNM-039", in the
Servicing Procedure Catalog.
- Removal/refit - external preform decontamination module, see procedure "BDM-091", in the Servicing
Procedure Catalog.
- Replacing the UV lamps in the preform exterior decontamination module, see procedure "BDE-012", in the
Servicing Procedure Catalog.
m External preforms decontamination module
The external preform decontamination module (1) is composed of 3 chambers (3) fitted around the preform
line. The UV lamps (4) placed inside the chambers (3) generate UVc rays which have a bactericidal effect on the
entire external surface of the preforms (10). The reflectors (5) optimize the heating effect.
When the machine starts, the V lamps (4) decontaminate the spindle tips (11) before the preforms are fed into the
oven.
During a surface disinfection cycle, the UV lamps (4) decontaminate the spindle tips (11). For further
information, please refer to chapter "Surface disinfection system".
10
9
11
1-008936-02-xx.svg
m Cooling system
The fan (6) creates a permanent flow of air in the preform decontamination module (1) to maintain an optimal
operating temperature.
The plc controls the speed of the ventilation required for the decontamination module to function correctly.
The air filter (7) on the fan (6) prevents dust from entering into the cabins (3).
The operating temperature of the decontamination module is displayed on the PCC. For further
information, please refer to chapter "The "Hygiene" family".
II - 17 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Infrared oven Part II
18 INFRARED OVEN
18.1 Functions
Heat in a controlled way the preform body .
Distribute ventilated air to lamp bases .
18.2 Description
4 3 2
1-011978-01-xx.svg
1 machine immediately stops 2 Infrared lamps

3 Reflector 4 Oven
Ventilated air
18.3 Operation
The infrared ovens are equipped with infrared lamps (2).
The infrared lamps (2) heat the preform body .
The management and heating temperature parameters of the infrared lamps (2) are entered via the PCC according
to the article to be produced.
The reflectors (3) optimize the heating effect of the infrared lamps (2).
alarm message on (4) (1).

A ventilation system cools the infrared lamp (2) bases.
To ensure the correct production process, the condition and cleanness of these elements must be regularly
inspected.
30/03/2015 II - 18 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Infrared oven
II - 18 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / False lamp support Part II
19 FALSE LAMP SUPPORT

19.1 Functions
Reflects the infrared rays from the lamps onto the preform domes .
Improves energy consumption.
19.2 Description
3 2
1-011979-01-xx.svg
1 False lamp support 2 False lamp

3 Preform 4 Ruler
5 Cursor 6 Knob
19.3 Operation
The false lamp (2) receives and sends the rays from the infrared lamps to the preform dome (3).
The height of the false lamps (2) is adjusted by turning the knob (6).
The position of the cursor (5) on the scale (4) indicates the position of the false lamps (2).
Note the position of the cursor (5) on the scale (4) before each intervention.
If there is an production article change, set the heights of the false lamps (2).
To ensure the correct production process, the condition and cleanness of these elements must be regularly
inspected.
30/03/2015 II - 19 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / False lamp support
II - 19 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Oven ventilation system Part II
20 OVEN VENTILATION SYSTEM
BNM-003
20.1 Functions
The oven ventilation system moderates the effects of the infrared heating over the surface of the preforms as they
pass in front of the heating modules.
The ventilation system keeps the mechanical parts at a moderate ambient temperature.
20.2 Description
1 3
4
1-006451-01-xx.svg
1 Ventilation cabinet 3 Heat recovery unit (option)

2 Extraction hood (option) 4 Oven ventilation filtration system (option)
20.3 Operation
20.3.1 Ventilation cabinet
BNM-003
30/03/2015 II - 20 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Oven ventilation system
2 1
1-006460-02-xx.svg
1 Ventilation cabinet 3 Vented reflectors

2 Fan 4 Adjustable flap
3 1 2
5 4
1-006465-01-xx.svg
The fans (2) aspirate air from the oven through the tubes (5) towards the ventilation cabinet (1).
The ventilation cabinet (1) separates into 2 flows:
- the first cools the preform bodies thorugh the vented reflectors,
- the second cools the preform necks between the cooling shields (6) and the adjustable flaps (4).
The adjustable flaps (4) allow the air jet to be aimed at the preform necks. A setpoint at the PCC adjusts the power
of the fans (2) according to the production set up.
20.3.2 Oven ventilation filtration system (option)
BDM-056
20.3.2.1 Functions
The oven cooling filtration system filters the air used to cool the preforms as they move through the oven.
II - 20 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Oven ventilation system Part II
20.3.2.2 Description
4
1
1-007165-01-xx.svg
1 Filtration cabinet 3 Ventilation cabinet

2 Air filter
20.3.2.3 Operation
The ventilation cabinet (3) sucks air in via the tubes (4). The filter cabinet (1) directs ambient air through the filters
(2) to the tubes (4). The filters (2) remove particles larger than 3 µm.
30/03/2015 II - 20 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Oven ventilation system
II - 20 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Aeraulic systems in the oven Part II
21 AERAULIC SYSTEMS IN THE OVEN

21.1 Functions
This system enables the following:
- to keep the preforms clean by using filtered air,
- to moderate the effects of the infrared rays on the surface of the preforms as they pass in front of the heating
modules,
- to keep the ambient temperature of the mechanical environment at a reasonable level,
- to regulate the air flow in order to keep the machine at overpressure during production and when doors are
opened.
21.2 Description
2
1-010584-01-xx.svg
1 Filtration cabinet* 3 Oven extractor unit*

2 Ventilation cabinet* A Preform decontamination module PredisTM*
* This element is the subject of a chapter in this manual
30/03/2015 II - 21 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Aeraulic systems in the oven
21.3 Operation
the air required for the heat regulation for the heating modules is filtered by the filtration cabinets (1) and distributed
to the following:
- the preform ventilation cabinets (2),
- the lamp cap cooling systems .
The extractor (3) removes hot air from within the oven and allows a renewal of cool air into the oven.
For further information, refer to the relevant chapters in this manual.
The oven aeraulic system will begin to operate as soon as the machine is switched on.
When a door is opened, the plc regulates the ventilation and extraction speeds in order to ensure that the machine
remains in overpressure.
II - 21 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Ventilation cabinet Part II
22 VENTILATION CABINET
22.1 Functions
- to moderate the effects of the infrared rays on the surface of the preforms as they pass in front of the heating
modules,
- to keep the ambient temperature of the mechanical environment at a reasonable level,
opened.
22.2 Description
2 1
1-006460-03-xx.svg
1 Ventilation cabinet 3 Adjustable flap

2 Fan
30/03/2015 II - 22 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Ventilation cabinet
22.3 Operation
2 1 5
1-010586-01-xx.svg
The fans (2) aspirate air from the filtration cabinet through the pipes (4) towards the ventilation cabinets (1).
For further information, please refer to chapter "Filtration cabinet".
The ventilation cabinet (1) separates into 2 flows:

- the first cools the preform bodies thorugh the vented reflectors, see procedure "BNM-003".
- the second cools the preform necks between the cooling shields (5) and the adjustable flaps (3).
The adjustable flaps (3) allow the air jet to be aimed at the preform necks. The speed of the fans is controlled by
the plc.
II - 22 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Filtration cabinet Part II
23 FILTRATION CABINET
23.1 Functions
- to filter the air supplied to the oven ventilation system,
- to obtain a sufficient volume of air to supply to the oven ventilation system and limit loss of load.
23.2 Description
2 3
1-010586-02-xx.svg
1 Cabin 3 Total filter

2 Prefilter
23.3 Operation
The filter cabinets are composed of 2 filter stages.
The prefilters (2) are gravimetric and are located at each side of the filtration cabinet (1). They limit the introduction
of dust into the filtration cabinet.
A pressure switch linked to a display at the PCC controls the loss of load caused by the saturation of each prefilter
(2). If the filter is saturated a fault will appear at the PCC.
The set of opacimetric total filters (3) prevent bacteriological contamination of the preforms by the oven ventilation
system.
The number of total filters (3) varies depending on the number of oven heating modules.
A pressure switch linked to a display at the PCC monitors the following:

- the air flow inside each filtration cabinet (1),
- the load loss caused by saturation in the total filters *1.
30/03/2015 II - 23 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Filtration cabinet
If the filter is saturated a fault will appear at the PCC.

- Certain elements require specific maintenance. For further information, please refer to chapter "Blowing
machine maintenance schedule".
- Replacing the total filters in the oven aeraulic modules, see procedure "BDM-101", in the Servicing
Procedure Catalog.
- Replacing the prefilters in the oven aeraulic modules, see procedure "BDM-100", in the Servicing
Procedure Catalog.
II - 23 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Oven extractor unit Part II
24 OVEN EXTRACTOR UNIT

24.1 Functions
- to channel and extract the hot air generated by the infrared lamps out of the production area,
opened.
24.2 Description
3 2
1-010572-01-xx.svg
1 Extraction hood 3 Motor

2 Extraction conduits 4 Gate
24.3 Operation
The extraction hood (1) channels the hot air generated by the infrared lamps.
The motor (3) drives a fan which sucks hot air into the extraction conduit (2).
The speed of the fan is controlled by the plc.
The extraction conduit (2) is designed to be fitted with a discharge conduit by the client.
The extractor hood (1) is fitted with a flap (4) to allow access for maintenance.
- Certain elements require specific maintenance, please refer to chapter " Blowing machine maintenance
schedule".
- Greasing the extractor hood bearings, see procedure "BGM-028".
30/03/2015 II - 24 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Oven extractor unit
II - 24 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Transfer arm and turntable Part II
25 TRANSFER ARM AND TURNTABLE

25.1 Functions
- convey the articles between the different phases of the process,
- eject non-compliant articles or articles for sampling.
25.2 Description
2 1
6 3
1-010242-02-xx.svg
1 Preform transfer wheel* 5 Vision system (option)

2 Bottle transfer wheel* 6 Recovery carriage*
3 Transfer arm* 7 Safety system
4 Ejection system*
25.3 Operation
At the oven outlet, the transfer arms (3), which are fitted on the preform transfer wheel (1), convey the preforms
towards the blow wheel.
After blowing, the transfer arms (3), which are mounted on the bottle transfer wheel (2), convey the articles towards
the bottle outfeed.
During transfer, the vision system (5) (option) controls article quality.
The ejection system (4) which is present on each of the transfer wheels (1 ; 2) ejects non-compliant articles or
removes articles for sampling via the PCC.
The recovery carriage (6) directs and collects ejected articles.
The safety system (7) protects personnel from impacts with the transfer arms (3) during intervention procedures.
30/03/2015 II - 25 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Transfer arm and turntable
m vision system (option)

The transfer turntable is fitted with a vision system "PRESSCO"(5) (option).
The vision system is used to check the shape of the item.
For more information, consult the technical documents relating to this option.
II - 25 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Transfer wheel Part II
26 TRANSFER WHEEL
26.1 Functions
This sub-assembly enables the following:
- convey the articles between the different phases of the process.
26.2 Description
4 7
3 6
B A
1-010736-01-xx.svg
A Preform transfer wheel 3 Outer transfer cam

B Bottle transfer wheel 4 Arm support plate
1 Transfer bearing 5 Transfer shaft
2 Inner transfer cam
26.3 Operation
For more information on maintenance for this system, please refer to chapter "Maintenance schedule".
The transfer wheel (A) conveys the heated preforms from the oven outlet up to the mold.
The transfer wheel (B) conveys the blown bottles from the mold release up to the machine outfeed.
The transfer bearings (1) fitted on the transfer table are fixed on the transfer cams (2 ; 3).
The arm support plates (4) are driven by pullies fixed on the transfer shafts (5).
For further information, please refer to chapter "Transmission".
The transfer cams (2 ; 3) control the position and movements of the transfer arms (6) as they seize and release
articles.
The various meeting points are synchronized using the pulley and the fine setting (7).
For further information, see procedure "BNM-012", in the Servicing Procedure Catalog.
30/03/2015 II - 26 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Transfer wheel
II - 26 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Transfer arm Part II
27 TRANSFER ARM
27.1 Functions
- pick up the articles and place them between the oven wheel, the blowing wheel and the bottle outfeed.
27.2 Description
4 6 5 9
1-013486-01-xx.svg
1 Arm support 6 Spring

2 Shaft 7 Grip support
3 Linear guidance 8 Transfer grips
4 Rollers 9 Spring
5 Roller
30/03/2015 II - 27 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Transfer arm
27.3 Operation
3 2 1 A 11
12
6
7
9 8 13 5 4
1-013495-01-xx.svg
The machine can be fitted with different transfer arms (A; B; C; D) according to need.
The transfer arm (A) is fixed on the arm support plate (11).
The movement of the rollers (4) along the inner transfer cam (12) rotates the arm support (1) around the shaft (2).
The rotation of the arm support (1) controls the variations in speed at the grip (8).
The linear guide system (3) controls the translation movement of the grip support (7) with regard to the arm support
(1). The springs (6) hold the roller (5) on the grip support (7) in contact with the outer transfer cam (13). The
movement of the roller (5) on the cam (13) positions the grip (8).
The combination of the 2 movements (rotation and translation) ensures a reduction in the speed and positioning of
the grips (8) at the meeting points.
The grip (8) turns on its support shaft and is held closed by the spring (9). The profile of the grip (8) is specific to the
article in production. Each time an article is picked up (oven or mold outlets), the grip (8) engages on the neck of
the article and seizes it. Each time an article is released, the mold or the bottle outfeed release the article by
disengaging it.
In order to limit scratch marks on the hot preform necks, the width of the preform transfer arms (8) is greater
than that of the bottle transfer arms. ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
II - 27 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Transfer arm Part II
m Transfer arm with orienting head (option)
- pick up the articles and place them between the oven wheel, the blowing wheel and the bottle outfeed,
- conserve the position of the article when being picked up and released.
15
14
16 17
1-013534-01-xx.svg
The transfer arm with an orienting head is fitted a pivoting head support (14).
The spring (15) holds the roller (16) on the orientation cam (17). The movement of the roller (16) along the cam (17)
causes the head support (14) to pivot at each seizure and release of the article.
The rotation movement ensures that the grips (8) are correctly oriented at the meeting points.
m Transfer arm equipped with controlled grip (option)
- commands the opening and closing of the grips to limit wear on the necks and the rotation of the articles.
18 19
1-013537-01-xx.svg
The grip support (7) is fitted with a roller (18). Each time and article is seized and released, the movement of the
roller (18) along the cams (19) causes the grip to open (8). The controlled opening of the grip (8) prevents markings
on the articles and conserves the orientation of the preforms at the oven outfeed. The grip (8) articulates and
remains closed under pressure from the spring (9).
30/03/2015 II - 27 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Transfer arm
m Transfer arm with orienting head and controlled grips (option)

- conserve the position of the article when being picked up and released,
- commands the opening and closing of the grips to limit wear on the necks and the rotation of the articles.
15
14
18
8 16 19 17
1-013544-01-xx.svg
The operating principle is the same as that for the transfer arms with orienting head option and the option with
controlled grips on the same arm.
m Sensor
7 10
13
20 5 21
1-008686-04-xx.svg
The sensors "B31.2" and "B30.3"(20) continuously check the movement of the rollers (5). Any abnormality will
cause a critical machine stoppage.

m Safety
A safety guide (21) protects the infeed wheel and the oven wheel parts if any of the transfer arm springs (10)
breaks.
II - 27 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Item ejection system Part II
28 ITEM EJECTION SYSTEM

28.1 Functions
- remove articles which are non-compliant or for sampling from production,
- free articles when the machine is blocked.
28.2 Description
A
1-010735-01-xx.svg
A Item ejection system 2 Guide

1 Cylinder
28.3 Operation
The guide (2) extends under the action of the cylinder (1). As the article passes the guide (2) releases it from the
transfer grips and ejects it into the recovery bin.
As soon as the required number of articles have been ejected, the cylinder (1) returns the guide (2) to production
position.
This operation is controlled by the plc when there is a production problem PCC or by the operator when
samples need to taken.
For further information, please refer to chapter ""Options" family".

30/03/2015 II - 28 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Item ejection system
II - 28 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Recovery carriage Part II
29 RECOVERY CARRIAGE
29.1 Functions
- directs and collects the articles ejected from production at the various ejection points at the transfer wheel ,
- clears articles after collection,
- prevents access to moving parts when articles are being cleared.
29.2 Description
5 1
2 3
1-006904-01-xx.svg
1 Chute 3 Recovery bin

2 Recovery carriage
29.3 Operation
7
4 6
1-007006-01-xx.svg
The chutes (1) direct ejected articles into the collecting bins (3).
The lower doors (4) provide access to the recovery carriage (2).
The doors (4), located at the front of the machine, can be opened during production.
The protective grills (5) move to allow the recovery carriage (3) to be removed and prevent articles falling into the
carriage (2).
The protection grills (5) prevent any access to the moving mechanical parts.
30/03/2015 II - 29 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Recovery carriage
The recovery carriage (3) can be replaced during production.
A safety sensor (6) checks the position of the recovery carriage (2). If the safety sensor (6) detects movement of
the the recovery carriage (2), the plc will stop the machine immediately.
The hinges (7) release to allow the recovery carriage (2) to be removed from the machine.
Removing the recovery carriage (2) will give access to the transfer turntable.
II - 29 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Blowing station Part II
30 BLOWING STATION
30.1 Functions
The blowing station transforms the preforms into the blown finished items.
The production rate depends on the number of blowing stations on the machine (see Presentation Manual).
30.2 Description
4
1-006294-01-xx.svg
1 Blowing console 4 Mold support unit assembly

2 "TORNADO" nozzle cylinder and solenoid valves 5 Stretching console
3 Mold support unit 6 Stretching system
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 1/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Blowing station
30.3 Mold support unit
BSU-001
BNM-004, BNM-008
BDM-001, BDM-011, BDM-016, BDM-050
BRM-001, BRM-021, BRM-023
BGM-011, BGM-013, BGM-019
30.3.1 Functions
The mold support unit ensures that the molds remain in position during stretching, preblowing and blowing.
The mold support unit opens and closes the molds before and after blowing operations.
30.3.2 Description
5 6 6 5
2 8
10
7 3 ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
12 11
1-006295-01-xx.svg
1 Right support block 7 Locking shaft

2 Left support block 8 Locking pin
3 Control shaft 9 Locking rollers
4 Connecting rods 10 Hydraulic damper
5 Shell supports 11 Mold opening and closing lever
6 Mold shells 12 Mold opening and closing roller
II - 30 - 2/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
30.3.3 Operation
m Closing
When the preform is dropped into the mold shell (6), the mold opening and closing roller (12) is guided by the mold
opening and closing cam (13), activating the lever (11), the control shaft (3) and the connecting rods (4).
The lever (11) is fixed on the control rod (3) by a safety coupling.
The connecting rod system (4) closes the support blocks (1 ; 2). The hydraulic damper (10) limits the impact during
closing. If the mold support unit encounters any obstruction during closing the "B12.3" sensor (14) detects
movement on the retractable cam (15). The plc registers this information and inhibits blowing (only blowing) in the
blowing station concerned. The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.
6
1 4 11
2 13
10 12
15
11 12 14
1-006296-01-xx.svg
If there is excess stress, the mold opening and closing lever (11) and the mold opening and closing roller (12) may
slide relative to the control rod (3). This abnormal position is detected by the lever (16) and the "B12.2" sensor
(17). The plc generates a critical stoppage and the corresponding fault is displayed on the PCC. Before restarting
the machine, reset the lever (16) and set the mold opening and closing lever (11) concerned, see
12 11
16 18
17 19
1-008392-01-xx.svg
A permanent regulator (18) is fitted on the machine to set the mold opening and closing levers (11).
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 3/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
If the tool (18) is not in its initial position:

- the "B12.7" sensor (19) indicates a fault at the plc,
- the plc prevents the machine starting, see procedure "BRM-001".
m Locking
The left support block (2) clamps against the right support block (1), forcing in the holding rod (20) on the locking
system (21). The holding rod (20) releases the locking pin (7). The locking shaft (7)/locking pin (8) assembly are
pressed by the spring (22) towards the locking position.
Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it. see
procedure "BSU-001".
20 8 7
21
1-006298-01-xx.svg
The locking roller (9) moves along the locking cam (23) and causes the locking pins (8) to drop down.
The locking pins (8) hold the 2 support blocks (1 ; 2) against each other during preblowing, blowing and exhaust.
If there is a mislock:
- The locking roller (9) retracts the counter-cam (24),
- the plc prevents production taking place on the blowing station concerned,
- the machine stops if the fault is repeated (this parameter can be set at the PCC).
The damper (26) prevents the thrust caulking when the retractable cam (24) returns to its position.
II - 30 - 4/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
26
10
2
8 22 24 25
23 9 24
1-006299-01-xx.svg
m Compensation
The shell support (5) is fixed on the left support block (2) using pins (27) fitted with elastic systems which move
slightly.
During preblowing, blowing and exhaust, the pressure compensation system injects air into the area between the
shell support (5) and the left support block (2). The compensation system ensures that the 2 mold shells (6) are
perfectly joined during the preblowing and blowing phases. The compensation seal (28) ensures that the system is
airtight.
2 1 6
27 28
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 5/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-006300-01-xx.svg
m Unlocking
After blowing operations, the unlocking cam (27) raises the locking shaft (7) by means of the locking roller (9).
The locking shaft (7) reaches the up-position, the holding shaft (20) is pushed by the spring (30) up against the
locking pin (7). The locking shaft (7)/locking pin (8) assembly is held in the up-position by the holding lock (21).
8
7 20
2 30
21
9 1 29 31
1-006302-01-xx.svg
When the mold support unit opens, if the locking shaft (7) is not held (faulty lock):
- the "S30.2" sensor (31) indictaes to the plc that the locking pin is in the down-position (7),
- the machine stops immediately.
m Opening
The mold opening and closing roller (12) moves along the mold opening and closing cam (13), moving the mold
opening and closing lever (11), the control rod (3) and the connecting rods (4) to move.
The connecting rod system (4) separates the 2 support blocks (1 ; 2).
II - 30 - 6/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4 3 13 11 13
12
32
11 12 2 1
1-006303-01-xx.svg
If a bottle remains inside the mold:
- the "S30.1" sensor (32) signals the plc,
- the plc immediately stops the machine.
30.4 Mold support unit assembly
BDM-011, BDM-035, BDM-037
BGM-009
30.4.1 Functions
The mold support unit raises and lowers the mold base.
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 7/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
30.4.2 Description
7
13
6
2
8
11
10
12
1 9
1-007725-01-xx.svg
1 Mold base support 5 Spacer

2 Compression springs 6 Linear ball bearing guide
3 Ball-bearing roller 7 Mold base
4 Pneumatic console 8 Blowing console
30.4.3 Operation
2 compression springs (2) hold the mold base support (1) in the up-position.
The up/down movement, designed on a linear guide system on ball-bearings (6), is controlled by a roller (3) moving
along the cam (9). The raised position of the roller (3) on the cam (9) is controlled by the limit stop (10).
The pin (11) connected to the roller (3) is a safety element.
If there is stress during the down movement (the mold has remained closed, for example):
- the pin (11) breaks in order to protect the other mechanical parts,
- the sensor "B31.3" (not-visible) detects the absence of the roller (3),
- the plc immediately stops the machine,
- an alarm message appears at the PCC.
Replace the broken safety pin (11) by 1 original SIDEL part.
A pneumatic system fixes the mold base (7) on the pneumatic console (4), the system allows the mold base to be
changed quickly, see procedure "BDM-011". The console (4), fitted with 2 quick-change connectors (12) connects
the cooling system and the mold base (7).
The very precise position of the mold base (7) with regard to the mold is factory preset using peelable shims (13)
fitted below the pneumatic console (4).
II - 30 - 8/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Do not attempt to adjust the peelable shims (13) or the limit stops (10) without precise instructions from
SIDEL.
Inform SIDEL of any problem relating to the position of the mold base (7) with regard to the mold or with
regard to the cam (9).
Never change the height of the spacers (5). The spacers (5) have been factory preset and glued in position.
30.5 The "Push-up" system (option)

30.5.1 Functions
Faclitates the release of articles from the mold.
30.5.2 Description
1 2
6
1-011050-01-xx.svg
1 Pressure regulator 5 Mold base

2 Mold shell 6 Pneumatic console
3 Vent 7 Solenoid valve
4 Arch
30.5.3 Operation
The pressure regulator (1) drops the air pressure to 9 bar at the circuit outlet 10 bar on the blowing wheel, and
supplies the solenoid valve (7) on the blowing stations.
The solenoid valve (7) authorises the air to pass through.
The plc actuates the solenoid valve (7) when an article is present in the mold shells (2).
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 9/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The solenoid valve (7) is actuated before and during the mold base descent (5), the duration can be set at the
PCC.
The air distributed into the pneumatic carriage (6) then the mold base (5) is diffused through the vents (3) in the
arch (4) on the walls of the article base.
The air diffused on the article base isolates the contact walls on the arch (4) on the mold base (5) to facilitate the
release of the articles from the mold.
An efficient "push-up" system requires the temperature of the mold bases to be lower than 70 °C.
30.6 "Pushed-up base" system (option)

30.6.1 Functions
Faclitates the release of articles from the mold.
30.6.2 Description
1 2 3 4
1-012647-01-xx.svg
Air 7 bar 3 Compensation solenoid valve
Air 40 bar 4 Pressure regulator

1 Mold shell 5 Arch
2 Distributor 6 "Pushed-up base"
30.6.3 Operation
The air 40 bar from the compensation circuit actuates the raise of the "Pushed-up base" (6).
The solenoid valve (3) authorises the air to pass through.
The plc actuates the solenoid valve (3) when an article is present in the mold shells (1).
II - 30 - 10/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The solenoid valve (3) is actuated when the mold shells (1) close and during the blow molding of the article.
The pressure regulator (4) drops the air pressure to 9 bar at the circuit outlet 10 bar on the blowing wheel, and
supplies the distributor (2) on the blowing stations.
The air from the blowing wheel circuit 10 bar actuates the drop of the "Pushed-up base" (6).
The distributor (2) is actuated before the mold shells (1) open.
The "Pushed-up Base" system is associated with the "Push-up" system.
The "Push-up" system is actuated at the same time as the "Pushed-up base" drops.
For further information, please refer to chapter "The "Push-up" system ".
30.7 "TORNADO" nozzle cylinder and solenoid valves
BPU-002, BPU-012, BPU-013
BDM-002, BDM-008, BDM-015, BDM-025, BDM-032, BDM-034, BDM-036, BDM-063, BDM-072
BGM-021
During the warranty period only the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly may be replaced, see
procedure "BDM-002".
30.7.1 Functions
The "TORNADO" solenoid valves distribute preblowing, blowing, recycled and exhaust air.
The nozzle cylinder holds the preform in the mold. The nozzle cylinder ensures the seal between the solenoid
valves "TORNADO" and the preform being blown.
30.7.2 Description
5 6
6 5
4 7
4
9 8 9
16 3 8
16
1 3
12
12 1
13 10
10
13
2
11
2 11
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 11/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-010714-01-xx.svg
1 Nozzle cylinder 7 "TORNADO" air recovery solenoid valve (option)

2 Nozzle tip 8 Exhaust silencer
3 "TORNADO" solenoid valve base 9 Flow limiter
4 "TORNADO" preblowing solenoid valve 10 Blowing console
5 "TORNADO" blowing solenoid valve 11 Mold
6 "TORNADO" exhaust blowing solenoid valve 12 Cylinder solenoid valve
30.7.3 Operation
1
12
14
13
15
11
1-010703-01-xx.svg
When the preform is off-loaded into the mold (11), the electro-distributor (12) controls the descent of the piston (13)
in the nozzle cylinder (1).
The nozzle tip (2) holds the preform neck-ring against the mold (11).
The "TORNADO" solenoid valve base (3) and the diffuser (14) for the nozzle cylinder (1) guide the stretching rod
(15).
The "TORNADO" solenoid valves (4 ; 5) distribute preblowing and blowing air. The flow limiter (9) sets the preblow
air flow. The pressure screw (16) clamps the flow meter (9).
The solenoid valve "TORNADO" are electro-pneumatically controlled. The functioning of the "TORNADO" solenoid
valves depends on the control pressure (6 bar) as adjusted on the specific circuit.
After blowing, the "TORNADO" solenoid valve (7) passes air from inside the bottle to the air recovery system
(option).
When the air has been recycled the "TORNADO" exhaust solenoid valve (6) depressurizes the blown bottle via the
exhaust silencer (8).
The piston (13) in the nozzle cylinder (1) raises.
The nozzle raise safety cam (17) prevents any contact betweeen the nozzles and the transfer arms. If the nozzle
does not raise correctly, the ring (18) slides along the safety cam (17) causing the nozzle cylinder to raise.
II - 30 - 12/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
18 2
21 19
17 20
1-007361-03-xx.svg
2 safety systems controlling the raising of the nozzle cylinder (1):
- the detector "B31.1" (19) detects the movement of the rod (20) activated by the contact of the nozzle tip (2) if
raising is late,
- the safety cam (17) sets off the raising of the nozzle cylinder (1) via the safety ring (18).
If any obstruction to the nozzle raising action is detected by the "B31.1" sensor (19):
- the controller stops the machine progressively,
- the controller blocks all process operations on the blowing station concerned,
- the corresponding fault is displayed at the PCC.
The nozzle raise safety cam (17) prevents any contact betweeen the nozzles and the transfer arms. If the nozzle
does not raise correctly, the ring (18) slides along the safety cam (17) causing the nozzle cylinder to raise. If raising
requires much effort from the nozzle cylinder (1) the safety cam (17) pivots.
The "B33.3" sensor (21) detects the movement of the safety cam (17):
- the plc generates a critical machine stoppage,
- the machine stops immediately,
- the corresponding fault is displayed at the PCC.
30.8 Stretching system
BPU-001
BNM-015
BDM-014, BDM-017, BDM-026, BDM-027, BDM-029, BDM-030, BDM-031
BRM-009
BGM-008
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 13/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
30.8.1 Functions
The stretching system elongates the preforms along their long axis during preblowing.
30.8.2 Description
5 6 13
8
16
3
15 9
7
2
4
10
14
17
11
12
1-008510-01-xx.svg
1 Stretching support 6 Electro-distributor

2 Stretching rod 7 Stretching cam
3 Slide 8 Stretching safety cam
4 Guide rail 9 Retractable cam
5 Stretching cylinder
30.8.3 Operation
The "B13.0" sensor (10) informs the plc of the angular position of the stretching cam (7) with regard to blowing
station no. 1 in order to synchronize production operations. The electro-distributor (6) controls the cylinder (5) which
lowers the slide (3) and stretching rod (2) assembly.
The slide (3) moves along the guide rail (4). The stretching rod (2) slides through the solenoid valve
"TORNADO"(11) and nozzle cylinder (12) assembly support.
The roller (13) on the slide (3) presses along the stretching cam (7) and ensures a regular speed and descent of
the stretching cam (2).
The thrust (14), which is adapted to the item being produced, limits the descent stroke of the damper (15).
A non-return valve holds the stretching system in position when it is not being piloted. The electro-distributor (6) is
fitted with a manual purge (16) for maintenance and adjustment operations.
During blowing, the stretching system returns to the raised position.
If the stretching cylinder (3) raises using the stretching safety cam (8):
- the roller (13) retracts the retractable cam (9),
- the plc generates a critical machine stoppage.
II - 30 - 14/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Check the stretching system at the blowing station concerned.
30.9 Production cycle diagram

The production cycle diagram illustrates the full production cycle at a blowing station.
The angular positions of certain actions are approximate and can vary according to the production process.
10
16
11
12 13 14 17 15 1 2 3 4 5 6
1-012666-01-xx.svg
1 Mold base raising 10 Stretching raise

2 Mold closing 11 Exhaust

3 Nozzle down 12 Nozzle up
4 Mold locking 13 Mold unlocking
5 Stretching lower 14 Mold opening
6 Mold compensation 15 Mold base lowering
7 Axial mechanical stretching 16 "Pushed-up base" raising
8 Preblowing 17 "Pushed-up base" lowering
9 Blowing
30/03/2015 II - 30 - 15/16
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
II - 30 - 16/16 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Blowing machine aeraulic system Part II
31 BLOWING MACHINE AERAULIC SYSTEM
BDM-084, BDM-085
31.1 Functions
The aeraulic system keeps the articles clean using a supply of filtered air and by maintaining a higher level of
pressure inside the blowing machine.
31.2 Description
5 3 1
2 4
3 1
1-008894-02-xx.svg
1 Ventilation cabinet 4 Fan

Blowing machine aeraulic system electrical
2 Prefilter 5
cabinet
3 Total filter
31.3 Operation
The aeraulic sysem is composed of 2 cooling ducts (1) located above the transer table and 3 cooling ducts 4 fitted
onto the blow wheel panelling.
Each cooling duct (1) is composed of:
- 1 or 2 prefilters (2),
- 1 or 2 fans (4),
- 1 total filter (3).
The fans (4) aspirate ambient air from the production area.
30/03/2015 II - 31 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Blowing machine aeraulic system
The prefilter (2) is ocated upstream from the fan (4) and retains large particles and prevents micro-organisms
entering the cooling duct (1).
The total filter (3) retains undesirable particles up to 0,01 µm and maintains a clean environment inside the blow
wheel.
The rotation speed of the fans (4) varies according to the pressure differential between the cooling duct (1) and the
interior of the blowing machine. The rotation speed of the fans (4) compensates for the loss of load caused by
clogging in the total filter (3).
If the filter is saturated a fault will appear at the PCC.
A pressure switch with an indicator PCC controls the flow of air into the cooling duct (1).
II - 31 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Retractable bottle outfeed Part II
32 RETRACTABLE BOTTLE OUTFEED

32.1 Functions
- to synchronize the transport or the blown articles from the transfer wheel out of the machine,
- to preserve machine hygiene when an intervention is required on another machine,
- to isolate the blowing machine from the highly corrosive products used for the cleaning and sterilization of the
filling machine,
- to physically isolate one machine from another.
32.2 Description
5 1 3 2 7 6 4
1-010566-02-xx.svg
1 Bottle outfeed wheel* 4 Bottle outfeed air circuit*

2 Bottle outfeed retractable guide * 5 Access glove*
3 Blower/filler separating wall* 6 Bottle outfeed wheel ejection guide*
32.3 Operation
After blowing, the transfer grips (7) convey the articles towards the bottle outfeed wheel (1). If the articles knock
against the ejection guide on the bottle outfeed wheel (6), they will be dropped from the transfer grips (7). The
bottle outfeed wheel (1) conveys the articles to the filling machine. The bottle outfeed wheel (1) is driven by belt
connected to the filler transfer shaft pulley .
the bottle outfeed wheel (1) can be retracted manually using the access glove (5).
The positions of the bottle outfeed wheel (2) and the filler/blower separating wall (3) are ensured by the cylinders,
supplied by the bottle outfeed air circuit (4). This automatic procedure is carried out at the PCC.
Confirm the retracted position of the bottle outfeed wheel (1) at the PCC in order to authorize the automatic
separation operation.
The access glove (5) allows access to the bottle outfeed wheel (1) without having to open the machine.
30/03/2015 II - 32 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Retractable bottle outfeed
II - 32 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Bottle outfeed wheel Part II
33 BOTTLE OUTFEED WHEEL

33.1 Functions
- synchronizes the conveying of the blown articles from the preform transfer wheel towards the downstream
filler ,
- retracts to enable the filler/blower partition to close,
- disengages if there is a blockage.
33.2 Description
14
15
1
7
11
12
2 4
13
1-010514-06-xx.svg
A Bottle outfeed wheel 4 Catch

1 Neck guide plate 5 Sensor support
2 Upper and lower flanges 6 Pneumatic torque limiter

3 Locking shaft 7 Body guide plate
33.3 Operation
Certain elements require specific maintenance. For further information, please refer to chapter "Blowing
machine maintenance schedule" .
m Conveyor system
After blowing, the transfer grips (15) take the bottles towards the bottle outfeed wheel (A). If the articles knock
against the ejection guide on the bottle outfeed wheel (14), they will be dropped from the transfer grips (15).
The bottle outfeed wheel (A) conveys articles towards the filler.
Depending on the article being produced, the neck guide plate (1) and the body guide plate (7) may need to be
changed.
30/03/2015 II - 33 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Bottle outfeed wheel
For further information, see procedure "BDM-046", see procedure "BDM-105".
The number of body guide plates (7) varies depending on the article produced.
16
10
1-010515-03-xx.svg
m Transmission
The bottle outfeed wheel (A) is driven by a belt (16) linked to the pulley (8) on the filler.
For any intervention relating to the transmission belt (16) on the bottle outfeed wheel (A), refer to the technical
documentation supplied with the filler.
The synchronization between the blowing machine (master)and the filling machine (slave) is carried out by the
filling machine plc.

The synchronization of the bottle outfeed wheel (A) with regard to the bottle transfer wheel is checked automatically
at reduced speed each time the machine starts.
The filler plc synchronizes the filler and the blower based on information received from:
- the filler motor encoders,
- the synchronization disc sensor (9) located on the bottle transfer shaft (10),
- the blower motor encoder.
For further information, refer to the technical documentation supplied with the filler.
To check communication between the filler and the blower, refer to the User Manual supplied with the filling
machine.
The bottle outfeed wheel (A) is fitted with an adjustment system (11) which allows the synchronization to be
adjusted.
II - 33 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Bottle outfeed wheel Part II
For further information, refer to the technical documentation supplied with the filler.
m Torque limiter
The bottle outfeed wheel shaft (A) is fitted with a pneumatic torque limiter (6).
Never modify the operating pressures of the pneumatic torque limiter.
If there is excess effort on any of the shafts:

- the corresponding torque limiter trips,
- production is cleared from the blower and the filler,
- an alarm message appears at the PCC,
- the blower and the filler stop.
If the limiter (6) is set off, it will need to be re-armed manually.
Determine the cause of the over-torque before starting the machine.
Never change the positions of the sensors on the torque limiters unless recommended by SIDEL.
m Bottle outfeed wheel retraction

The bottle outfeed wheel shaft (A) is fitted with a retraction system (2) composed of an upper and a lower part.
Removing the shaft (3) releases the upper flange on the retraction system (2) which allows the bottle outfeed wheel
(A) to be cleared. The locking catch (4) secures the lower part of the retraction system (2) preventing the bottle
outfeed wheel (A) from rotating.
The (12) sensor "B1211.2" signals to the plc that the bottle outfeed wheel shaft (A) is locked.
The (13) sensor "B1211.3" on the sensor support (5) detects the position of the upper flange on the retraction
system (2) and signals the retracted position of the bottle outfeed wheel (A) to the plc.
The shaft (3) is also used to block the bottle outfeed wheel (A) in retracted position.
30/03/2015 II - 33 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Bottle outfeed wheel
II - 33 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Bottle outfeed retractable guide Part II
34 BOTTLE OUTFEED RETRACTABLE GUIDE

34.1 Functions
- unclip the articles coming from the transfer arm,
- hold the articles on the bottle outfeed wheel when they are being conveyed,
- release the articles if the machine is blocked,
- free up some space to allow the bottle outfeed wheel to retract and the filler/blower separation wall to close.
34.2 Description
1-010514-05-xx.svg
1 Bottle outfeed retractable guide 3 Pneumatic jack cylinder

2 Bottle outfeed wheel ejection guide
34.3 Operation
machine maintenance schedule" .
If the articles knock against the ejection guide on the bottle outfeed wheel (2), they will be dropped from the transfer
grips .
the retractable guide (1) holds the articles produced on the bottle outfeed wheel during conveying.
If there an article is blocked in the machine, the ejection guide on the bottle outfeed (2) retracts to liberate the
articles.
Moving the retractable guide (1) allows the filler/blower separating wall to close.
The retractable guide (1) moves during the "filler/blower separation" cycle.
30/03/2015 II - 34 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Bottle outfeed retractable guide
Depending on the article being produced, the retractable guide (1) and the rejection guide (2) may need to be
changed.
For further information, see procedure "BDM-047", see procedure "BDM-104".
The plc controls the pneumatic cylinders (3).

The sensor "B1211.1" signals the retracted position of the guide (1) to the plc.
The sensor "B1211.0" signals the production position of the guide (1).
The "B14.2" sensor signals the retracted position of the ejection guide (2).
II - 34 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Blower/filler separating wall Part II
35 BLOWER/FILLER SEPARATING WALL

35.1 Functions
- to preserve machine hygiene when an intervention is required on another machine,
- to isolate the blowing machine from the highly corrosive products used for the cleaning and sterilization of the
filling machine,
- to physically isolate one machine from another.
35.2 Description
2 1
1-010514-01-xx.svg
1 Blower/filler separating wall 2 Inflatable seal

35.3 Operation
The blower/filler separating partition (1) is activated by a cylinder controlled at the PCC. The filler is air-tightly
isolated from the blower.
A sensor "E1210.3" indicates the closed position of the partition (1) to the plc.
A sensor "E1210.2" indicates the open position of the blower/filler partition (1) to the plc.
After the filler/blower partition (1) has closed, the PCC begins pressurizing the inflatable seal (2).
A sensor "E1210.0" signals the pressurization of the inflatable seal (1) to the plc.
A sensor "E1210.1" signals the de-pressurization of the inflatable seal (1) to the plc.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Bottle outfeed air circuit".
The filler/blower partition (1) closing cycle is possible after the bottle outfeed wheel has been retracted
manually and the guides have retracted automatically.
30/03/2015 II - 35 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Blower/filler separating wall
II - 35 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Bottle outfeed air circuit Part II
36 BOTTLE OUTFEED AIR CIRCUIT

36.1 Functions
- turn on and regulate the air supply required for the operation of the blowing/filling separation system,
- turn on and regulate the air to the bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter.
36.2 Description
B B
2 10
6
3
4
7
A 8
1-014267-01-xx.svg
A Bottle outfeed air circuit 5 Manual control valve

B 7 bar outside air supply (option) 6 Controlled pressure regulator
1 Manual control valve 7 Pressure regulator
2 Filter - regulator 8 Pressure regulator
3 Pressure gauge 9 7 bar supply
4 Air lubricator 10 7 bar supply (not provided) (Options)
36.3 Operation
The bottle outfeed air circuit (A) is supplied by the permanent 7 bar circuit on the blowing machine.
The outside air supply option supplies the pneumatic panel with a 7 bar pressure when the machine is in
setting mode with no pneumatic supply.
The hand valve (1) closes the air supply to the bottle outfeed air circuit (A) and purges the air present in the circuit.
The filter - regulator (2) eliminates particles present in the air using a filter 40 µ and regulates the pressure in the
bottle outfeed air circuit (A).
30/03/2015 II - 36 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Bottle outfeed air circuit
For further information, see procedure "BDM-102".
The pressure gauge (3) indicates the pressure in the bottle outfeed air circuit (A) after regulation.
The lubricator (4) lubricates the air required for the operation of the bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter .
For further information, see procedure "BGM-040".
The hand valve (5) purges residual air from the bottle outfeed circuit (A) when the other valve (1) is closed.
The controlled regulator (6) limits the service pressure of the bottle outfeed wheel pneumatic torque limiter to 4 bar.
The regulator (7) allows you to manually adjust the service pressure of the inflatable seal in the separating partition
to 0,5 bar.
The regulator (8) allows you to manually adjust the service pressure of the control valve in the filler/blower
separating partition to 4 bar.
II - 36 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Access glove Part II
37 ACCESS GLOVE
37.1 Functions
- interventions in the bottle outfeed zone must not affect the level of machine hygiene,
- retract the bottle outfeed wheel manually before starting the automatic filler/blower isolation procedure,
- remove articles from the bottle outfeed wheel after blockages,
- reset the bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter after an over-torque.
37.2 Description
1
1-010545-03-XX.svg
1 Access glove 2 Access door
37.3 Operation
Once the machine has stopped, the operator opens the access door (2) and uses the glove (1) to access the bottle
outfeed zone.
- The access door (2) secures access to the glove (1).
- Opening the access door (2) will stop the machine.
30/03/2015 II - 37 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Access glove
The machine must be stopped in order to use the glove (1).
Production can not be started while the access door (2) is open.
The glove (1) must be replaced if it is worn.
For further information, see procedure "BDM-099".
II - 37 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Automatic grease spray system Part II
38 AUTOMATIC GREASE SPRAY SYSTEM
BNM-007, BNM-014
BGM-023
38.1 Functions
The automatic grease spray system ensures that the teeth on the blow wheel and oven wheel drive rings are
lubricated.
38.2 Description
3 4 10 9 8 12 7 6
14
13
5 1 2 11 15
1-008484-01-xx.svg
1 Grease pump 9 Air supply solenoid valve

2 Grease pump motor 10 Pressure switch
3 Grease tank 11 Grease distributor

4 Grease tank low level sensor 12 Grease distributor operation sensor
5 Grease tank filling nipple 13 Spray nozzle
6 Permanent machine low pressure air circuit inlet 14 Blow wheel drive ring
7 Manual control valve 15 Oven wheel drive ring
8 Pressure regulator (2 bar)
38.3 Operation
The frequency of the spray cycles can be set on the PCC. For further information, please refer to chapter
"Automatic lubrication (option depends on model)".
At the start of the spray cycle, the plc starts the pump motor (2) and opens the low pressure air solenoid valve (9)
simultaneously.
30/03/2015 II - 38 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Automatic grease spray system
The motor (2) activates the grease pump (1) at each spray cycle. The grease pump (1) sends grease to the grease
distributor (11). The grease distributor (11) supplies grease to the spray nozzles (13) according to the requirements
of the teeth (as defined by the distributor design).
The pressure regulator (8) reduces the pressure to 2 bar. The pressure switch (10) controls the pressure in the
circuit after regulation. If there is a fault with the pressure, the fault will be shown on the PCC. The air is conducted
into the nozzles (13) which spray the grease onto the blow wheel (14) and the oven wheel (15) drive rings.
The low level grease detector (3) indicates a low level to the plc and the corresponding fault is displayed on the
PCC. The grease distributor operating sensor (12) indicates the lack of flow in the grease distributor (11).
Fill the grease tank (3) or replace the faulty grease distributor (11) in the 2 h following the message.
At the end of the spray cycle, the grease pump (1) stops and the is sent to clear the pipes and the spray nozzles
(13).
II - 38 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Automated self-lubricating system Part II
39 AUTOMATED SELF-LUBRICATING SYSTEM

39.1 Functions
- To automate the lubrication of some machine mechanisms.
- To regulate the quantity of lubricant for each of the lubricating points.
39.2 Description
5 11
2 18
16 11
17
10 9 8 9
1
19 20
10
12
8 14
13 14
15
13
6 7 7 6 3
1-017477-01-xx.svg
1 Main grease distributor 12 Stretching cam

2 Secondary grease distributor 13 Mold opening/closing cam (internal)
3 Secondary grease distributor 14 Mold opening/closing cam (external)
4 Secondary grease distributor 15 Mold up/down cam

5 Main grease distributor 16 Blow wheel drive ring movements
6 Grease pump 17 Oven wheel drive ring movements
7 Grease pump motor 18 Onload/offload cams
8 Grease tank 19 Cams of the bottle transfer wheel
9 Grease tank low level sensor 20 Cams of the preform transfer wheel
10 Grease tank filling nipple Lubricant
11 Grease distributor operation sensor
39.3 Operation
When the automated greasing cycle starts, the PLC starts the motor for each of the grease pumps (7) separately.
30/03/2015 II - 39 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Automated self-lubricating system
The frequency of the automatic greasing system can be set at the PCC. For further information, please refer
to chapter "Automatic lubrication (option according to model)".
The motors (7) activate the respective grease pumps (6) for each automated grease cycle. The grease pumps (6)
diffuse the grease to the main grease distributors (1 ; 5).
The main grease distributors (1 ; 5) distribute partial doses of grease to the other grease distributors (2 ; 3 ; 4).
The sensors (9) indicate to the PLC a low level of grease in the grease tanks (8) causing the relevant message to
appear on the PCC.
The operation sensors (11) inform the PLC that there is no grease flow in the grease distributors (1 ; 5).
Fill up the grease tanks (8) or replace the faulty grease distributor within 2 hours of the fault message
appearing.
Fill the tanks (8) with lubricant using a grease gun connected to the filling nipple (10), see
procedure "BGM-023".
Fill the grease tanks (8) using Sidel-recommended lubricant .
The point at which the grease pipes connect onto the distributors varies according to the volumes of grease to
be distributed.
Never reverse or change the points at which the pipes connect onto the grease distributors.
II - 39 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Blowing machine safety system Part II
40 BLOWING MACHINE SAFETY SYSTEM

40.1 Emergency stop buttons
40.1.1 Functions
To immediately stop machine .
19 5 10 11 21 10 6 20 A 8
5
18
17 22 7 15 B
F
4
1
18
16 13
E
C
4
17 12 2 3 14 D 9
1-010628-04-xx.svg
40.1.2 Description
Emergency stop buttons
A Steam sterilization module Present depending on the machine configuration

B Main electrical cabinet 2 modules Present depending on the machine model
C Main electrical cabinet 1 modules Present depending on the machine model
Dedust module
D Present depending on the machine configuration
Preform decontamination module PredisTM
E Bottle outfeed on 2 lines Present depending on the machine configuration

F Bottle outfeed on 1 lines Present depending on the machine configuration
1 Cabinet emergency stop "S1A"
2 Control panel emergency stop "S1B"
The position of this element depends on the
3 "S1C" blowing machine infeed emergency stop
machine configuration
4 Blowing machine outfeed emergency stop "S1D"
5 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1E"
6 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1F"
7 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1G"
8 Oven emergency stop "S1I"
9 Oven emergency stop "S1H" Present depending on the machine model
10 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1X" Accessible in the maintenance zone in JOG mode
30/03/2015 II - 40 - 1/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part II User Manual / Blowing machine safety system
Accessible on the roof of the blowing machine in

11 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1Y"
JOG mode
Accessible in the recovery zone in JOG
12 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1Z"
mode, depending on the machine model
13 Oven emergency stop "S1W" Depending on the machine model
14 "S1C1" blowing machine infeed emergency stop Present depending on the machine configuration
15 Oven emergency stop "S1V" Depending on the machine model
Depending on the machine model
16 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1AE"
Confinement area
17 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1AB"
Confinement area
18 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1AC"
Confinement area
19 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1AD"
Confinement area
20 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1AA"
Confinement area
21 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1AF"
Confinement area
22 Blow wheel emergency stop "S1AG"
Confinement area
40.1.3 Operation
All the machine emergency stop buttons are connected in series to a safety relay .
Actuating an emergency stop button causes the potential of the machine remote control voltage to drop.
When the potential of the machine remote control voltage drops, the safety functions are activated.
Example of safety functions activated:
- motor (running) power cut-off,
- brake system purged,
- 40 bar purged,
- oven heating and ventilation cut-off.
The PCC, via the PLC , informs the operator of:
- the activation of one (several) emergency stop button(s) ,
- the position of the emergency stop button(s) activated.
An emergency stop button triggering on the blowing machine will not stop the preform distributor.
The operation of the emergency stop buttons is identical in all the machine operating modes. ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
For further information, see procedure "BSU-005", in the Servicing Procedure Catalog.
40.2 Doors open sensor

40.2.1 Functions
To immediately stop machine .
II - 40 - 2/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
40.2.2 Description
15 6 7 12 8 11 9 10 9 13 10 A 17 18 19 20
14
2 3 16 1 26 25 26 27 25 24 B 23 22 21
1-010628-02-xx.svg
Door safety sensors
A Steam sterilization module Present depending on the machine configuration

Dedust module
B Present depending on the machine configuration
Preform decontamination module PredisTM
C Bottle outfeed on 2 lines Present depending on the machine configuration
D Bottle outfeed on 1 lines Present depending on the machine configuration
1 Contactor "B69A1"
2 Contactor "B69A2" Present depending on the machine configuration
3 Contactor "B69A3"
5 Contactor "B69A5"
6 Contactor "B69A6"
7 Contactor "B69A7"
8 Contactor "B69A8"
9 Contactor "B69A9"
10 Contactor "B69A10"
14 Contactor "B69A14" Located on the roof of the blowing machine
15 Contactor "B69A15" Located on the roof of the blowing machine
16 Contactor "B69A16" Located in the article recovery zone
30/03/2015 II - 40 - 3/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
19 Contactor "B69A18B" Present depending on the machine model

22 Contactor "B69A21B" Present depending on the machine model
25 Contactor "B69A23" Present depending on the machine model
40.2.3 Operation
All the doors open sensors of the machine are connected in series to a safety relay .
Opening a safety door on the blowing machine will not stop:
- oven cooling ,
- cooling of the PredisTM preform decontamination module (option).
Opening a safety door on the blowing machine will not stop the preform distributor.
For further information, see procedure "BSU-006", in the Servicing Procedure Catalog.
m Operation in production mode

Opening a machine door cuts off the machine remote control voltage.
When the machine remote control voltage is cut-off, the safety functions are activated.
Example of safety functions activated:
- motor (running) power cut-off,
- brake system purged,
- 40 bar purged,
- oven heating cut-off .
- door opening,
- The position of the open door(s).
m Operation in setting mode
Opening a machine door inhibits all possible actions at the PCC.
m Operation in JOG mode

The installation of the JOG in a maintenance area inhibits the door safeties of the area used.
The operation of all the other door safeties is identical to that of a machine in production.
II - 40 - 4/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Door closed acknowledgement button in confinement area
1 2 3
1-014746-00-xx.svg
A confinement area is an area where the closure of a safety door could trap an operator in the machine.
In normal operation, safety doors of confinement areas closed:
- All the red lights (1) off,
- All the green lights (2) continuously lit.
One (several) door(s) of the confinement areas open:
- All the red lights (1) continuously lit,
- The green light (2) of the door(s) of the confinement areas off.
- door opening,
- The position of the open door(s).
To acknowledge the door open fault in a confinement area:
Check there is no operator in the confinement area(s) open before reclosing the door(s) .
· Close the open door(s).

- The green light (2) of the reclosed door(s) flashes,
- All the red lights (1) continuously lit.
· Touch the flashing green light (2) of the reclosed door(s).
- All the green lights (2) continuously lit,
- All the red lights (1) off.
When a machine restart request is made with a door open or not acknowledged, a message appears at the
PCC prohibiting the restart.
The panic handle (3) allows the user to unlock the door from the inside of the machine.
30/03/2015 II - 40 - 5/6
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
II - 40 - 6/6 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Table of Contents Part III

OPERATION Part III
MAINTENANCE Part V
APPENDIX Part VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
Safety pictograms ............................................................................................................................................... 1.1
Safety during production ..................................................................................................................................... 1.2
Safety recommendations related to the use of hydrogen peroxide (Decontamination option) ........................... 1.3
Product reference(s) ................................................................................................................................. 1.3.1
Storage conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 1.3.2
Safety during production ............................................................................................................................ 1.3.3
Recommendations in the case of accidents .............................................................................................. 1.3.4
Safety related to the use of the manual storage unit (option) ............................................................................. 1.4
COUNTER-INDICATIONS 2
Improper use ...................................................................................................................................................... 2.1
Prohibited use ..................................................................................................................................................... 2.2
Hygiene .............................................................................................................................................................. 2.3
PRESENTATION OF THE PCC APPLICATION 3

General Information ............................................................................................................................................ 3.1
Definition of PCC application technical terms ............................................................................................ 3.1.1
Composition of screen pages .................................................................................................................... 3.1.2
Navigation and information bar ......................................................................................................... 3.1.2.1
Central section .................................................................................................................................. 3.1.2.2
Lower bar .......................................................................................................................................... 3.1.2.3
"Automatic" and "Manual" modes .............................................................................................................. 3.1.3
"Automatic" mode .............................................................................................................................. 3.1.3.1
"Manual" mode .................................................................................................................................. 3.1.3.2
Operating levels ......................................................................................................................................... 3.1.4

Operating levels defined ................................................................................................................... 3.1.4.1
Entering a user name ........................................................................................................................ 3.1.4.2
PCC application tree structure ................................................................................................................... 3.1.5
The "Operator Monitoring" family ....................................................................................................................... 3.2
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.2.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.2.2
Research criteria ........................................................................................................................................ 3.2.3
Research results ........................................................................................................................................ 3.2.4
"Main page" family .............................................................................................................................................. 3.3
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.3.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.3.2
Alarms and messages display bar ............................................................................................................. 3.3.3
30/03/2015 III - 1/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part III User Manual / Table of Contents
Output rate setpoint ................................................................................................................................... 3.3.4

Resetting the bottle counter to zero ........................................................................................................... 3.3.5
Temperature and pressure parameters ..................................................................................................... 3.3.6
"Feeder" family (option) ...................................................................................................................................... 3.4
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.4.2
Preform feeder settings .............................................................................................................................. 3.4.3
Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder ......................................................................................... 3.4.4
Manual mode ............................................................................................................................................. 3.4.5
Hopper control (depending on the machine configuration) ........................................................................ 3.4.6
Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors ....................................................................... 3.4.7
Clearing the feeder .................................................................................................................................... 3.4.8
Preform ...................................................................................................................................................... 3.4.9
Preform tipper (depending on the machine configuration) ....................................................................... 3.4.10
The "Hygiene" family (depending on the machine configuration) ....................................................................... 3.5
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.5.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.5.2
Internal preform decontamination .............................................................................................................. 3.5.3
Flow rate instruction window for preform decontamination ............................................................... 3.5.3.1
Preform decontamination regulation windows .................................................................................. 3.5.3.2
Vaporization nozzles ......................................................................................................................... 3.5.3.3
External preform decontamination ............................................................................................................. 3.5.4
UV infeed rail (option) ................................................................................................................................ 3.5.5
Aeraulics .................................................................................................................................................... 3.5.6
Extraction hood (option) .................................................................................................................... 3.5.6.1
Surface disinfection .................................................................................................................................... 3.5.7
Type of disinfection cycle .................................................................................................................. 3.5.7.1
Filter steam sterilization ............................................................................................................................. 3.5.8
"Oven" family ...................................................................................................................................................... 3.6
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.6.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.6.2
Lamp configuration .................................................................................................................................... 3.6.3
Mechanical oven configuration (depending on the machine configuration) ............................................... 3.6.4
General view of mechancial oven configuration (depending on the machine configuration) ............ 3.6.4.1
Observations .............................................................................................................................................. 3.6.5
Preform decontamination (depending on the machine configuration) ....................................................... 3.6.6
Flow rate instruction window for preform decontamination ............................................................... 3.6.6.1
Preform decontamination regulation windows .................................................................................. 3.6.6.2
Vaporization nozzles ......................................................................................................................... 3.6.6.3
Setting the oven parameters (option) ......................................................................................................... 3.6.7

Setpoint instructions ................................................................................................................................... 3.6.8
Extraction hood (option) .................................................................................................................... 3.6.8.1
Heat recovery unit (option) ................................................................................................................ 3.6.8.2
Preform neck cooling (option) ........................................................................................................... 3.6.8.3
X preform neck cooling (option) ........................................................................................................ 3.6.8.4
Preform temperature .................................................................................................................................. 3.6.9
Temperature of the preform body ..................................................................................................... 3.6.9.1
Checking the preforms (option) ......................................................................................................... 3.6.9.2
Thermal imaging of the preform (option) ........................................................................................... 3.6.9.3
"Wheel" family .................................................................................................................................................... 3.7
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.7.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.7.2
III - 2/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Lamp configuration .................................................................................................................................... 3.7.3
Blowing charts ............................................................................................................................................ 3.7.4
Stretching ................................................................................................................................................... 3.7.5
Preforms and blown items ......................................................................................................................... 3.7.6
Changing the molds (option) ...................................................................................................................... 3.7.7
Regulation process (option) ....................................................................................................................... 3.7.8
Summary of regulation process ........................................................................................................ 3.7.8.1
Offsets of preblowing start ................................................................................................................ 3.7.8.2
Preblowing ................................................................................................................................................. 3.7.9
Blowing .................................................................................................................................................... 3.7.10
"Pushed-up base" (option) .............................................................................................................. 3.7.10.1
Optimized airsweep (option) ........................................................................................................... 3.7.10.2
Setting the parameters of the process (option) ........................................................................................ 3.7.11
Air and water flow diagram ...................................................................................................................... 3.7.12
Pressure and temperature ....................................................................................................................... 3.7.13
Bottle check ..................................................................................................................................... 3.7.13.1
"Recipe" family ................................................................................................................................................... 3.8
Recipe selection (depending on the machine configuration) ..................................................................... 3.8.1
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.8.2
Blowing machine Recipes .......................................................................................................................... 3.8.3
List of saved recipes ......................................................................................................................... 3.8.3.1
Displaying a recipe ............................................................................................................................ 3.8.3.2
"Combi one system" Recipes (depending on the machine configuration) ................................................. 3.8.4
"Add a recipe" .................................................................................................................................. 3.8.4.1
"Recipe details" ............................................................................................................................... 3.8.4.2
"Reports" family .................................................................................................................................................. 3.9
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 3.9.1
Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.9.2
Shift reports ................................................................................................................................................ 3.9.3
Report configuration ................................................................................................................................... 3.9.4
Consult archives ........................................................................................................................................ 3.9.5
Archived report .................................................................................................................................. 3.9.5.1
Fault summary ........................................................................................................................................... 3.9.6
Monitoring of SIDEL works ........................................................................................................................ 3.9.7
Creation of works .............................................................................................................................. 3.9.7.1
Production data anaysis ............................................................................................................................. 3.9.8
"Alarms" family ................................................................................................................................................. 3.10
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 3.10.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3.10.2
Alarms and messages display bar ........................................................................................................... 3.10.3

Alarm messages and resulting stoppages ............................................................................................... 3.10.4
Types of alarm message ................................................................................................................. 3.10.4.1
The alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 3.10.4.2
Shutdowns ...................................................................................................................................... 3.10.4.3
Acknowledging alarms .................................................................................................................... 3.10.4.4
Active alarms ........................................................................................................................................... 3.10.5
Weekly history .......................................................................................................................................... 3.10.6
Alarm searches ........................................................................................................................................ 3.10.7
Alarm configuration .................................................................................................................................. 3.10.8
Reserve alarms ............................................................................................................................... 3.10.8.1
Scope of printing ...................................................................................................................................... 3.10.9
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................ 3.10.10
30/03/2015 III - 3/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Display of controller variables ....................................................................................................... 3.10.10.1

Alarm statistics (option) .......................................................................................................................... 3.10.11
"History" family ................................................................................................................................................. 3.11
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 3.11.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3.11.2
Simplified navigation through the histogram ............................................................................................ 3.11.3
Window movement .......................................................................................................................... 3.11.3.1
Cursor movement ............................................................................................................................ 3.11.3.2
Searching for a value ...................................................................................................................... 3.11.3.3
Chart selection ......................................................................................................................................... 3.11.4
Statistics ................................................................................................................................................... 3.11.5
"SPC" family (option) ........................................................................................................................................ 3.12
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 3.12.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3.12.2
Sub-group ................................................................................................................................................ 3.12.3
Control cards ............................................................................................................................................ 3.12.4
Chart selection ................................................................................................................................ 3.12.4.1
Principle of "SPC" calculation .......................................................................................................... 3.12.4.2
Trend curves ................................................................................................................................... 3.12.4.3
Capability ........................................................................................................................................ 3.12.4.4
Summary of the process ................................................................................................................. 3.12.4.5
Configuration of the "SPC" alarms .................................................................................................. 3.12.4.6
"Maintenance" family ........................................................................................................................................ 3.13
General presentation ............................................................................................................................... 3.13.1
What is preventive maintenance? ................................................................................................... 3.13.1.1
Preventive maintenance as applied to the SBO UniversalTM machine ........................................... 3.13.1.2
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 3.13.2
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3.13.3
Maintenance explorer .............................................................................................................................. 3.13.4
Maintenance operations ........................................................................................................................... 3.13.5
Maintenance history ........................................................................................................................ 3.13.5.1
Maintenance sub-assembly ..................................................................................................................... 3.13.6
Maintenance schedule ............................................................................................................................. 3.13.7
Parameterizable maintenance ................................................................................................................. 3.13.8
Maintenance explorer ...................................................................................................................... 3.13.8.1
Setting the maintenance operation parameters .............................................................................. 3.13.8.2
"Settings" family ................................................................................................................................................ 3.14
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 3.14.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3.14.2

Blowing test .............................................................................................................................................. 3.14.3
Testing the solenoids on the fixed section ............................................................................................... 3.14.4
Solenoid valve test in operation ............................................................................................................... 3.14.5
Oven test .................................................................................................................................................. 3.14.6
X preform neck cooling (option) ...................................................................................................... 3.14.6.1
Preform neck cooling (option) ......................................................................................................... 3.14.6.2
Preform feeder test (option) ..................................................................................................................... 3.14.7
Hygiene test (depending on the machine configuration) .......................................................................... 3.14.8
Preform decontamination test ......................................................................................................... 3.14.8.1
Oven UV lamps test ........................................................................................................................ 3.14.8.2
Surface disinfection test .................................................................................................................. 3.14.8.3
Filter steam sterilization test (depending on the machine configuration) ........................................ 3.14.8.4
Filler blower isolation test (depending on the machine configuration) ............................................ 3.14.8.5
III - 4/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Infeed rail UV lamp test (depending on the machine configuration) ............................................... 3.14.8.6
Sprayer test (depending on the machine configuration) ................................................................. 3.14.8.7
Jog rotation controls ................................................................................................................................. 3.14.9
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................ 3.14.10
Brake efficiency ...................................................................................................................................... 3.14.11
Configuring the cabinets ........................................................................................................................ 3.14.12
"Options" family ................................................................................................................................................ 3.15
Functions ................................................................................................................................................. 3.15.1
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3.15.2
Machine parameter settings ..................................................................................................................... 3.15.3
PCC parameter settings ........................................................................................................................... 3.15.4
User management ........................................................................................................................... 3.15.4.1
Units of measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3.15.4.2
Changing the language ................................................................................................................... 3.15.4.3
Selecting the keyboard .................................................................................................................... 3.15.4.4
Updating the PCC ........................................................................................................................... 3.15.4.5
Screensaver .................................................................................................................................... 3.15.4.6
System information ......................................................................................................................... 3.15.4.7
Printers ............................................................................................................................................ 3.15.4.8
Deleting archives ............................................................................................................................. 3.15.4.9
Filler (option) ............................................................................................................................................ 3.15.5
Filler blower isolation ....................................................................................................................... 3.15.5.1
Option selection ....................................................................................................................................... 3.15.6
Blowing machine option selection ................................................................................................... 3.15.6.1
Preform distributor option selection ................................................................................................. 3.15.6.2
Customizing production ........................................................................................................................... 3.15.7
Sampling ......................................................................................................................................... 3.15.7.1
Customizing the wheel .................................................................................................................... 3.15.7.2
Loading on X molds ........................................................................................................................ 3.15.7.3
Auxiliary equipment ......................................................................................................................... 3.15.7.4
Customizing the oven ...................................................................................................................... 3.15.7.5
Bottle check ..................................................................................................................................... 3.15.7.6
Bottle ejection .................................................................................................................................. 3.15.7.7
Preform check ................................................................................................................................. 3.15.7.8
Adjusting machine synchronization ................................................................................................. 3.15.7.9
Automatic lubrication (depending on the machine configuration) ................................................. 3.15.7.10
Option summary ....................................................................................................................................... 3.15.8
SETTING UP THE MACHINE FOR PRODUCTION 4

Presentation ....................................................................................................................................................... 4.1

General methodology ......................................................................................................................................... 4.2
Machine administration ....................................................................................................................................... 4.3
Production process set-up tools ......................................................................................................................... 4.4
Tools for refining the blowing machine set-up ........................................................................................... 4.4.1
Tools for refining the preform feeder set-up ............................................................................................... 4.4.2
Preliminary checks and adjustments .................................................................................................................. 4.5
P, I, D regulation parameters (depending on the machine configuration) .......................................................... 4.6
Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 4.6.1
Principles ................................................................................................................................................... 4.6.2
Examples of regulation graphs .................................................................................................................. 4.6.3
Heating profile .................................................................................................................................................... 4.7
Principles of oven regulation ...................................................................................................................... 4.7.1
30/03/2015 III - 5/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Principles of starting/stopping oven ........................................................................................................... 4.7.2

Alternating energy-saving standby ............................................................................................................. 4.7.3
Alternating energy-saving standby deactivated ................................................................................ 4.7.3.1
Activated alternating energy-saving standby .................................................................................... 4.7.3.2
Production stop of less than 5 minutes (T2) ...................................................................................... 4.7.3.3
Production stop of more than 5 minutes (T3) .................................................................................... 4.7.3.4
Heating setpoints ....................................................................................................................................... 4.7.4
Lamp and oven zone commands ............................................................................................................... 4.7.5
Blowing profile .................................................................................................................................................... 4.8
Principles of PET bi-orientation .................................................................................................................. 4.8.1
Output rate setpoint ................................................................................................................................... 4.8.2
Preblowing configuration ............................................................................................................................ 4.8.3
Blowing configuration ................................................................................................................................. 4.8.4
Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints ................................................................................................. 4.9
Production set-up trials (in "Manual" mode) ..................................................................................................... 4.10
Saving a new production set-up ....................................................................................................................... 4.11
Bottle faults: causes and remedies ................................................................................................................... 4.12
ASSISTANCE WITH STARTING THE MACHINE AND COMMENCING PRODUCTION 5

General information ............................................................................................................................................ 5.1
Production flow chart .......................................................................................................................................... 5.2
Decontamination of the blowing machine ........................................................................................................... 5.3
Operator and personnel hygiene ........................................................................................................................ 5.4
General information ................................................................................................................................... 5.4.1
Procedure and training ...................................................................................................................... 5.4.1.1
Health ................................................................................................................................................ 5.4.1.2
Clothing ............................................................................................................................................. 5.4.1.3
Behaviour .......................................................................................................................................... 5.4.1.4
Access to production areas ............................................................................................................... 5.4.1.5
Working on the machine ............................................................................................................................ 5.4.2
Operations prior to starting production ............................................................................................................... 5.5
End of production ............................................................................................................................................... 5.6
III - 6/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / General safety precautions Part III
1 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.1 Safety pictograms
Potential risks are indicated by labels posted around the machine:
m Warnings
Warning. Always read carefully Danger - high pressure
Danger - risk of injury Danger - laser beam
Danger - risk of being crushed Danger - hot surface
Danger - electrical hazard Danger - UV-C rays
Danger - corrosive material Danger magnetic field
Danger - risk of falls
m Obligations
Breathing protection is obligatory Ear protection obligatory
Individual protection from falls obligatory Body protection obligatory
Hand protection obligatory Eye protection is obligatory
Face protection obligatory Head protection obligatory

Foot protection obligatory
30/03/2015 III - 1 - 1/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part III User Manual / General safety precautions
m Prohibited
Walking prohibited here Do not touch
Prohibited for people fitted with active

Do not remove safety devices
medical implants
Do not clean, lubricate, repair or adjust Access probitied for non-authorized

moving parts personnel
1.2 Safety during production

m Safety relating to production
The machine doors are fitted with electrical safety devices. Opening any of these doors will stop the machine
immediately and vent the air systems. The doors prevent access to moving parts. Never by-pass or disable a
door electrical safety device in order to run the machine with an open door.
Do not modify parts of the machine in order to fit other devices without prior authorization from SIDEL. SIDEL
will accept no responsibility for consequences relating non-authorized modifications.
Never remove safety devices installed on the machine.
Never attempt to run the machine in automatic mode whilst the fixed and/or mobile protections have been
removed.
Never attempt contact with moving parts, either manually or using tools.
Do not manually oil or grease moving parts.
Never cross the conveyor belts either above or below; use only specially designed crossing-points (platforms,
bridges, gantries, steps).
It is strictly prohibited to go on to and/or stay on the platforms located above the oven and on the preform
feeder gangway when the machine is in operation so as not to be exposed to radiation from the infrared
lamps.
All personnel working on the machine must observe the safety regulations in force in their establishment.
Before starting the machine:

- remove all items left in sensitive areas of the machine (faulty preform and bottle ejection points),
- ensure that no one is working inside the machine.
If there is an oil leak, place an absorbant cloth on the soiled and slippery floor. When the oil has been
absorbed, remove the absorbant cloth. Clean the floor using a degreasing agent .
The key locked panels prevent access to moving parts. Only maintenance agents are authorized to open
these panels and they must take all precautions deemed necessary to avoid accidents.
The machine is not designed to operate with Fluorine .
m Safety relating to maintenance
Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it.
III - 1 - 2/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Do not intervene on the switches, valves or photo-sensors without authorization.
Do not use high pressure hoses to wash the machine.
Do not use acetone or derivatives.
Never attempt any electrical welding on the machine (equipment sensitive to high voltages and electrical
arcs).
Following machine adjustments carried out with reduced safety, make sure the machine’s protective devices
are re-established as soon as possible.
For interventions involving 2 technicians and using the manual rotation system, the 2 technicians must
communicate clearly with each other to coordinate their actions during any procedures.
Use only cleaning products which conform to health and safety standards and which are recommended by
SIDEL in the User manual.
The appropriate protective clothing (gloves, mask...) for the operation in hand must be stored as closely as
possible to the place where it will be used.
Except for specific indications related to a procedure, before attempting any operations on the machine, make
sure that:
- the power supply has been shut off,
- the high and low pressure air lines have been purged and shut off,
- the water supply has been shut off,
- The PCC application is not in setting mode,
- the mold support units are cold.
m Safety relating to options
When there is a steam sterilization module physically present, never run the machine without having first
connected up the drain lines to the specific system.
Wear thermal protection gloves as well as body protection when carrying out any work on the steam
sterilization module.
If the "UV infeed rail" is fitted, apply the specific UV light safety instructions.
If the "Ionization of the preforms and / or the bottles" option is present on the machine, all wearers of
pacemakers must take the required steps to ensure their personal safety. The presence of high voltage
presents a serious risk for personal safety.
If the decontamination module option is fitted, you must be familiar with the specific recommendations relating
to the use of hydrogen peroxide, please refer to chapter "Safety recommendations related to the use of
hydrogen peroxide (Decontamination option)", in the Presentation Manual.
1.3 Safety recommendations related to the use of hydrogen peroxide (Decontamination

option)
1.3.1 Product reference(s)
The use of the following product is imposed by Sidel:
- Aseptic Grade INTEROX® AG-Spray-25S supplied by SOLVAY.
30/03/2015 III - 1 - 3/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Operation / Target Product reference(s)

Field of application Chemicals Specifications Manufacturer
concentration
Sterilization of hydrogen Vapour phase INTEROX® AG-
H2O2 SOLVAY
preforms peroxide 25% 25% Spray-25S
1.3.2 Storage conditions
Store hydrogen peroxide as follows:

- an airy, well-ventilated room, away from any source of heat,
- in aluminium (purity greater than 95 %) or stainless steel containers fitted with safety valves,
- in PEHD (HDPE - High Density Polyethylene) containers.
Ensure that hydrogen peroxide is kept away from sunlight at a temperature of less than 60 °C.
Direct light will cause the photo-chemical decomposition hydrogen peroxide.
High temperatures cause the decomposition of the product with a transformation into water and oxygen and
raising the temperature further. The raise in temperature will cause a rise in pressure with a risk of explosion
and fire. Once started, the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide accelerates under the effect of the
temperature. Hydrogen peroxide decomposes rapidly and may cause boiling and splashing.
Never use containers designed for, or already used for, other products for the storage and transport of
hydrogen peroxide.
1.3.3 Safety during production
Always wear a face mask:

- when handling hydrogen peroxide,
- when working with the decontamination module.
Inhaling hydrogen peroxide may cause:

- irritations to the nose and mouth,
- coughing,
- sore throat,
- nosebleeds.
prolonged or repeated exposure to hydrogen peroxide may cause chronic bronchitis.

Always wear PVC or latex gloves when handling hydrogen peroxide.
Hydrogen peroxide may burn the skin.
Never allow spilled hydrogen peroxide to evaporate. Immediately dilute spilled hydrogen peroxide with water.
Dilute hydrogen peroxide to 0,1 % before flushing down the drain.
III - 1 - 4/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Avoid contact between hydrogen peroxide and:

- Iron.
- Steel.
- Copper.
- Brass.
- Nickel.
- Chrome.
Never allow hydrogen peroxide to come into contact with the materials below (risk of explosion or
spontaneous combustion):
- Ethanol.
- Organic materials.
- Alcohol.
- Acetone.
Use all available methods (rinsing, diluting, water tanks etc;) to clear out waste (cloths, paper towels etc.)
which have become impregnated with hydrogen peroxide. Never dry clothes which have become impregnated
with hydrogen peroxide. Wash the clothes before drying them. Clothes and cloths impreganted with hydrogen
peroxide can spontaneously ignite.
m For the tanks used for filling the machine treatment circuit
Rinse the tank using distilled water every time before filling.
Change the hydrogen peroxide tank 1 time each year.
Write the date of the next change on the hydrogen peroxide tank.
1.3.4 Recommendations in the case of accidents
If there is an accident, make use of emergency medical equipment and treat the eyes first.
In all cases consult a medical doctor.
m For the eyes

· Rinse the eyes with clean water for 15 min keeping them wide open.
· See an opthalmologist urgently to prevent serious or permanent injury.
m For the skin
· Wash the skin with clean water.

m If swallowed
Never force a person who has swallowed hydrogen peroxide to vomit.
· Rinse the mouth and drink large quantities of cold water.

1.4 Safety related to the use of the manual storage unit (option)
m Safety related to handling and blocking
SIDEL draws your attention to the residual risks when handling the storage unit:
- risk when transporting significant loads,
- risk of load falling.
30/03/2015 III - 1 - 5/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
To not upset the stability of the storage unit, it must be maneuvered, when both empty and loaded, slowly and
smoothly.
Never handle the storage unit when loaded on ramps of more than 1,5 %.
It may sometimes be necessary to move the storage unit along slight slopes. In this case the storage unit
must be empty and the slope must not exceed 3,5 %.
Never use the storage unit for a use other than that specified by SIDEL.
Never handle the storage unit with a motor vehicle.
Never turn the tow bar at a right-angle to stop the storage unit.
Never use the storage unit to transport personnel.
Remove the tow bar to block the storage unit.
m Safety relating to loading/unloading
Before rotating the carrousel, check there is no-one in the vicinity.
Never use the storage unit in applications where there is a risk of exceeding the nominal capacity. (Refer to
indication on storage unit identification plate) .
m Safety relating to maintenance
Do not use high pressure hoses to wash the machine.
Do not use acetone or derivatives.
Use only cleaning products which conform to health and safety standards and which are recommended by
SIDEL in the User manual.
III - 1 - 6/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Counter-indications Part III
2 COUNTER-INDICATIONS
2.1 Improper use
"Improper use" results in damage to the machine or disruptions to production and is prohibited.
Examples of improper use:
- Running the machine at output rates other than those recommended by SIDEL.
- Use of a production process that has not been validated by performance checks on manufactured items.
- Supplying the machines with items in poor condition or having characteristics other than those defined in the
specifications.
- Incorrect use of the electrical controls (especially continual hammering on the control keys and buttons).
- Supplying the machines with power and utilities having characteristics other than those recommended by
SIDEL.
- Non-respect of regulations regarding the use of chemical products.
- Cleaning using inappropriate equipment (high-pressure hoses, water jets, etc.).
- Cleaning the machine with products which have not been recommended.
- Obstructing the movement of the items through the machine.
2.2 Prohibited use
Never attempt to run the machine using set-ups which are contrary to the general safety precautions.
For further information, please refer to chapter "General safety precautions".
Examples of prohibited use:

- Operation of the machine by unqualified personnel.
- Maintenance on the machine carried out by unqualified personnel.
- Non-respect of SIDEL recommendations and information when running the machine.
- Disconnecting or by-passing safety systems.
- Blocking or suspending the means of communication, inspection or power transfer.
- Introducing objects into the machine openings or safety systems.
- Running the machine without cover panels of safety devices.
- Obstructing access and spaces around the machine, especially the doors.
- Non-respect of maintenance precautions SIDEL.
- Non-respect of cleaning precautions.
- Non-respect of SIDEL recommendations when carrying out maintenance.
- Use of products other than those specified in the machine manuals.
- Use of parts or components which are not authorized by SIDEL.
SIDEL may not be held responsible for the consequences of any incident or accident resulting from
negligence or non-respect of safety recommendations and procedures as defined in the instruction manual.
The owner or user automatically assumes responsibility for risks to operating safety in all cases where the
equipment has been subjected to improper modifications or maintenance.
2.3 Hygiene
For further information, please refer to chapter "Hygiene", in the Presentation Manual.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Operator and personnel hygiene" (depending on the machine
configuration).
30/03/2015 III - 2 - 1/2

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part III User Manual / Counter-indications
III - 2 - 2/2 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Presentation of the PCC application Part III
3 PRESENTATION OF THE PCC APPLICATION

3.1 General Information
BCU-006, BCU-015, BCU-024
3.1.1 Definition of PCC application technical terms
A C 1
D E
1-010373-01-02.svg
- Screen page (A): full PCC screen image.
- Family: screen page specific to a function allowing access to settings and windows. The keys (B) provide access
to the various families.
- Window (C): overlay providing access to new functions by pressing a key or a symbol.
- Press key (1) to close the window.

- To move a window, press on the bar at the top of the window and drag it across the screen.
Do not hide the (E) window when the machine is in production.
- Tool-tip (D): help bubble which appears when the cursor passes over a key.
3.1.2 Composition of screen pages
The PCC application is structured around groups of functions, or families:
- "Main page" family,
- "Feeder" family (option),
- The "Hygiene" family (depending on the machine configuration),
- "Oven" family,
- "Wheel" family,
- "Recipes" family,
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 1/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part III User Manual / Presentation of the PCC application
- "Report" family,
- "Alarms" family,
- "History" family,
- "SPC" family (option),
- "Maintenance" family,
- "Settings" family,
- "Options" family.
The screen is divided into 3 sections:
- a navigation and information bar (A) (appears on all screens),
- a central section (B) specific to each family,
- a lower bar (C) for machine operation (appears on all screen pages).
1-010773-01-02.svg
3.1.2.1 Navigation and information bar

The bars around the main screen allow the user to:
- navigate around the various PCC application families,
- display various items of information, notably regarding the machine and the user.
III - 3 - 2/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 A D B C F E G H I J K
2 18
3
19
4
14 15 16 17
5
10
11
12
13
1-010384-01-02.svg
Immediate machine output rate (in bottles per

A PCC application version G
hour)
Temperatures of the preforms at the oven
B Day date H
outfeed
C Current time I User name
D Machine type and number J User access level
E Family title K Name of current recipe
F Intensity of current absorbed by the motor
1 "Main page" family access key 11 "Maintenance" family access key

2 "Feeder" family access key (option) 12 "Settings" family access key
"Hygiene" family access key (depending on the
3 13 "Options" family access key
machine configuration)
4 "Oven" family access key 14 User name entry (name and password)
5 "Wheel" family access key 15 "Documentation" window access key
6 "Recipes" family access key 16 "Operator monitoring" window access key
"Active alarms" window access key
7 "Report" family access key 17

Indicates the presence of a fault to the operator
8 "Alarms" family access key 18 Shutdown and restart the PCC application
Status of comunication between the PCC and
9 "History" family access key 19
the plc
10 "SPC" family access key (option)
m User name entry (name and password)
m Documentation (access according to configuration)

The Documentation window is only accessible from the "Main Page" family
The Documentation window enables access to the various technical manuals
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 3/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3 1
1-011719-01-02.svg
1 "Procedures catalogue" access key 2 "User manual" access key

3 "Presentation manual" access key
Depending upon its location within the PCC application, the window will open at the relevant manual and chapter
3
A
4
10
11
1-011720-01-02.svg
A Documentation display window

1 Previous action 2 Next action
3 Go to first page 4 Go to next page
5 Go to previous page 6 Go to last page
7 Increase zoom 8 Decrease zoom
9 Display single page 10 Scroll pages continuously
11 Show two columns
For further information on the installation and updates to the documentation, see procedure "BCU-037".
3.1.2.2 Central section

On the central section of the screen, according to the family selected, you can:
- open and close configuration or consultation windows,
- consult machine operating parameters,
- document data entry fields,
- display graphics,
- display readings.
The various central sections of the applciation "PCC" are specific to the family selected.
III - 3 - 4/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
For further information on the central sections of the "PCC" application, please refer to chapter "Navigation
and information bar".
Depending on the machine configuration, the central part of a family and/or the windows associated with it
may differ.
For further information on the options present on the machine, please refer to chapter ""Options" family".
3.1.2.3 Lower bar

Appearing on all of the screen pages, the lower bar is used to operate the machine.
The machine operating bar changes its configuration according to the mode selected (automatic or manual) and
according to the status of the machine (static or in operation).
When the keys change status they also change color.
The keys are gray when they are not available.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-006707-01-xx.svg
1 Start/stop the machine 6 Start/stop preform ejection

2 Start/stop the heating 7 Start/stop bottle ejection
3 Start/stop stretching, preblowing and blowing 8 Turn on/off the machine lighting
Change the operating mode: Manual or
4 Start/stop the preform elevator 9
Automatic
Acknowledge and cancel the alarms currently on
5 Start/stop preform feeding 10
the display
3.1.3 "Automatic" and "Manual" modes

The PCC application has 2 operating modes:
- "Automatic" mode,
- "Manual" mode.
3.1.3.1 "Automatic" mode
"Automatic" mode is reserved for starting machine production. Only those keys required for "automatic" production
are available.
The operator starts the machine by pressing the "F1" key (1) and all operations required for production are
performed automatically.
m Lower bar in "Automatic" mode, and keys "F1" to "F8" are out
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-006705-01-xx.svg
1 Start machine rotation

6 Turn on machine lighting
7 Switch to "Manual" mode
8 Acknowledge the alarms present on the alarm and message display bar
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 5/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The keys (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) can be activated when the machine is operating.
m Lower bar in "Automatic" mode, machine operating and keys "F1" to "F8" lit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-006706-01-xx.svg
1 Stop machine operation

2 Start/restart production
3 Start/restart preform feeding onto the preform infeed wheel
4 Start/restart the ejection of preforms from the preform transfer wheel
5 Start/restart the ejection of bottles from the bottle transfer wheel
6 Turn off the machine lighting
7 Switch to "Manual" mode
3.1.3.2 "Manual" mode

"Manual" mode (reserved for technicians and supervisors) is designed to assist in setting up production and
carrying out trials. Only those keys required for setting up production are accessible.
m Lower bar in "Manual" mode, machine stopped and keys "F1" to "F8" out
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-006704-01-xx.svg
1 Start machine rotation

2 Start oven heating
3 Stretch/preblow/blow preforms present in the molds
4 Activate the preform elevator
5 Load preforms onto the preform infeed wheel
6 Eject preforms which have been fed into the machine
7 Eject bottles before they exit on the outfeed conveyor
8 Turn on machine lighting

9 Switch to "Automatic" mode
m Lower bar in "Manual" mode, machine operating and keys "F1" to "F8" lit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-006707-01-xx.svg
III - 3 - 6/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 Stop machine operation

2 Stop oven heating
3 Prevent stretching/preblowing/blowing of preforms present in the molds
4 Stop the preform elevator
5 Start/restart preform feeding onto the preform infeed wheel
6 Start/restart the ejection of preforms from the preform transfer wheel
7 Start/restart the ejection of bottles from the bottle transfer wheel
8 Turn off the machine lighting
9 Switch to "Automatic" mode
3.1.4 Operating levels

3.1.4.1 Operating levels defined
Several operating profiles have been defined in the use of the PCC.
The access levels below have been defined by SIDEL. Administrator-level users can modify the functions
available at any access level.
m Operator level
The operator can run production in "Automatic" or "Manual" mode.
The operator can:
- access all PCC application families,
- consult and print a report,
- consult the alarm list and weekly history,
- consult machine operating parameters,
- consult the preventive maintenance action history.
m Chief operator level
Level available to administrator and adjustable according to requirements.
m Technician level
The technician may:
- access all operator functions,
- define new production set-ups,
- set up and adjust the machine for production.
m Chief technician level
Level available to administrator and adjustable according to requirements.
m Supervisor level
The supervisor can:

- access all technician level functions,
- set up the application PCC according to the physical configuration of the machine.
- configurate the alarms, the alerts and the PCC.
m Administrator level
The administrator can access all supervisor level functions. The administrator controls all user accounts and
configurates access to the various machine functions.
3.1.4.2 Entering a user name
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 7/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.1.5 PCC application tree structure

m The "Operator Monitoring" family
1-010821-01-xx.svg
A "Starting date of implemented actions" B "End date of implemented actions"
m "Main page" family
1-010822-01-xx.svg
A "Output rate setpoint" B "Reset bottle counter"
III - 3 - 8/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Feeder" family (option)
1-010823-01-xx.svg
A "Hopper control" B "Cell-sensor parameters"

C "Clearing the feeder" D "Preforms"
E "Electric tipper" * F "Auto-adaptation"
* depending on the machine configuration
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 9/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m The "Hygiene" family (depending on the machine configuration)
A
B
E E1
F
F1
1-016016-01-xx.svg
"Steam generator regulation"

A "Flow setpoint" B "Fixed diffuser regulation"
"Mobile diffuser regulation"
C "Vaporization nozzles" D "Observations"
E "Aeraulics" E1 "Extraction hood"
F "Surface disinfection" G "Filter steam sterilization"

F1 "Type of disinfection cycle"
III - 3 - 10/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Oven" family
B
B1
C D1
D
D2
D3
D4
1-010825-01-xx.svg
A "Lamp commands" B "Mechanical oven configuration"

"General view of mechancial oven
B1 C "Observations"
configuration"
D "Preform decontamination" * D1 "Flow setpoint"
"Steam generator regulation"
D2 "Fixed diffuser regulation" D3 "Vaporization nozzles"

"Mobile diffuser regulation"
D4 "Observations" E "Setting the oven parameters" *
"Extraction hood" *
F "Heat recovery unit" *
"Preform neck cooling" *
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 11/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-010826-02-xx.svg
G "X preform neck cooling" * H "Checking the preforms"

"Temperature of the preform body" *
I "Preform temperature base" * J "Thermal imaging of the preform" *
"Preform neck temperature" *
III - 3 - 12/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Wheel" family
B B1
F1
E
F2
1-011746-01-xx.svg
A "Lamp commands" B "Blowing charts"

B1 "Chart selection" C "Stretching"
D "Preforms and blown items" * E "Changing the molds"
F "Regulation process" * F1 "Regulation process" (Summary)

F2 "Offsets of preblowing start"
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 13/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
G1
G2
H
H1
H2
J1
J J2
1-010828-02-xx.svg
G "Preblowing" G1 "Offsets of preblowing start"

G2 "Acquiring points "0" and "10" " H "Blowing"
H1 "Optimized airsweep" * H2 "Pushed-up bases"
I "Setting the parameters of the process" * J "Pressure and temperature"
J1 "Bottle check" J2 "Mold No. X" (Validation)
III - 3 - 14/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Recipe" family
B1
B2
A
C1
C2
1-010829-02-xx.svg
A Recipe selection B Recipes in blowing machine only configuration

B1 "Displaying a recipe" B2 "List of saved recipes"
C Recipes in Combi configuration C1 "Add a recipe"
C2 "Recipe details "
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 15/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Reports" family
B B1
C1
C
C1.1
C1.2
E1
1-010830-01-xx.svg
A "Observations" B "Report configuration" (Display)

"Report list"
B1 "Report configuration" (Print and back up) C "List of partials"
"Production report"
"Archived report"
C1 "Partial" C1.1 "Alarm history" (depending on the type of report)

"Production report"
C1.2 "Histories" (depending on the type of report) D "Fault summary"
E "Monitoring of SIDEL works" E1 "Modification of an action"
F "Production data anaysis"
III - 3 - 16/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Alarms" family
B
C1
C C2
D1
E
E1
1-014305-01-xx.svg
A "Active alarms" B "Weekly history"

C "Alarm searches" C1 "Alarm list"
C2 "Alarm search result" D "Alarm configuration"
D1 "Reserve alarms " E "Diagnostics"

E1 "Display of controller variables" F "Alarm statistics"
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 17/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "History" family
1-010832-01-xx.svg
A "Chart selection" B "Statistics"
III - 3 - 18/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "SPC" family (depending on the machine configuration)
1-010833-01-xx.svg
A "Chart selection" B "Capability"

C "Trends" D "Summary of the process"
E "Configuration of the "SPC" alarms "
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 19/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Maintenance" family
A A1
A1.1
B
A1.2
C C1
1-014359-01-xx.svg
A "Explorer" A1.2 "Maintenance operations"

A1 "Maintenance operations" B "Maintenance schedule"
A1.1 "Maintenance history" C "Explorer"
A1.2 "Sub-assembly" C1 "Parameterizable maintenance"
III - 3 - 20/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Settings" family
D1
D
D2
1-016017-01-xx.svg
A "Blowing test" B "Test of fixed solenoid valves"

C "Solenoid valve test in operation" D "Oven test"
D1 "X preform neck cooling" * D2 "Preform neck cooling" *
E "Preform feeder test" *
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 21/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
N1
O
1-016018-01-xx.svg
F "Surface disinfection test" * G "Filter steam sterilization test" *

H "Preform decontamination test" * I "Filler blower isolation test" *
J "Oven UV lamps test" * K "Sprayer test" *
L "Infeed rail UV lamp test" * M "Jog rotation controls"
N "Diagnostics" N1 "Display of controller variables"

O "Brake efficiency" P "Configuring the cabinets"
III - 3 - 22/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Options" family
A B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C C1
1-016019-01-xx.svg
A "Machine parameter settings" B "Setting the PCC parameters"

B1 "User management" B2 "Units of measurement"
B3 "Changing the language" B4 "Selecting the keyboard"
B5 "Screensaver" B6 "System information"
B7 "Printers" C "Filler" *
C1 "Filler blower isolation" * D "Option selection"
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 23/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
E1
E2
E3 E4
E
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
F
E10
1-014172-01-xx.svg
E "Customizing production" E1 "Sampling"

E2 "Customizing the wheel" E3 "Loading on X molds"
E4 "Auxiliary equipment" E5 "Customizing the oven"
E6 "Bottle check" E7 "Bottle ejection"
E8 "Checking the preforms" E9 "Adjusting machine synchronization"

E10 "Automatic lubrication" * F "Option summary"
III - 3 - 24/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.2 The "Operator Monitoring" family

3.2.1 Functions
The "Operator Monitoring" family allows the user to display all the modifications carried out in the application in
accordance with 3 search criteria:
- the type of action carried out,
- the user,
- the period of time.
3.2.2 Description
The search function is available to users enjoying technician level or above when the machine is shut down.
B 2 1 9 C 3 4
10
11
6
D
5
8
7
15
14
12
E
13
F G
1-007531-01-02.svg
A Window for selecting search criteria 5 Button for selecting the time period
B List of actions carried out by users 6 Key in the starting date of actions carried out
List of identified users who have carried out
C 7 Key in the end date of actions carried out
modifications
Display the list of actions carried out during the
D Window for selecting the time period 8
previous week
Display the list of actions carried out during the
E Search results window 9
previous month
Display of states or previous values for each Button for validating the search for the selected
F 10
action actions
Button for validating the search for the selected
G Display of states or next values of each action 11
actions, in addition to the previous search
1 Button for refreshing the list of actions carried out 12 Button for selecting the destination reader
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 25/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
2 Button for selecting all the actions on the list (B) 13 Print search result
3 Button for refreshing the user list 14 Sort search results
4 Button for selecting the users on the list (C) 15 Total number of results for the search
3.2.3 Research criteria
Refresh the list of actions (B) and the user list (C) using the buttons (1) and (3), in order to update the latest
modifications.
· To carry out a search, define the 3 search criteria:
- action: choose 1 to 8 actions in the list (B), or all of these using the button (2),
- user: choose from 1 to 8 users in the list (C), or all of these using the button (4),
- time: search on the previous week (8), the previous month (9) or a time period (5).
The start and end dates of the time periods are defined using the buttons (6) and (7).
If the result of the research shows:
- More than 4000 actions, confirmation for this search is requested.
- More than 8000 actions, the search is cancelled and the criteria must be specified.
3.2.4 Research results
· Press on one of the descriptions (14) to sort (ascending / descending) the result by:
- Date and time of the action.
- User.
- Type of action (alphabetical).
The total number of search results is indicated in (15)
For each action, the previous value or state (F) and the value or state after modification (G) are specified
III - 3 - 26/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.3 "Main page" family
BPU-004
A 1
1-010773-02-02.svg
3.3.1 Functions
The "Main page" family starts machine production and checks operating parameters.
This is the default family at which the user should always be positioned.
In this family you can perform the following functions:
- display messages and alarms,
- enter production output rates,
- reset the finished bottle counter,
- visualize the level of electrical power consumed in real time,
- visualize the temperatures and pressures in real time,
- visualize the real production output rate.
3.3.2 Description
A Alarms and messages display bar

B Output rate setpoint
C Bottle counter
Temperature and pressure parameters
D
Electrical power consumed
E Immediate production rate
1 Output rate setting key
2 Open the "Bottle counter reset" window
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 27/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.3.3 Alarms and messages display bar
3.3.4 Output rate setpoint
3.3.5 Resetting the bottle counter to zero
5 6
1-006708-01-02.svg
5 Bottle counter reset key

6 Cancel bottle counter reset to zero
3.3.6 Temperature and pressure parameters

On the "Main page" the user can check the following temperature and pressure parameters
"Electrical power consumed" Real time measurement of electrical power consumed by the machine
"Preform temperature instruction" Preform temperature setpoint at oven outfeed
"Output %" General heating percentage applied in the oven
Oven temperature setpoint at which preforms will commence feeding into the
"Feeding temperature"
oven
Temperature of the oven as measured by a thermocoupling at the first
"Oven temperature"
module in the distribution oven
External temperature measured by a sensor at the rear module of the oven
"External temperature"
frame
"Bottle pressure" Bottle blowing pressure measurement
Temperature of the preforms as measured by an infrared sensor at the oven
"Preform temperature"
outfeed and used for oven heating regulation
Temperature of the preform necks as measured by an infrared sensor at the
"Preform neck temperature"
oven outfeed (value displayed if option has been selected)
Temperature of the preform bases as measured by an infrared sensor at the
"Preform base temperature"
oven outfeed (value displayed if option has been selected)
Temperature of the bottles as measured by an infrared sensor at the blow

"Bottle temperature"
wheel outfeed (value displayed if option has been selected)
III - 3 - 28/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.4 "Feeder" family (option)
BCU-017, BCU-034
BPU-003, BPU-014, BPU-015, BPU-017
3.4.1 Functions
The "Feeder" family allows you to adjust and display the parameters for the preform feeder for any given production
run.
Depending on your machine configuration, the displays of this family may differ but the functions remain
identical.
3.4.2 Description
3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8
A 18
19
20
21
9
22
C
15
B 23
10 24
11 16
12 26
13 25
14 17
1-008464-14-02.svg
Window for displaying and parameterizing instructions for the hopper belt speed*
A
Window for displaying and parameterizing speed instructions for the remote hopper belt and elevator column*
Window for displaying and parameterizing instructions for the main elevator column*
B
Window for displaying and setting the parameters of the instructions for the elevator column of the small hopper*
C Window for displaying and setting the parameters of the instructions for the unscrambler rollers
1 Remote hopper elevator column current speed display*
2 Open the data entry window for the speed of the remote elevator column belt*
Hopper belt current speed display*
3
Current speed of the remote hopper belt*
Button for accessing the window for keying in the speed instruction for the hopper conveyor belt*
4
Open the data entry window for the remote hopper belt speed instruction*
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 29/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
5 Display of the number of preforms missing in the rail

6 Display of the temperature of the preforms in the rail*
7 Button for accessing the counter reset window concerning the ejection of fallen preforms*
8 Open the zero reset window for the ejection counter for preforms which are too long*
9 Display of the state of the cells
10 "Auto-adaptation" access key
Button for accessing the window for keying in the instruction for reducing the speed of the main elevator column
upon detection of preforms in "D2"*
11
Button for accessing the window for keying in instructions for the reduction of the speed of the elevator column of
the small hopper upon detection of preforms in "D2"*
12
Button for accessing the window for keying in the instruction for increasing the speed of the main elevator column
when preforms missing in the rail*
13
Button for accessing the window for keying in instructions for the increase of the speed of the elevator column of
the small hopper when preforms are lacking in the rail*
Displays the current speed of the main elevator column*
14
Display of the current speed of the elevator column of the small hopper*
15 Access the speed setting input window of the orienting rollers
Button for accessing the window for keying in instructions for the reduction of the speed of the unscrambler
16
rollers upon detection of preforms in "D3"
17 Display the current speed of the orienting rollers
18 "Hopper control" access key*
19 "Cell-sensor" access key
20 "Clear feeder" access key
21 Button for accessing the Preform window
22 "Electric tipper" window access key*
23 Button for selecting production with or without preform recycling*
24 Operating mode selection key (Manual or Automatic)
Select low and high speeds for the remote hopper*
25
Button for selecting the low and high speeds of the main hopper*
26 Button for selecting the low and high speed modes of the small hopper*
3.4.3 Preform feeder settings

The setpoints enable the preform feeder to be configured for any given production format.
3.4.4 Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder

The auto-adapt function changes the speed of the preform feeder according to the production rate of the blowing
machine. The auto-adapt function can be started when creating a new production set up, modifying the the output
rate of the blowing machine or at any time during production. The auto-adaptation (A) calculation is stored in the
PLC memory so that production can be controlled automatically. Parameters (2 ; A) will be saved in the production
recipe.
III - 3 - 30/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-007549-01-02.svg
A Instantaneous auto-adaptation calculation

1 "Auto-adaptation" start key
2 Elevator motor rotation setpoint at the start of auto-adaptation.
Manual mode can assist in setting the elevator motor (2) rotation setpoint at the start of auto-adaptation. This
setpoint instruction, reduced by 5 %, can be entered as the setpoint for the start of the auto-adaptation
calculation (2).
During the auto-adapt calculation, the key (1) may assume one of 2 states:
- flashing orange, when the calculation is in progress,
- fixed orange, when the calculation has been completed.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Manual mode".
The real motor rotation value (A) is displayed during the auto-adapt phase.
3.4.5 Manual mode

If there is a fault at the "D5" count sensor the automatic preform feeder regulation system will cease to
function, please refer to chapter "Orienting roller assembly".
"Manual mode" is a downgraded operating mode for the preform feeder which allows production to continue when
there is a fault at the "D5" count sensor. Manual mode is activated or deactivated using the button (1).
The "Manual" mode, can assist in defining the motor rotation setpoint for the elevator column at the start of
auto-adaptation. This setpoint instruction, reduced by 5 %, can be entered as the setpoint for the start of the
auto-adaptation calculation .
The increase percentages (2 ; 3) and reduce percentages (4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7) regulate the speed setpoints for the
unscrambler rollers (A) and the elevator column (B) according to the number of preforms passing in front of the
sensors "D4 ; D3 ; D2".
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 31/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
11
10
1
9
5
7
6 4
3 2
B A
1-008848-09-02.svg
A Display the current speed of the orienting rollers

Displays the current speed of the main elevator column*
B
Display of the current speed of the elevator column of the small hopper*
Button for accessing the window for keying in instructions for the increase in the speed of the unscrambler rollers
2
upon the non-detection of preforms in "D4"
Button for accessing the window for keying in the instruction for increasing the speed of the main elevator column
upon non-detection of preforms in "D4"*
3
Button for accessing the window for keying in instructions for the speed of the elveator column of the small
hopper upon the non-detection of preforms in "D4"*
4
rollers upon detection of preforms in "D3"
5
rollers upon detection of preforms in "D2"*
6
7
8 Access the speed setting input window of the orienting rollers
Open the data entry window for the small hopper elevator run speed instruction*
9
Open the data entry window for the main elevator column run speed instruction*
Button for accessing the window for keying in the speed instruction for the hopper conveyor belt*
10
Open the data entry window for the remote hopper belt speed instruction*
11 Button for accessing the window for keying in instructions for the speed of the belt of the remote elevator column*
* (depending on the machine configuration)
III - 3 - 32/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
When "Manual" mode (1) is activated, the count function is inhibited and the parameter setting windows for the
elevator columns and the unscrambler rollers in the "Feeder" family change:
- the keys (2 ; 3 ; 5 ; 9) appear.
The operator can pilot the preform feeder until the count cell fault "D5" is resolved.
The operator can set and regulate the setpoints (8 ; 9 ; 10 ; 11) to improve the quality of the flow of preforms
through the preform feeder.
The increase percentages (2 ; 3) and decrease percentages (4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7) may need to be modified in order to
regulate the preform feeder in Manual mode.
A satisfactory flow of preforms in the feeder is characterized by a fluctuation in the level of preforms around
the "D3" cell without that extending to the "D4" and "D1" cells.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints".
3.4.6 Hopper control (depending on the machine configuration)
A 2
1 4
1-006645-02-02.svg
1 Confirm number of preforms entered at key (2)

2 Enter the number of preforms loaded into the hopper
3 Enter the anticipation delay for the hopper fill request
4 "Hopper control" on/off key
The anticipation delay (3) displays the hopper fill request message before the minimum level (median level) is
reached.
· When a request for hopper loading is made:
- enter the number of preforms to be loaded into the hopper using the key (2),
- confirm the number of preforms entered using the key (1).
The number of preforms remaining in the hopper (A) and the remaining production time (B) are automatically
recalculated and displayed on the hopper diagram.
3.4.7 Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors
The cell parameters optimize the fluidity of the flow of preforms by applying a time delay on the rising and trailing
edges of the sensors.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 33/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4 3
1-007555-04-02.svg
Parameter settings for the leading and trailing edge time delays for the cell-sensors on all of the unscrambler
1
rollers
2 Set the time delays on the leading and trailing edges for the sensors on the small hopper
Parameter settings for leading and trailing edge time delays for all of the sensors on the hopper*
3 Area for setting the parameters of the time delays on the leading and trailing edges of the cells present on the
remote hopper*
When a sensor cell detects preforms, the indicator (4) turns to green after the time delay.
3.4.8 Clearing the feeder
Emptying the feeder will clear preforms from the hopper and/or the unscrambler rollers.
Clearing the preforms is used to an article change or a maintenance operation.
A B
2 5
3 6
1-007478-01-02.svg
III - 3 - 34/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Display bar showing actions to be carried out in order to clear the remote hopper*
A
Bar displaying the actions to be carried out to clear the hopper*
B Bar displaying actions to be carried out to clear the unscrambler rollers
Select clearance by the remote hopper*
1
Clearance by hopper key*
Authorize start of clearance by remote hopper*
2
Key authorizing the start of clearance by hopper*
Open the data entry window for the remote hopper motor speed instruction*
3
Open the window in which you can enter the hopper motor speed setpoint*
4 Clearance by unscrambler rollers selection key
5 Key authorizing the start of clearance by unscrambler rollers
Open the setpoint window for the speeds of the motors on the small hopper and the unscrambler rollers*
6
Open the unscrambler roller and elevator motor rotation setpoint window*
The preform feeder is emptied into the recycle bin through the hopper gate, the unscrambler gate and the infeed
rail gate.
3.4.9 Preform
1 6
2 7
3 8
5 9
4 A
B
1-008844-02-02.svg
The values keyed in for the preforms determine the maximum speed of the supply of the unscrambler roller
assembly. The values entered into zone (B) are reminders, they do not modify the configuration of the
application.
1 Press to enter the diameter of the neck ring

2 Press to enter the interior diameter of the neck
3 Press to enter the height of the neck
4 Press to enter the exterior diameter of the body
5 Press to enter the total length of the preform
6 Press to enter the humidity return rate
7 Button for accessing the window for keying in the intrinsic viscosity rate
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 35/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
8 Press to enter the level of diametrical orientation

9 Press to enter the level of longitudinal orientation
A Bi-orientation level display
- The humidity return rate corresponds to the level of humidity contained in the P.E.T constituting the
preforms.
- The intrinsic viscosity rate corresponds to the viscosity in solution of the P.E.T. It characterizes the
molecular weight, that is to say the average length of the molecular chains.
3.4.10 Preform tipper (depending on the machine configuration)
1-007548-01-02.svg
1 Button for accessing the window for keying in the duration of the high position of the electric tipper
2 Button for accessing the window for zero resetting the number of cycles of the electric tipper
3 Button for validating the placing of the electric tipper in maintenance position
For more information, see the technical documents delivered with this equipment.
III - 3 - 36/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.5 The "Hygiene" family (depending on the machine configuration)
BCU-040, BCU-044
3.5.1 Functions
In the Hygiene family you can configure and display the parameters for the following:
- preform interior decontamination module,
- blowing machine aeraulic system,
- preform exterior decontamination module,
- surface disinfection system,
- the steam sterilization module.
identical.
3.5.2 Description
A
2
6
B
7
C
1-014421-01-02.svg
A Display showing the parameters for the preform interior decontamination module
B Display showing the parameters for the preform exterior decontamination module
C Display showing the parameter settings for the preform neck decontamination module
1 "Observations" window access key
2 Aeraulic window key
3 Surface Disinfection window key
4 Access key for the "Filter steam sterilization" window
5 Import the microbiological report
6 Export the microbiological report
7 Print the microbiological report
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 37/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.5.3 Internal preform decontamination
6 8 19 10 11 14 12 13 15
2
20
3
21
1
4 22
7
23
9
17
18
16
1-014421-03-02.svg
For machines equipped with one decontamination station, the screen presents only one station.
1 Display showing the status of the preform decontamination air line filter
2 Display showing the state of the solenoid valve of the air system supplying the evaporation stations
3 Display showing status of solenoid valve on tank pressurization air circuit
4 Display showing the state of the solenoid valve of the air system supplying the fixed diffusers
5 Access key for the display window "Air pressure for vaporization"
6 Display showing level in the tank
7 Button for accessing the window "Fixed diffuser pressure"
8 Display showing the status of the liquid circuit filling
9 Display showing the state of the pump
10 Button for accessing the window "Liquid pressure for vaporization"
11 Display showing the status of the steam generator purge solenoid on station 1
Display showing the status of the steam generator purge solenoid on station 2 (depending on the machine
12
configuration)
Button for accessing the window "Flow rate instructions"
13
Display showing air and liquid flow readings for vaporization
Button for accessing the window "Regulating the vapour generator on station 1"
14
Display showing steam generator regulation measurements
Button for accessing the window "Regulating the vapour generator on station 2" (depending on the machine
15 configuration)
Button for accessing the window "Regulating the fixed diffuser on station 1"
16
Display showing temperature readings on fixed diffuser
Button for accessing the window "Regulating the fixed diffuser on station 2" (depending on the machine
17 configuration)
III - 3 - 38/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
"Mobile diffuser" window
18
Display showing temperature readings on mobile diffuser
19 Button for accessing the window for keying in the power of the vapour extractor in preform decontamination
20 Button for inhibiting evaporation station No. 1
21 Button for inhibiting evaporation station No. 2 (depending on the machine configuration)
22 Activation key for inspecting the deposit of aseptic solution in the preform
23 Access the "Spray nozzle information" window
3.5.3.1 Flow rate instruction window for preform decontamination

The "Flow rate instruction" window allows the user to parameterize each evaporation station:
- the mass of the sterilizing solution entering the evaporation station,
- the air flow rate entering the evaporation station.
A B
1 4
2 3
1-008047-01-02.svg
A Display showing the mass of the sterilizing solution and of the air flow rate entering evaporation station No. 1
Display showing the mass of the sterilizing solution and of the air flow rate entering evaporation station No. 2
B
(depending on the machine configuration)
1 Button for accessing the window for keying in the air flow rate entering evaporation station No. 1
Button for accessing the window for keying in the mass of the sterilizing solution entering the evaporation station
2
No. 1
Button for accessing the window for keying in the air flow rate entering evaporation station No. 2 (depending on
3
the machine configuration)
4
No. 2 (depending on the machine configuration)
3.5.3.2 Preform decontamination regulation windows

The presentation of the various regulation windows are identical to each other.
- The "Station X vapour generator regulation" windows show the temperature charts for the vapour generators.
- The "Station X fixed diffuser regulation" windows show the temperature charts for the fixed diffusers.
- The "Station X mobile diffuser regulation" window show the temperature charts for the mobile diffuser.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 39/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1
C
B
2 5
6
3
4 7
1-008050-01-02.svg
A Temperature display graph

B Display showing heating percentage
C Temperature display
1 Access key for entry field for temperature setpoint
2 Access key for the entry field for value for parameter P (proportional)**
3 Access key for entry field for value of parameter I (integral)**
4 Access key for entering the D parameter (derived)**
6 Access key to the window for entering the minimum temperature inspection differential
7 Access key to the window for entering the maximum temperature inspection differential
** The optimum regulation is obtained by finely adjusting the P, I, D parameters, please refer to chapter "P, I, D regulation parameters".
When "Manual mode" is selected, the regulation parameters (2 ; 3 ; 4) are no longer active and the operator must
enter an output percentage instruction (B).
3.5.3.3 Vaporization nozzles
The "Spray nozzles" window show the excentration difference for the spray nozzles with regard to the wheel.
1-010334-01-02.svg
1 Nozzle plan number

2 Spray nozzle excentration value
III - 3 - 40/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.5.4 External preform decontamination
5 4
1-014421-02-02.svg
The number of fans varies according to the machine configuration.
1 Display showing the temperature readings in the UV cabin

3 Display showing UV irradiation check inside the oven
4 Preform exterior decontamination inhibition key
5 Display showing the oven UV cabinet cooling percentage
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 41/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.5.5 UV infeed rail (option)
1-014421-04-02.svg
1 Display showing the temperature on the UV rail 5 UV inhibit key (option)

2 UV rail temperature setpoint entry window key 6 Countdown to loading
3 UV rail irradiation check 7 H2O2 spray (option)
4 UV rail cooling percentage
3.5.6 Aeraulics
The visual may be different depending on the machine model and configuration.
1 2 3 C
4 6
B
E
1-010607-01-02.svg
III - 3 - 42/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The "Aeraulics" window allows the following for each chamber (A):
- inhibiting the fan rotation using the key (1),
- displaying the chamber (2) internal pressure,
- displaying the inhibited or uninhibited status (3) of the fan,
- displaying the frequency (4) of the converter,
- displaying the speed (5) of the fan.
B Display showing the percentage of steam extracted from the preform interior decontamination module
C Display showing extractor hood internal pressure
D Display showing cabin internal pressures
E Display showing the oven cooling percentage
6 Button for accessing the "Extraction hood" window
3.5.6.1 Extraction hood (option)

The "Extraction hood" window allows the user to define the temperature of the air to be extracted on the extraction
hood outlet.
A
1
C
4
B
2 5
3 6
1-007564-01-02.svg
A Temperature curve of the extracted air

B Window displaying outlet percentage (extractor fan power)
C Temperature display of extracted air
1 Button for accessing the window for keying in the temperature of the extracted air
2 Access key for the entry field for value for parameter "P" (proportional)***
3 Access key for entry field for value of parameter "I" (integral)***
4 Access key for entry field for entering the maximum temperature before alarm sets off
5 Access key for entering minimum temperature before alarm sets off
*** The optimum regulation is obtained by finely adjusting the P, I, D parameters, please refer to chapter "P, I, D regulation parameters".
When "Manual mode" is selected, the regulation parameters (2 ; 3) are no longer active and the operator must
In Automatic mode, the chart is refreshed at every wheel revolution. In Manual mode the chart remains on the
screen and can analyzed.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 43/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.5.7 Surface disinfection
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
35
34
B
33
32
C
31
30
29
28
11
27
12
26
13
25
14
D 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
1-015963-01-02.svg
A Display showing the disinfection cycle progress

B Disinfection cycle progress message bar
C Display showing the progress synoptic for surface disinfection
D Disinfection history display area
1 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the disinfectant tank
2 Display showing the disinfectant pressure
3 Display showing the status of the disinfection supply solenoid valve for the manual disinfection system
Display showing the status of the disinfectant supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the molds and
4
nozzles
Display showing the status of the disinfectant supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the bottle and
5
preform transfer grips
6 Temperature display for UV cabin n°1
Display showing the status of the disinfectant supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the preform transfer
7
grips
8 Display showing the status of the disinfectant supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the oven wheel plate
9 Temperature display for UV cabin n°2
Display showing the status of the disinfectant supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the oven outfeed
10
guide
11 Display showing the air pressure in the bottle transfer grips disinfection system
12 Display showing the air pressure in the preform transfer grips disinfection system
13 Display showing the air pressure in the oven plate disinfection system
14 Display showing the air pressure in the oven outfeed guide disinfection system
15 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the oven outfeed guide
16 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the oven wheel plate
17 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the preform transfer grips
18 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the bottle transfer grips
19 Display showing the air pressure in the manual disinfection system
III - 3 - 44/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
20 Display showing the pressure in the mold and nozzle disinfection system air line
Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the spray nozzles on the mold and nozzle
21
disinfection system
22 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve for the disinfection of the molds and nozzles
23 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the manual disinfection system
24 Key to open the "Surface disinfections history" window
25 Display showing time since last surface disinfection cycle successfully completed
26 Display showing that the last disinfection cycle has been completed with faults
27 Display showing that the last disinfection cycle has been completely successful
Surface disinfection cycle start key
28
"Disinfection cycle type" window key (option)
29 Confirm key for the manual disinfection of the article outfeed zone
30 Display showing the progress of the spindle tip disinfection
31 Display showing the progress of the disinfection of the oven outfeed guide and plate
32 Display showing the progress of the disinfection of the molds and nozzles
33 Display showing transfer grip disinfection progress
34 Display showing the progress of the article outfeed zone disinfection
35 Display showing the status of the air supply solenoid valve to the rotating cylinder on the spray system
3.5.7.1 Type of disinfection cycle

A cycle of 30 minutes is mandatory after the following:
- A total machine shutdown of more than 6 hours.
- A production recipe change.
- A long disinfection cycle on the surfaces of the filler.
- A voluntary or involuntary PLC stoppage.
A short cycle of 15 minutes may be carried out at the discretion of the operator.
1 2
1-014404-01-02.svg
1 Short cycle surface disinfection start key

2 Long cycle surface disinfection start key
3.5.8 Filter steam sterilization
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 45/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A 10 11 C
3 D
5 12
6 13
7 14
8 15
9 E
1-015964-01-02.svg
For machines fitted with 2 filters, the screen only shows 2 filters.
A Steam sterilization progress

B Sterilization history display area
C Message display bar indicating steam sterilization progress
D Steam sterilization progress synoptic
E Display showing faults during the steam sterilization cycle
1 Progress of the filter temperature increase phase
2 Filter sterilization progress
3 Filter drying/cooling phase progress
4 Start/stop the steam sterilization cycle
5 Display showing that the last steam sterilization cycle was successfully completed
6 Last sterilization cycle completed with faults
7 Display showing time expired since last successfully completed steam sterilization cycle
8 Button accessing the "Number of steam sterilization cycles reset?" window
9 Button accessing the "Steam sterilization history" window
10 Blowing pressure sent into the circuit
11 Temperature of the steam sent into the circuit
Temperature of the steam in the filters

12
Button accessing the temperature window
Steam pressure in the filters
13
Pressure window access button
14 Downstream temperature of the steam sent into the filters
15 Upstream temperature of the steam sent into the filters
III - 3 - 46/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.6 "Oven" family
BPU-007, BPU-010, BPU-011
BDE-009
3.6.1 Functions
The "Oven" family shows and sets the oven parameters for any given type of production and access level.
An Operator-level user can access the following information:
- the status of the oven lamps,
- the oven parameters,
- the heating setpoints.
Technicians and supervisors can perform the following functions:
- set the oven parameters,
- define the heating setpoints,
- manage production recipes,
- document the mechanical configuration of the oven.
identical.
3.6.2 Description
A 2
D
5 7 9 6 8 C
1-010750-01-02.svg
A "Lamp configuration" window

B "Setpoints" window
C "Preform temperatures" window
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 47/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
D "Regulation correction setpoints" window

1 Window access key "Mechanical oven configuration"
3 "Preform decontamination" access key (depending on the machine configuration)
4 Button for accessing the "Setting oven parameters" window (option)
5 Display of oven temperature
6 Display of external temperature
7 Display of bottle temperature (option)
8 Display of the temperature of the preforms in the rail (option)
9 Display of extractor hood temperature (depending on the machine configuration)
3.6.3 Lamp configuration

m Display
The window (A) displays the configuration of the heating lamps on the penetration and distribution ovens.
A
1-011722-01-02.svg
B Zone 8 ; 9 ; 10 **
C Display zone for the distribuion ovens heating percentages

Display showing the status of the penetration and distribution ovens
D
"Lamp commands" access key
E Display showing the overall heating percentage for each zone
1 Configuration key for the number of penetration and distribution ovens
2 Configuration key for the number of penetration and distribution ovens in Zone 1
** The zone number depends on the machine configuration.
the status of the lamps is shown as:

- A yellow or orange rectangle if the lamp is on.
- A white rectangle if the lamp is off.
- A red rectangle if the lamp is broken.
III - 3 - 48/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The overall heating percentage is determined by the formula:% overall heating = (((Number of lamps on in the
penetration oven x 100%) + (Number of lamps on in the distribution ovens x % of zone)) / (Total number of
lamps)) x output %.
m Parameter setting
The lamp control window can be accessed by pressing on the display zones (D).
The lamps may be in one of three different states:

- Lamp on (F).
- Lamp off (I).
- Lamp broken (G).
J
F
I
G
F 3
4
H
1-011743-01-02.svg
H Display showing the limits between the penetration ovens and distribution ovens in zone 1
J Display showing the limits between the penetration ovens and the distribution ovens
3 Lamp activation and deactivation keys
4 Heating percentage entry keys for each oven zone
3.6.4 Mechanical oven configuration (depending on the machine configuration)
For further information, see procedure "BPU-011". (depending on the machine configuration)
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 49/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
17
20
19
A
18
17
16
15
14
13 1
12 2
11
10 B 9 8 4 7 6 5 4 3
1-008981-03-02.svg
15
14
22 A
21
12 1
11 2
10
9 B 8 4 7 6 5 4 3
1-011723-01-02.svg
The values entered into zone (A) are reminders, they do not modify the configuration of the application.
A Window displaying the status of a heating module in configuration

B Window for the selection of the oven to be configured
C Lamp configuration window for each zone (depending on the machine configuration)
1 Window access key "Observations"
2 Window access key "General view of mechancial oven configuration"
3 Window access key for entering vertical distance between rack and shield
4 Heating module number selection key
5 Window access key for entering number of heating module to configure
6 Window access key for entering horizontal distance between rack and shield
* The zone can be selected directly in the window (B)
III - 3 - 50/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
7 Window access key for entering horizontal distance between shield and preform
8 Window access key for entering vertical distance between shield and preform
9 Heating module mechanical configuration
10 Mechanical configuration for second half of the oven
11 Mechanical configuration for first half of the oven
12 Mechanical configuration for entire oven
13 Quartz bar presence confirmation key
14 Window access key to enter the height of black bar
15 Confirm key for presence of black bar
16 Selection key for lamp in pivoted position
17 Zone number selection keys*
18 Selection key for lamp in forward position
19 Window access key Number of zone to be configured
20 Selection key for lamp in retracted position
21 Access key for dummy lamp height entry window
22 Dummy lamp presence confirm key
* The zone can be selected directly in the window (B)
3.6.4.1 General view of mechancial oven configuration (depending on the machine configuration)
1-011725-01-02.svg
1-011724-01-02.svg
The "General view of mechancial oven configuration" window provides a view over the entire oven:
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 51/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- the position of the lamps (depending on the machine configuration),

- the presence and the position of the quartz bar (depending on the machine configuration),
- the presence and the position of the dummy lamp (1) (depending on the machine configuration),
- the presence and the position of the black bar,
- the number of ovens used as penetration ovens,
- the number of ovens used as distribution ovens.
3.6.5 Observations
1-006712-02-02.svg
1 Open heating observations window
3.6.6 Preform decontamination (depending on the machine configuration)

The "Preform deconamination" window allows the following:
- to display the operating status of the decontamination module,
- set the operating parameters for the decontamination module.
The activation of the blowing air recovery inhibits the preform internal decontamination (depending on the
machine configuration). For further information, please refer to chapter ""Options" family".
6 19 8 10 11 12
2 13
3 14
1 15
4 16
18
20 25 21 26 22 27 9 23 24
1-010340-04-02.svg
1 Display showing the status of the preform decontamination air line filter
2 Display showing the state of the solenoid valve of the air system supplying the evaporation stations
3 Display showing status of solenoid valve on tank pressurization air circuit
4 Display showing the state of the solenoid valve of the air system supplying the fixed diffusers
III - 3 - 52/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
5 Access key for the display window "Air pressure for vaporization"
6 Display showing level in the tank
7 Button for accessing the window "Fixed diffuser pressure"
8 Display showing the status of the liquid circuit filling
9 Display showing the state of the pump
10 Button for accessing the window "Liquid pressure for vaporization"
Button for accessing the window "Flow rate instructions"
13
Display showing air and liquid flow readings for vaporization
14
15
16
17
"Mobile diffuser" window
18
Display showing temperature readings on mobile diffuser
19 Button for accessing the window for keying in the power of the vapour extractor in preform decontamination
22 Activation key for inspecting the deposit of aseptic solution in the preform
23 Access the "Spray nozzle information" window
25 Export the microbiological report
26 Import the microbiological report
27 Print the microbiological report
3.6.6.1 Flow rate instruction window for preform decontamination

The "Flow rate instruction" window allows the user to parameterize each evaporation station:
- the mass of the sterilizing solution entering the evaporation station,
- the air flow rate entering the evaporation station.
A B
1 4
2 3
1-008047-01-02.svg
A Display showing the mass of the sterilizing solution and of the air flow rate entering evaporation station No. 1
B Display showing the mass of the sterilizing solution and of the air flow rate entering evaporation station No. 2
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 53/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
2
No. 1
4
No. 2
3.6.6.2 Preform decontamination regulation windows

The presentation of the various regulation windows are identical to each other.
- The "Station X vapour generator regulation" windows show the temperature charts for the vapour generators.
- The "Station X fixed diffuser regulation" windows show the temperature charts for the fixed diffusers.
- The "Station X mobile diffuser regulation" window show the temperature charts for the mobile diffuser.
1
C
B
2 5
6
3
4 7
1-008050-01-02.svg
A Temperature display graph

B Display showing heating percentage
C Temperature display
2 Access key for the entry field for value for parameter P (proportional)**
3 Access key for entry field for value of parameter I (integral)**
4 Access key for entering the D parameter (derived)**
6 Access key to the window for entering the minimum temperature inspection differential
7 Access key to the window for entering the maximum temperature inspection differential
** The optimum regulation is obtained by finely adjusting the P, I, D parameters, please refer to chapter "P, I, D regulation parameters".
When "Manual mode" is selected, the regulation parameters (2 ; 3 ; 4) are no longer active and the operator must
3.6.6.3 Vaporization nozzles
The "Spray nozzles" window show the excentration difference for the spray nozzles with regard to the wheel.
III - 3 - 54/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-010334-01-02.svg
1 Nozzle plan number

2 Spray nozzle excentration value
3.6.7 Setting the oven parameters (option)

The "Setting the oven regulation parameters" window allows the user to configure check areas on the neck, body
and base of the preforms.
The "Setting the Oven regulation parameters" window is available if the cameras (option), the temperature
check on the neck of the preforms at the oven outfeed and / or the temperature check on the base of the
preforms at the oven outfeed are present and validated in the options. please refer to chapter "Option
selection" in the User manual.
4
1
5 3
1-007562-02-02.svg
1 Graphic demarcation of the check zone of the preform base by camera

2 Graphic demarcation of the check zone of the preform body by camera
3 Graphic demarcation of the check zone of the preform neck by camera
4 Cursor for positioning the check zone on the preform base
5 Cursor for positioning the check zone on the preform neck
a graphic reminder of the check zones is visible in the "Overall heating %" window . please refer to chapter
"Lamp commands" .
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 55/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.6.8 Setpoint instructions
4
8
5
9
2
10
6
1-010750-02-02.svg
For machines equipped with a single extractor hood, the screen shows only one extractor hood.
1 Button for accessing the window for keying in instructions for "Loading temperature"
2 Button for accessing the window for keying in the standby percentage of the oven
3 Open the oven ventilation percentage window
4 Button for accessing the "Extraction hood" window (option)
5 "Heat recovery" window access key (option)
6 Window access key "Preform neck cooling" (option)
7 Window access key "X preform neck cooling" (option)
8 Opens the entry field for the regulation correction frequency
9 Button for accessing the window for keying in the correction coefficient of the regulation
10 Heating percentage immediate correction activation key
Fore more information on the setpoints, please refer to chapter "Heating setpoints".
3.6.8.1 Extraction hood (option)

The "Extraction hood" window allows the user to define the temperature of the air to be extracted on the extraction
hood outlet.
III - 3 - 56/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1
C
4
B
2 5
3 6
1-007564-01-02.svg
A Temperature curve of the extracted air

B Window displaying outlet percentage (extractor fan power)
C Temperature display of extracted air
1 Button for accessing the window for keying in the temperature of the extracted air
2 Access key for the entry field for value for parameter "P" (proportional)***
3 Access key for entry field for value of parameter "I" (integral)***
*** The optimum regulation is obtained by finely adjusting the P, I, D parameters, please refer to chapter "P, I, D regulation parameters".
3.6.8.2 Heat recovery unit (option)
The Heat Recovery window allows you to define the temperature of the air recycled at the recovery cabinet outlet.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 57/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1
C
4
B
2 5
3 6
1-007189-01-02.svg
A Recycled air temperature graph

B Window showing the output percentage (opening of the recovery cabinet gates)
C Temperature of recycled air
1 Access key for entry field for recycled air temperature setpoint
2 Access key for the entry field for value for parameter "P" (proportional)*
3 Access key for entry field for value of parameter "I" (integral)*
* The optimum regulation is obtained by finely adjusting the P, I, D parameters, please refer to chapter "P, I, D regulation parameters".
3.6.8.3 Preform neck cooling (option)
The "Preform neck cooling" window regulates the air temperature on the preform neck on the oven bend.
III - 3 - 58/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 C
B
4
2
5
3 6
1-010751-01-02.svg
A Graph of preform neck cooling temperature on the oven bend

B Display showing the output percentage (power of preform neck cooling on the oven bend)
Display showing the temperature of the preform neck cooling on the oven bendTemperature display of extracted
C
air
1 Open the data entry field for the temperature instruction for preform neck cooling on the oven bend
2 Access key for the entry field for value for parameter "P" (proportional)*
3 Access key for entry field for value of parameter "I" (integral)*
* The optimum regulation is obtained by finely adjusting the P, I, D parameters, please refer to chapter "P, I, D regulation parameters".
3.6.8.4 X preform neck cooling (option)
The "X preform body cooling" window enables the temperature of the preform body air to be regulated.
1-010752-01-02.svg
The number of cooling modules varies depending on the machine configuration.
1 Open the data entry window for the percentages for each cooling module
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 59/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.6.9 Preform temperature
2
1
4 3
1-010750-03-02.svg
1 Button for accessing the "Preform body temperature" window

"Preform inspection" access key
2 or
Button for accessing the "Preform base temperature" window (option)
"Preform inspection" access key
3 or
Button for accessing the "Preform neck temperature" window (option)
4 Access key to the "Preform thermal imaging" window (option)
3.6.9.1 Temperature of the preform body

The "Temperature of the preform body" window allows the user to display and set the regulation parameters of the
preform body.
In the presence of the "Oven regulation on X sensors" option, the "preform neck temperature" and "preform
base temperaure" windows are presented in the same way.
III - 3 - 60/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
C 5
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
1-007559-05-02.svg
A Preform temperature chart

B "Readings" window
C "Setpoints" window
1 Button for accessing the window into which you can key in the preform temperature setpoint at the oven outfeed
2 Button for accessing the widow for keying in the heating power percentage at the start of production
Button for accessing the window into which you can enter the minimum preform body temperature setpoint at the
3
oven outfeed before the alarms sets off
Button for accessing the window into which you can enter the maximum preform body temperature setpoint at the
4
oven outfeed before the alarms sets off
5 Display of preform temperatures at the oven outfeed
6 General heating percentage applied to the oven
Next general heating percentage to be applied to the oven (this information is displayed only if the regulation is
7
active)
Button for activating or deactivating the ejection of preforms whose measured temperature does not fall within the
8
acceptable temperature limits
In "automtaic" mode the curve is refreshed every 10 s. In Manual mode the chart remains on the screen and
can analyzed.
3.6.9.2 Checking the preforms (option)
The "Preform inspection" window defines the setpoints for the preform tmperatures, at the oven outfeed, before the
alarm sets off.
3
2
1
6
5
7
1-006402-03-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 61/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A Display of preform temperatures at the oven outfeed

1 Access key to the "Minimum preform body temperature" window
2 Access key to the "Maximum preform body temperature" window
3 Access key to the "Minimum preform neck temperature" window (option)
4 Access key to the "Maximum preform neck temperature" window (option)
5 Access key to the "Minimum preform base temperature" window (option)
6 Access key to the "Maximum preform base temperature" window (option)
7 Activate/deactivate the "Preform temperature control" function
The machine ejects preforms where the temperature is not withing the upper and lower l;imits as defined in
the "Preform inspection" window.
3.6.9.3 Thermal imaging of the preform (option)
The "Preform heat profile" window shows the various preform heating zones.
4
5
1 2 3 6 7 8 9
1-010339-02-02.svg
A Preform heat profile display

1 Button for moving the cursor to the left
2 Stop cursor movement
3 Button for moving the cursor to the right
4 Key to access the "Minimum display temperature" window
5 Key to access the "Maximum display temperature" window
6 Key to import a heat profile
7 Key to export a heat profile
8 Save a heat profile
9 Print a heat profile
III - 3 - 62/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.7 "Wheel" family
BCU-018
BPU-001, BPU-002, BPU-006, BPU-010, BPU-012, BPU-019 (option), BPU-030 (option)
3.7.1 Functions
The "Wheel" displays and sets the parameters required for blowing articles.
identical.
3.7.2 Description
1 A
2
C
11
5
6
10
B
7
9
8
1-011742-01-02.svg
A Visible bar masked B Air and water flow diagram

C "Lamp configuration" window
1 Display/hide bar (A) 2 "Blow chart" access key

Window access key "Preform (depending on the
3 "Stretching" access key 4
machine configuration) and Item "
Button for accessing the "Process regulation"
5 Access key for the "Mold change" window 6
window (option)
Button for changing between the air and water
7 Open "Pressure/Temperature" window 8
flow diagrams
Button for accessing the "Setting the process
9 10 "Blowing" access key
regulation parameters" window (option)
11 "Preblowing" access key
3.7.3 Lamp configuration
For further information, please refer to chapter ""Oven" family".
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 63/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.7.4 Blowing charts

The "Blow charts" window allows you to acquire blowing and preblowing graphs. The charts are calculated by
sampling pressures in the bottle in any selected mold.
m "Blow chart"
1 B 4 8 12 9 14
13
5 15
18
2 17
3 16
C A
19
10 D E 11 F 6 24 23 7 22 20 21
1-006713-01-02.svg
A Name of the chart selected 10 Move the cursor over the time scale
B Display zone of chart selected 11 Move the cursor over the pressure scale
C Minimum value measured for a given sample 12 Move the graph selected from the chart
D Maximum value measured for a given sample 13 Open the mold selection window
Mean value of points measured for a given Operating mode selection key (Manual or
E 14
sample Automatic)
Standard deviation for points measured in a
F 15 Start data acquisition (only in Manual mode)
given sample
1 Pressure scale maximum value setting 16 Show a reference graph
Save a graph as areference (allows you to
2 Pressure scale minimum value setting 17
identify possible derivations over time)
3 Time scale minimum value setting 18 Load a reference graph
4 Time scale maximum value setting 19 Set the upper tolerance envelope value
5 Set chart to automatic scale 20 Set the lower tolerance envelope value
6 Zoom on the blow chart 21 Modify the display mode
7 Zoom on the exhaust chart 22 Activate the recorder

8 Zoom on all of the chart 23 Print charts
9 Zoom on the preblow chart 24 Save charts to diskette
III - 3 - 64/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.7.5 Stretching
1 4
3 6
1-006714-01-02.svg
The values entered are reminders, they do not modify the physical set-up of the machine.
1 Press to enter the stretching cam slope

2 Press to enter the flanging height
3 Press to enter the clearance between the stretching rod and the mold base
4 Press to enter the diameter of the stretching rod
5 Press to enter the diameter of the flanging
6 Press to enter the stretching rod plan number
3.7.6 Preforms and blown items
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
A
5
1-007569-01-02.svg
For machines equipped with a preform feeder, the screen shows only the article
The values keyed in for the preforms determine the maximum speed of the supply of the unscrambler roller
assembly.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 65/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The values keyed in for the items are reminders and do not change the configuration of the application.
1 Press to enter the diameter of the neck ring

2 Press to enter the interior diameter of the neck
3 Press to enter the height of the neck
4 Press to enter the total length of the preform
5 Press to enter the exterior diameter of the body
6 Press to enter the humidity return rate
7 Button for accessing the window for keying in the intrinsic viscosity rate
8 Press to enter the level of diametrical orientation
9 Press to enter the level of longitudinal orientation
A Bi-orientation level display
- The humidity return rate corresponds to the level of humidity contained in the P.E.T constituting the
preforms.
- The intrinsic viscosity rate corresponds to the viscosity in solution of the P.E.T. It characterizes the
molecular weight, that is to say the average length of the molecular chains.
3.7.7 Changing the molds (option)
The "Mold change" window enables molds to be changed with the Bottle Switch system
C
1
B
6 A
4
2
3
1-011744-01-02.svg
A Dynamic display showing mold change in progress

B Message display bar
C Display showing the number of the mold in position
1 Mold change start/stop button
2 Open the mold selection window

3 Activate/deactivate the necks and bases circuit purge solenoid
4 Activate/deactivate the unlock cam solenoid
5 Activate/deactivate the mol open/close cam solenoid
6 Mold base change inhibit button
3.7.8 Regulation process (option)

The "Process regulation" window allows the user to display and analyse the curves for each station:
- of the instruction of the base weight of the items,
- of the base weight of station No. X,
- of the average weight on one revolution of the wheel,
- of the start of preblowing on station No. X,
III - 3 - 66/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- of the preblowing pressure of station No. X.
5 6 7 8 9
A
10
3 1
E 2
B
C
11 12 13 14 15
1-007577-01-02.svg
A Display area of the curves of the selected station 6 The curves move from right to left
B Selection area of the station 7 The curves move from left to right
Display window of the instructions and
C 8 Curve evolution in real time
measurements
Press to enter the maximum scale values of the
D 9 Press to enter the end time of the graph
various curves
Button for accessing the window for keying in the
E Move the cursor over the time scale 10
end date of the graph
Indicator of the state of the regulation on station
1 11 Display of the cursor time
No. X
Press to enter the "Offsets of the start of
2 Indicator of the state of the overall regulation 12
preblowing" window
Press to enter the "Process regulation summary"
3 Starting time of the display window 13
window
Button for accessing the "Choice of export
4 Starting date of the display window 14
reader" window
5 Increase/decrease window scale 15 Press to print graphs
3 colours characterize the state of the regulation on the indicators (1 ; 2):

- White: No regulation in progress.
- Green: Regulation in progress.
- Red: The regulation has attained the lower and upper limits keyed into the "Setting the process regulation
parameters" window, without being able to attain the instruction concerning the base weight of the items.
3.7.8.1 Summary of regulation process
The "Process regulation summary" window allows the user to display the different parameters of the regulation
process, in real time, on 3 graphs.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 67/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
C
2
1-007578-01-02.svg
Display area of the base weight value of the Button for accessing the "Choice of export
A 2
items per station at each revolution of the wheel reader" window
Display area of the offsets of the start of
B 3 Press to print graphs
preblowing per station
Display area of the temperature values of the
C 4 Display of the measured preblowing pressure
moulds
Press to enter the "Offsets of the start of
1
preblowing" window
3.7.8.2 Offsets of preblowing start

The "Offsets of the start of preblowing" window allows the user to refine the start of preblowing for each station.
Offset parameter settings are only available in manual mode, please refer to chapter "Setting the parameters
of the process ".
1
A
3
B
2
5 4
1-007572-01-02.svg
III - 3 - 68/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Display area of the preblowing offsets and the

Button for accessing the window for resetting the
A station selection (the selected station is 3
preblowing offset of the selected station
displayed in green)
B Display area of the preblowing offset values 4 Button for printing the preblowing offsets
Preblowing start position cursor (value in Press to enter the reset window for all the
1 5
production process tenths) preblowing offsets
Position the start of preblowing (same function
2
as cursor (1))
3.7.9 Preblowing
The "Preblowing" window positions the start of preblowing with regard to points "0" and "10".
5 7
6
2
3 4
1-007570-01-02.svg
1 Preblowing start position cursor (value in production process tenths)

2 Graphic display of mold locking
3 Display showing the start of preblowing (in angular degrees (and) production process tenths)
Angular position of points "0" and "10"
4
Press to open the " Acquisition of points 0/10" window
5 Position the start of preblowing (same function as cursor (1))
6 Position the start of preblowing at point "0" or "10"
7 Press to enter the "Offsets of the start of preblowing" window (option)
m Acquiring points "0" and "10"

In the "Acquisition of points 0/10" window you can set the start (point "0") and the end (point "10") of active preform
stretching.
The setting depends on the item being produced and will require a physical intervention on the machine.
11 8 9
14 15 12 10 13
1-007574-01-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 69/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
8 Angular position of mold locking 12 Acquisition of point "0"

9 Angular position of mold unlocking 13 Acquisition of point "10"
Values found from acquisition of points "0" and
10 14 Low pressure air supply key
"10"
11 Mold number selection key 15 Stretching control key
Disactivate keys (14) and (15) to exit the window.
3.7.10 Blowing
C 1
25 2
24 3
4
B
5
23
6
22
7
21
8
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 A 13 12 11 10
1-011726-01-02.svg
For machines fitted with a 2 stage cylinder, the screen shows only 2 parameter keks
A Process time in seconds B Display showing stretching parameters

Index in conjunction with predefined and Graphic display showing the production process
C D
calculated production process times on the blow wheel
Measurement unit selection (degrees or Open the first-stage nozzle raise data entry
1 2
seconds) window
Open the second-stage nozzle raise data entry

3 window (depending on the machine 4 Press to enter the preblow process timing
configuration)
Press to enter the compensation end anticipation
5 Press the enter the exhaust process timing 6
(option)
Press to enter the compensation start delay Press to enter the process time for air recycling
7 8
(option) (option)
Display showing total process time
process time for scavenging (option)
Value as a function of the preblow time
9 or 10
parameters, anticipation of the end of blowing,
Window access key "Optimized
air recycle, air sweep and exhaust
airsweep" (option)
Blowing process time display
Blowing end anticipation window access key Value as a function of the preblow time
11 12
(option) parameters, anticipation of the end of blowing,
air recycle, air sweep and exhaust
III - 3 - 70/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Air recovery before or during air blowing
13 14 Output rate setting key
selection key
"Pushed-up base" activate/deactivate key
15 16 Activate/deactivate "Air recovery" (option)
(option)
17 Compensation cancel key 18 Preblowing cancel key
19 Button for cancelling blowing 20 End of preblowing at point "10" key
Press to enter the angular position of the start of
21 Window access key "Pushed-up base" (option) 22
"push-up" (option)
Button for accessing the window for keying in the Open the first-stage nozzle lower data entry
23 24
angular position of the end of "push-up" (option) window
Open the second-stage nozzle lower data entry
25 window (depending on the machine
configuration)
When the piloted compensation is not present, the compensation line indicates the duration of compensation.
3.7.10.1 "Pushed-up base" (option)

The "Pushed-up base" window refines the push-up for each station.
A
1
3
B
2
4 5
6 7
1-010343-01-02.svg
Display showing the push-up offsets and the

Key accessing the window to enter the angular
A station selection (the selected station is shown in 4
position of the start of "Pushed-up base"
green)
B Push-up base offset values display 5
position of the end of "Pushed-up base"
1 Pushed-up position cursor (in 10ths of a second) 6 Key accessing the push-up offsets zero resets
Push-up positioning key (same operation as the
2 7 Print push-up offsets
cursor (1))
Zero reset for the push-up offset for the station
3
selected
3.7.10.2 Optimized airsweep (option)

The "Optimised airsweep" window allows you to make precise settings for each station.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 71/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A
1
B
2
4
8
6
5 9
1-010749-01-02.svg
Display showing airsweep offsets and the station Open the data entry window for the end of
A 5
selection (the station selected is shown in green) optimized air sweep time
B Airsweep offsets values display zone 6 Display showing the optimized airsweep offset
Optimised airsweep position cursor (value in Open the airsweep optimisation duration entry
1 7
tenths of a second) window
Airsweep optimisation positioning key (same Open the reset window for all of the optimised
2 8
function as cursor (1)) airsweep offset values
3 Reset the airsweep offset on the station selected 9 Print the optimised airsweep offsets
Press to enter the start duration for the optimized
4
airsweep
3.7.11 Setting the parameters of the process (option)

The "Setting the process regulation parameters" window allows the user to define and adjust the variables
controlling the regulation of the blowing process.
1
13
14 4
6
12
9 10 11 8
1-007576-01-02.svg
III - 3 - 72/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Window for selecting the type of production and Operating mode selection key (Manual or
A 8
bottle capacity Automatic)
Press to enter the lower limit of the start of Press to enter the regulation correction
1 9
preblowing frequency during the start phase of production
Press to enter the upper limit of the start of Press to enter the correction frequency of the
2 10
preblowing individual regulation with production in progress
Press to enter the lower limit of preblowing Press to enter the correction frequency of the
3 11
pressure overall regulation with production in progress
Press to enter the upper limit of preblowing Press to enter the correction coefficient of the
4 12
pressure individual regulation
Press to enter the correction coefficient of the
5 Press to enter the item capacity 13
overall regulation
BPress to enter the instruction for the base Press to enter the height of the base weight
6 14
weight of the items measurement of the items
Press to enter the tolerance of the base weight of
7
the items for the process regulation
The lower and upper limits, of the start of preblowing (1 ; 2) and the preblowing pressure (3 ; 4), are preset
depending on the production characteristics selected in the area (A).
The value keyed in for the height of the base weight measurement of the items is a reminder, it has no effect
on process regulation.
The correction frequencies correspond:

- for individual regulation: to the number of bottles included in the calaculation of the average base weight of
the items per station,
- for overall regulation: to the number of wheel revolutions.
In automatic mode, the setting of the offset parameters of the start of the preblowing in the "Offsets of the start
of preblowing" window is not available.
3.7.12 Air and water flow diagram
The diagram shows the air and water distribution levels in the blowing machine and also allows you to adjust these
levels. The windows are accessible through the air and water diagram and show (in some cases allow you to
adjust) the control values.
m Air diagram (depending on the machine configuration)
3 4 5 6 13 9 14 15
1
8
17
22
21
23 24 25 16 19 18
1-010354-06-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 73/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3 4 5 6 13 11 9 14 15
7 17
8
21
22
23 24 25 12 16 19 18
1-010355-04-02.svg
3 4 5 6 13 11 9 14 15
7 17
8
21
22
23 24 25 12 16 19 18
1-010632-02-xx.svg
3 4 5 6 13 9 14 15
2
8
17
22
21
23 24 25 16 20 19 18
III - 3 - 74/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-010357-05-02.svg
3 4 5 6 10 13 11 9 14 15
17
8
22
21
23 24 25 12 16 20 19 18
1-010358-08-02.svg
3 4 5 6 10 13 11 9 14 15
17
8
22
21
23 24 25 12 16 20 19 18
1-010721-02-xx.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 75/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3 4 5 13 9 14 15
21
1 18
1-014423-01-xx.svg
2 3 4 5 6 13 11 9 14 15
27
26
23
21
24
22
25
8 18
1-015965-01-xx.svg
1 Display of the flow rate of the high pressure air circuit of the machine (option)
Pressure in high pressure circuit at machine inlet
2
Open the data entry window for the high pressure air threshold at the machine inlet
3 Display of the state of the filter of the high pressure air circuit of the machine
Display and access to the window for keying in the pressure of the differential compensation (option according to
4 model)
In the absence of the differential compensation option, display button and the keying in of blowing pressure
Display of the differential compensation pressure (option according to model)
5 In the absence of the differential compensation option, display of the blowing pressure after regulation and open
the "Downstream blowing pressure" window
Display of the dew point of the high pressure air circuit of
12the machine
16 (option) 19
6
Dewpoint minimum and maximum temperature entry window
7 Indicates the air recovery setpoint (option)
Pressure in low pressure air circuit at machine inlet
8
Open "Service air pressure" window
Display showing the stretching and nozzle control pressure (option according to model)
9 If the nozzle control under 10 bars 10 bar is not present, stretching pressure is shown
Button for accessing the "Display of stretching pressure" window
III - 3 - 76/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
10 Recycled air pressure display (option)
11 Display of the state of the filter of the air recycling circuit (option)
12 Display showing the status of the blowing circuit pressurization solenoid valve (high pressure circuits) (option)
Preblowing pressure setpoint
13
Open preblowing pressure setpoint setting window
14 Post-regulation preblowing pressure check
Preblowing flowrate
15
Press the enter the preblow flowrate setpoint
In the presence of the differential compensation option, display of the blowing pressure instruction
16
Open blow pressure setpoint setting window
In the presence of the differential compensation option, display of the blowing pressure after regulation check
17
and open the "Downstream blowing pressure" window
18 "TORNADO" Solenoid valve pressure control display
19 If the nozzle command under 10 bar option is present, the control pressure for the nozzle cylinders will be shown
20 Pressure display of the "Push-up" system
21 Open "Pressure/Temperature" window
22 Display of the pressure of the dedust circuit (option)
23 Dedust circuit filter status
24 Status of dedust circuit solenoid valve (option)
"Preform dedust" display window access key
25 Preform dedust air pressure control threshold entry window
Preform dedust activate/deactivate key
26 Pressure in the reduced-pressure air recovery circuit
27 Pressure in the air recovery circuit
m Flow diagram (depending on the machine configuration)

32 29 31 30 28 27
33
21
26
34
37 35 36
1-010771-01-xx.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 77/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
32 29 31 30 28 36 27 35
33
37
21
26
34
38
41 40 39
1-010772-01-xx.svg
21 Open "Pressure/Temperature" window

26 Mold base/neck solenoid valve status
27 Display of the input temperature of the mold neck / base water circuit
Temperature reading at mold base/neck water circuit outlet
28
Open "Mold base and neck fluid temperature" window
Mold base/neck water circuit flowrate display
29
Open "Mold base/neck fluid flowrate" window
Temperature reading on water circuit at oven outlet
30
Open the "Fluid temperature in the ovens" window
Oven water circuit flowrate reading
31
Open "Oven water flowrate" window
32 Display showing the status of the fluid circulation in the oven (option)
33 Oven water circuit solenoid valve status
34 Mold body water circuit solenoid valve status
35 Display of the input temperature of the water circuit of the mould body
Temperature reading at mold body water circuit outlet
36
Open "Mold body fluid temperature" window
Mold body water circuit flow display
37
Open "Mold body fluid flowrate" window
38 Display showing the condition of the solenoid valve of the shell support water system
39 Display showing the temperature on the infeed of the shell support water system
Control display of the temperature on the outfeed of the shell support water system
40
Open "Mold base and neck fluid temperature" window
Control display of the flow rate on the shell support water system
41
Open "Mold base/neck fluid flowrate" window
3.7.13 Pressure and temperature

The "Pressure/temperature" window displays the pressure and temperature readings in each mold in real time.
The temperature readings are only shown when the "SPC" option is present on the machine.
III - 3 - 78/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
5 A B C D
C A
D B
D
1
1 2 3 4 6 2 3 4 6
1-010346-01-02.svg
A Display area for the pressure of each mold 2 Display of the average temperature of the molds
Display area for the temperature of each
Display mean temperature for the mold bases
B mold. Individual temperatures for each of the 2 3
(option)
shells (option)
Display temperatures for each mold base
C 4 "Bottle check" window access key
(option)
Display type selection key(table or mold
D Display area for non-validated checks 5
assembly)
Press to enter the maximum difference of Button for printing the pressure / temperature
1 6
temperature between 2 mould shells (option) table
The type of display selected is retained between 2 consultation sessions.

· Press on a mold or a line to access the "Mold No. X" window.
7
1-010347-01-02.svg
Activate/deactivate the blowing pressure check Activate/deactivate the mold base n°X
7 9
function of mold No. X temperature check function
Activate/deactivate the temperature check
8
function of mold No. X
The deactivation of the overall check function in the "Bottle check" window has priority in individual check
management on every mold in the "Mold No. X" window. It is therefore necessary to activate the check
function in the "Bottle check" window to activate or deactivate the individual check function in the "Mold No. X"
window.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 79/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.7.13.1 Bottle check

The "Bottle check" function allows you to enter the pressure and temperature limits within which the bottle will be
accepted. The "Bottle check" function also displays the current pressure and temperature at the position shown on
the chart.
2
1
3
4
7
6
1-007601-01-02.svg
1 Current pressure value at the position chosen for the check

2 Press to enter the minimum pressure value in a conformable bottle (pressure detector on the mold)
3 Press to enter the pressure loss value during the phase anticipating the end of blowing (option)
4 Cursor for selecting the position of a blowing pressure check
5 Activate/deactivate the "Blowing pressure" control function
Press to enter the minimum temperature value of the mould of a conformable bottle (temperature detector on the
6
mold) (option)
7 Mean value of the temperature of the molds on the latest revolution of the wheel
8 Activate/deactivate the "Mold temperature" control function (option)
Enter "0.0" to deactivate the bottle check function. This will allow production to continue when a temperature
or pressure sensor is malfunctioning and would ordinarily result all bottles being ejected. If the current value
on display is lower than the preset value the bottle will be ejected.
m "Bottle pressure variation check" (option)
The blowing pressure is measured at 3/10 and 8/10 of the blowing time.
If the variation in blowing pressure between these 2 measurement points (9) is greater than the variation setpoint
(3) entered at the PCC, the article will be ejected.
The setpoint value (3) entered is between 0 and 5.
III - 3 - 80/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3
4
1-014171-01-02.svg
2 Press to enter the minimum pressure value in a conformable bottle (pressure detector on the mold)
3 Press to enter the pressure loss value during the phase anticipating the end of blowing (option)
4 Cursor for selecting the position of a blowing pressure check
9 Blowing pressure measurement points between 3/10 and 8/10 of the blowing time (option)
When the "Blowing pressure variation check" option is active:

- Moving the cursor (4) does not affect the program.
- The key for entering the minimum pressure in a bottle (2) indicates the setpoint entered at the PCC at 3/10 of
the blowing time.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 81/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.8 "Recipe" family
BPU-005, BPU-010
3.8.1 Recipe selection (depending on the machine configuration)

The Recipe selection window becomes accessible if the machine configuration is a "Combi one system". If the
machine configuration is not a "Combi one system", access to the blowing machine (1) Recipes is direct.
1 2
1-014167-01-02.svg
Access key for the Recipes family in the "Combi

1 Access key for the blowing machine Recipes 2
one system"
3.8.2 Functions
The "Recipes" family of functions is where you can save all of your heating and blowing parameters, as well as the
configuration of certain options for the production of specific items.
The information entered mainly in the Oven, Wheel and Distributor families is saved in the recipe. When the recipe
for a new production run is entered into the machine, the data is updated in the corresponding windows. This data
can be consulted when setting up the machine.
The "Recipes" family enables you to:
- load a recipe into the machine,
- save a new recipe,
- update an existing recipe.
III - 3 - 82/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.8.3 Blowing machine Recipes
1 C 2 3 4 A
10
11
5 B
8 11
9
10
1-007760-01-02.svg
A Scrolling list of stored recipes 5 Transfer selected recipes to a chosen support

Button for accessing the "List of deleted recipes"
B Number of stored recipes 6
window
C "Recipe" family operations message bar 7 Deleting a recipe or recipes
1 Update selected recipe 8 Print selected recipe
2 Save a new recipe 9 Key to export the selected recipe
3 Load the selected recipe into the machine 10 Scroll to previous or next page in the recipe list
4 Selected recipe display 11 Scroll to previous or next line in the recipe list
The recipes displayed in the list can be sorted by name or date by pressing on the "Name" or "Date" tabs at
the top of the list. Press again to invert the sort order.
The recipe shown in PCC is the last to be loaded into the plc or the last to be saved.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 83/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.8.3.1 List of saved recipes
12
13
1-007602-01-02.svg
12 Button for deleting the selected recipes 13 Button for restoring the selected recipes
3.8.3.2 Displaying a recipe

15
D
F F
16
1-010421-02-02.svg
D Selected recipe display 15 Return to "Recipes" family

"Observations" window access key
E 16 Confim/unconfirm page printout
Comment display zone
F Page selection key
III - 3 - 84/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.8.4 "Combi one system" Recipes (depending on the machine configuration)
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
1-014168-01-02.svg
A Scrolling list of stored recipes B Number of stored recipes

1 Scroll up the list 7 Delete a recipe
2 Scroll down the list 8 Transfer selected recipes to a chosen support
3 Recipe details window 9 Availability of the Filler for recipe transfer
4 Transfer selected recipes to a chosen support 10 Availability of the Mixer for recipe transfer
5 Modify an existing recipe 11 Availability of the Blower for recipe transfer
Create a new recipe by copying the selected
6
recipe
3.8.4.1 "Add a recipe"

4 5
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 85/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-014169-01-02.svg
1 "Combi filler" recipe selection display 4 Recipe name entry key

2 "Combi mixer" recipe selection display 5 Confirm/save a "combi one system" recipemisc.
3 "Combi blower" recipe selection display
3.8.4.2 "Recipe details"
1-014170-01-02.svg
1 Filler recipe name window 3 Blower recipe name window

2 Mixer recipe name window 4 Combi one system recipe name window
III - 3 - 86/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.9 "Reports" family

3.9.1 Functions
The "Report" family groups together information acquired and stored during a given production period (down times,
average output, number of bottles produced etc.).
The parameters are shown in the form of a shift report, a report for each "shift duration".
The progress of the machine rate, the average production rate, the shift yield and the material yield are shown as
graphs.
3.9.2 Description
D
D
8
1
B
10
F
E
2 3 4 5 6 7
1-010360-01-02.svg
Button for accessing the "comments" window

A Display area of the station report 3 which is associated with a shift report which can
be consulted with the history
Button for accessing the "Report configuration"
B "Yields" window 4
window
C "Output rate and average production" window 5 "Consult archives" window
D Shift start/end times and dates 6 Press to open the "Fault summary" window
Button for accessing the "Monitoring SIDEL
E Window scale control keys 7
works" window
F Keys for navigation around the window 8 "Production data analysis" window
1 Press to save a new report at the end of a shift 9 Button for selecting the destination reader
Print the "Yields" and "Output and average
2 Press to save during a shift 10
production" graphs
3.9.3 Shift reports

The shift report displays the various production parameters in real time.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 87/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Shift report parameters
Period between the previous shift report and the current one. May correspond to when
"Shift duration"
an operator starts duty or the duration of production for a given item
"Gross production duration" Feeding duration. The count is performed when the item is supposed to exit the machine
Duration of production during which bottles have been sent to the machine outfeed
"Net producton duration" conveyor and considered acceptable by the plc as per the parameters defined by the
user
Aggregate of production stoppages due to faults:
- a stoppage due to a fault commences from the moment the bottle outfeed stops, due
either to a "Critical" or "Alert" fault or an insufficient number of preforms on the infeed
"Machine stoppage time due to rail
internal faults"
- faults on upstream and downstream peripherals (except a low level of preforms on
the infeed rail) are not counted
- stoppage periods run until the bottle outfeed restarts
Aggregate production stoppage time due to:
"Production stoppage time due to - The operator
external faults" - An emergency stop
- A door opening
"Production stoppage time due to
Stoppage period due to a low level of preforms on the infeed rail
upstream fault"
"Production stoppage time due to Stoppage period due to a conveying problem downstream of the machine, according to
downstream fault" the options selected in the "Auxiliary equipment" window (anticipated stop, gate open)
Average production output in bottles per hour calculated across the gross production
"Mean output rate"
duration. (rate = number of preforms used in production / gross production duration)
"Total preforms consumed" Number of preforms fed into the machine
"Number of preforms consumed in
Number of preforms used while the machine has been in production
production"
"Number of preforms ejected
Number of preforms ejected due to misloads (counted at the machine outfeed)
before the oven"
"Number of preforms ejected Number of preforms passing inspection but ejected at preform transfer by the operator
manually at transfer" pressing the "Eject preforms" button (counted at the machine outfeed)
Number of preforms ejected at transfer due to defects as defined by the user
"Number of defective preforms
(temperature at the oven outfeed, start and end of preform sets etc.) (counted at
ejected on transfer"
machine outfeed)
"Number of preforms blown" Number of preforms blown on the blow wheel (counted at machine outfeed)
Number of bottles ejected at transfer due to defects as defined by the user (bottle
"Number of defective bottles
pressure, mold temperature, start and end of bottle sets etc.) (counted at machine
ejected"
outfeed)
"Number of good bottles ejected Number of bottles passing inspection but ejected at transfer by the operator pressing the
manually" "Eject bottles" button (counted at the machine outfeed)
"Number of bottles produced" Number of bottles carried out on the outfeed conveyor
"Total good bottles" Number of bottles produced + number of good bottles ejected manually
Number of good bottles produced in relation to the total number of preforms consumed
"Material yield"
(total good bottles / total preforms consumed)
Number of good bottles produced in relation to the number that would have been
"Machine yield"
produced without fault stoppages (total good bottles / theoretical number of bottles)
Machine utilisation level (gross production duration + production fault stoppages / shift
"Shift yield"
duration)
Time during which good bottles have been produced by the machine (net production
duration) in relation to the duration of the shift. This figure provides an general
"Overall yield" comparison of what was actually produced with what would have been produced without
all types of stoppage (maintenance, fault stoppages, production of defective bottles,
down time etc.) (overall shift yield = net production duration / shift duration)
"Machine operation time" Period during which the plc output controlling the motor rotation power has been active
Number of bottles that would have been produced without machine stoppages due to
"Theoretical number of bottles" faults (production stoppage time due to fault = 0). Number of preforms used in production
+ (fault stoppage time x average output rate)
III - 3 - 88/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Average output rate taking into account stoppages due to the blowing machine. Total
"Net mean production"
good bottles / (duration of production + fault stoppage duration)
"Production stoppage time due to
Stoppage time due to a fault on the Combi
COMBI fault"
Number of good bottles produced and filled with regard to number which could have
"COMBI yield" been produced and filled without stoppages due to faults (total good bottles/theoretical
number of bottles)
3.9.4 Report configuration

The "Report configuration" window allows the user to configure and display the contents of the report.
The window (A) allows the user to set the parameters of the periodic report (start time, duration) and / or the
information to be included in the printed report.
A 16 17 18 12
4
1
14
2
13
B
15
5
3 9 6 8 10 7 11
1-010362-01-02.svg
B Select a report or a partial 10 Button for keying in the production instruction

1 Button for configuring the line order of a report 11 Button for printing the alarm history
2 Button for validating the display of the wording 12 Button for printing the output curves
3 Button for accessing the window (A) 13 Button for printing the alarm summary
4 Scroll up the list 14 Button for printing the rate curves
5 Scroll down the list 15 Automatic report printout
6 Button for validating the periodic report 16 Create a report manually
Button for keying in the duration of the periodic
7 17 Create a report on delogin
report
Button for keying in the duration of the periodic
8 18 Key to create a report on loading a recipe
report
9 Button for validating the end of production
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 89/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.9.5 Consult archives
14
B
13
12
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-010363-01-02.svg
Generating a report will memorize all of the production indicators at the end of the user shift (all of the counters
reset to zero).
Generating a partial report will memorize production indicators during the shift (counters do not reset to zero).
Generating a production report will enable to compile all archived reports for a specific period. The period over
which the archived reports are compiled is defined in the "Production report" window (A).
Key to select a one week compilation period from

A Production report configuration window 7
the start date (4)
Key to select a compilation period between the
B All reports compiled according to parameters 8
start date (4) and the end date (9)
1 Open the "Report list" window 9 Key to select compilation period end date
Generate a production report for the selected
2 Open the "Partials list" window 10
period
3 Production report configuration window (A) 11 Go to end of list
4 Enter the compilation period start date 12 Scroll to next page
Enter the compilation period of one day from
5 13 Scroll to previous page
start date (4)
Enter the compilation period of one month from
6 14 Go to start of list
start date (4)
3.9.5.1 Archived report

Previously archived reports and partial reports can be displayed.
Go to the list of reports or partials, press on the line of your selected report to display the report.
In the production report, press the generate key (10) to display the report compilation.
III - 3 - 90/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
15 16 17 18 19 20
1-010364-01-02.svg
15 Key accessing the "Alarm history" window 18 "Production data analysis" window
16 Button for accessing the "Curve history" window 19 Button for selecting the destination reader
17 Press to open the "Fault summary" window 20 Print shift report
For further information, please refer to chapter "Production data anaysis".
For further information, please refer to chapter "Fault summary".
m Alarm history
21
22 23 24 25 26 27
1-010019-02-02.svg
21 Buttons for sorting the alarm list 25 Activate/disactivate "Message" alarm search
22 Activate/disactivate "Critical" alarm search 26 Export active alarms to a drive
23 Activate/disactivate "Alert" alarm search 27 Print list of active alarms
24 Activate/disactivate "Information" alarm search
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 91/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Curves of the history
28
1-010411-01-02.svg
28 Button for printing the curves of the history
3.9.6 Fault summary

The "Fault summary" window enables you to summarize the faults at different parts of the machine.
2 3 4 5 6 7
1-010365-01-02.svg
1 Buttons for sorting the list 5 External fault selection key

2 Internal fault selection key 6 Button for selecting the destination reader
3 Upstream fault selection key 7 Print the fault summary
4 Downstream fault selection key
3.9.7 Monitoring of SIDEL works

The "Monitoring SIDEL works" window allows the user to memorize the different works carried out by SIDEL
technicians.
The client can only read the "Monitoring SIDEL works" window. Only SIDEL technicians can add, modify or delete a
works entry.
III - 3 - 92/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
1-007609-02-02.svg
Lists the steps of the installation included in the

A 5 Works carried out under guarantee
technical acceptance
B Lists the works carried out 6 Machine time counter
1 Date of works 7 Button for accessing the "Add works" window
2 Description of works 8 Button for selecting the destination reader
3 Name of the technician 9 Button for printing the list of completed works
4 Machine time counter
3.9.7.1 Creation of works

The "Works modification" window is accessible, either:
- for adding to the list (B) a recently completed works using the button (7),
- for modifying information relating to works already present in the list of completed works (B), by pressing on the
works line to be modified in (B),
- for deleting, using button (15), the selected works in the list (B).
11 12
10 13
14 C
15 16
1-007610-02-02.svg
C Description of works 13 Works carried out under guarantee

10 Date of works 14
description of the completed works
11 Name of the technician 15 Delete the works description
12 Machine time counter 16 Button for selecting the destination reader
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 93/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.9.8 Production data anaysis

The window "Production data analysis" monitors the production time as well as the number of articles produced.
A B
C 2
1
3 4 D 5 6 7
1-010366-01-02.svg
A Graphic display area 3 Time analysis graph selection key

Preform or article number analysis graph
B Display scale 4
selection key
C Key 5 Display type selection key
D Graph type selection zone 6 Button for selecting the destination reader
1 Minimum scale entry window access key 7 Print production data analysis
Unit selection (time or number of preforms or
2
article or percentage)
III - 3 - 94/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.10 "Alarms" family
BCU-022, BCU-023, BCU-026
3.10.1 Functions
The "Alarms" family enables you to:
- display active alarms,
- locate faults,
- consult the alarm list and weekly history,
- configure alarms,
- visualize alarm statistics.
3.10.2 Description
2
A
11 4
10
12
6
9
7
1-014306-01-02.svg
A Alarms and messages display bar

3 "Active alarms" window access key

4 Open the "Weekly history" window
5 "Alarm search" window access key
6 Open the "Alarm configuration" window
7 "Diagnostic" window access key
8 Door open locator activated
9 Emergency stop locator activated
10 Dot showing an active alarm*
11 Enclosed zone locator activated
12 Alarm statistics window key
* The dots locate faults on the machine and in the electrical cabinet cells. When you position the cursor on any of the dots, a Tool-tip appears. The Tool-
tip indicates the name of the alarm associated with the dot.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 95/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The "Active alarms" window can be accessed from all of the families by pressing key (12) on the navigation
and information bar.
3.10.3 Alarms and messages display bar
The messages and alarms display bar indicates the presence of one or more faults on the machine.
1 Scroll up in the window by each page of 4 messages and/or alarms

2 Scroll down in the window by each page of 4 messages and/or alarms
The maximum number of messages and/or alarms displayed on one page is 5. The plc processes the faults
corresponding to the state of the machine, the PCC displays the corresponding alarms.
3.10.4 Alarm messages and resulting stoppages
3.10.4.1 Types of alarm message
Alarm messages are indicated by the key (1) on the navigation and information bar (always visible). The alarm
message bar (A) in the "Home page" family and the "Alarms" family is displayed in a color code according to alarm
type.
1-006403-08-02.svg
The key (1) changes state with the apeparance of alarms or messages:
- Blue and static when there are no alarms or messages.

- Blue and moving when a message appears.
- Orange and moving when an alarm appears.
· Press the key (1) to determine the cause of the alarm.
The (B) window appears.
The window (B) displays the list of active alarms.
III - 3 - 96/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-010017-01-02.svg
For further information, please refer to chapter "Active alarms".
3.10.4.2 The alarms

The alarms provide information the status of the machine. Alarms may take the appearance of a fault.
Some faults may disappear when the alarm has been acknowledged.
There are 4 types of alarm:

- "Critical" alarms indicate an incident with a continuous siren and an alarm beacon. The plc generates a critical
stoppage and the corresponding fault is displayed on the PCC.
- "Alert" alarms indicate an incident with an intermittent siren and an alarm beacon. The plc generates a
progressive shutdown and the correponding fault is displayed on the PCC.
- The information alarms indicate an incident with an intermittent alarm siren for 5 s. Information alarms do not
stop the machine.
- The "SPC" alarms indicate a process deviant. The "SPC" alarms do not stop the machine.
The "messages" provide information on the progress of production. The "messages" do not set off the alarm siren
or beacon. The "messages" disappear automatically.
3.10.4.3 Shutdowns
There are 2 types of shutdown that can result from a fault; progressive shutdowns and critical shutdowns.
This chapter descibes the main actions that take place when a fault occurs.
m Critical shutdown
When the fault occurs:

- the braking system stops the machine almost immediately,
- the stretching and nozzle cylinders raise,
- the high pressure air circuit and the low pressure air circuit are purged,
- the loading cylinder stops loading preforms on to the feeder plate upstream from the oven,
- the oven lamps switch off,
- the oven cooling system continues to operate,
- the preform distributor continues to function normally.
After the alarm has been acknowledged and corrected, only machine rotation will be authorized. The machine
clears; articles and preforms are ejected to the recycle bins at the transfer turntable. Once the machine is
completely empty, production can restart normally.
If a critical shutdown results from the opening of a door on the blowing machine, the stretching and nozzle
cylinders do not raise.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 97/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Progressive shutdown
When the fault occurs:
- the preforms which are already in the blowing machine are blown,
- when the blowing machine is empty, it stops normally,
- the preform distributor continues to function normally.
3.10.4.4 Acknowledging alarms
m "Critical alarms"
m "Alert" alarms
m "Information" alarms
3.10.5 Active alarms
1 2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-010017-02-02.svg
1 Sort current alarms 6 Activate/disactivate "Information" alarm search

2 Go to previous page 7 Activate/disactivate "Message" alarm search
Alarm search activate/disactivate key "SPC"
3 Go to next page 8
(option)
4 Activate/disactivate "Critical" alarm search 9 Export active alarms to a drive
The active alarms are displayed as a list.

· Press any of the designations (1) to sort (ascending or descending) the alarms by:
- Date and time the alarm occurred.
- Level of the alarm.
- Definition of the alarm (alphabetical order).
III - 3 - 98/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The alarm levels in the list are differentiated by text color:

- Red for Critical alarms.
- Orange for Alert alarms.
- Green for Information alarms.
- Blue color for "Message" alarms.
- Gray for SPC alarms (option).
A "Exx.x" type number preceding the alarm designation corresponds to the plc input connected to the sensor
which detected the fault.
A "#xxxxx" type number preceding the alarm designation does not correspond to a fault detected by a sensor.
3.10.6 Weekly history

When a fault occurs on the machine an alarm is displayed for 1 week. Observations can be attached to the
alarm. The alarm disappears after one week and is saved along with the observation in the annual history.
1 2
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1-010018-01-02.svg
1 Sort current alarms 6 Activate/disactivate "Information" alarm search

2 Go to previous page 7 Activate/disactivate "Message" alarm search
Alarm search activate/disactivate key "SPC"
3 Go to next page 8
(option)
4 Activate/disactivate "Critical" alarm search 9 Export daily history to a drive
· Press any of the designations (1) to sort (ascending or descending) the alarms by:
- Date and time the alarm occurred.
- Level of the alarm.
- Definition of the alarm (alphabetical order).
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 99/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.10.7 Alarm searches
1 2 3 4 5
7 11
9 10 12
1-006949-01-02.svg
1 Enter the "Start date" 7 Open the keyword search window

2 Press to enter "End date" 8 Keyword display field
3 Activate/disactivate "Critical" alarm search 9 "Alarm list" (A) window access key
Selected alarm display zone in "Alarm list"
4 Activate/disactivate "Alert" alarm search 10
window
5 Activate/disactivate "Information" alarm search 11 Search critieria (8 ; 10) delete keys
6 Activate/disactivate "Message" alarm search 12 Alarm search start key
m Alarm list
The "Alarm list" window allows you to select an alarm from the list and search its history from the "Alarm search"
window.
A Alarm selection zone in the list 16 Scroll down the list

13 List navigation cursor 17 Go to the bottom of the list
14 Go to top of the list 18 Update the alarm list
15 Scroll up the list 19 Confirm the alarm selection
A 14 25
20
15 26
21
13 24
22
16 27
18 19 17 23 29 30 28
1-006953-01-02.svg
m Alarm search result
20 Sort search result by "Date/Time" 26 Scroll up the list

Sort search result by Critical, Alert, Information
21 27 Scroll down the list
or Message alarm level
22 Sort search result by description 28 Go to the bottom of the list
III - 3 - 100/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
23 Display the number of alarms in the search result 29 Save search result
24 List navigation cursor 30 Print search result
25 Go to top of the list
3.10.8 Alarm configuration

The "Alarm configuration" window allows you to:
- set "Alert" and "Information" alarms to the next level up using the keys (5),
- define the sound associated with each "Information" alarm.
7
10
11 12 14 2 3 4 13
1-008989-01-02.svg
1 Alarm list 8 Scroll up the list

Select No sound for corresponding "Informaiton"
2 9 Scroll down the list
alarm
Select time-set sound (8 s) for corresponding
3 10 Go to the bottom of the list
"Information" alarm
Select sound for corresponding "Information" Button for exporting alarm configurations on to a
4 11
alarm reader
Activate/disactivate setting to next level up for Button for importing alarm configurations from a
5 12
corresponding alarm reader
6 List navigation cursor 13 Button for printing alarm configurations
7 Go to top of the list 14 Window access key "Reserve alarms"
3.10.8.1 Reserve alarms

The "Reserve alarms" window allows alarms to be added when when the plc program is upgraded.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 101/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 2 3 4
A 6
5 8
11 9
10 7
1-008990-01-02.svg
A Alarm level selection 6 Go to top of the list

1 "Critical alarms" 7 Go to the bottom of the list
2 "Alert" alarms 8 Scroll up the list
3 "Information" alarms 9 Scroll down the list
4 "Message" alarms 10 Export reserve alarms to a drive
5 Alarm name 11 Import reserve alarms from a drive
3.10.9 Scope of printing

The "Print range" window determines the printout criteria.
1
1-008991-01-02.svg
1 Active page selection key 3 Print key

2 Select all pages
3.10.10 Diagnostics
The "Diagnostics" window determines the plc system which is malfunctioning.
III - 3 - 102/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A 1
3 2
4 6
8 10
7 11
1-010766-01-02.svg
Level 1 diagnostics
A List of modules which are faulty or do not 6 Description of faulty card
respond across the entire machine
Level 2 diagnostics
List of faulty modules for: Button for accessing the "Display of controller
B 7
- main electrical cabinet plc, variables" window
- type "ET200S" and "ET200M" plc’s.
Button for accessing the "Display of controller Open the "Network topology and diagnostics"
1 8
variables" window window
2 Scroll down the list 9 Update the diagnostic list
3 Profibus network number 10 Button for selecting the destination reader
4 Slave number (address DP) 11 Button for printing the diagnostic
5 Emplacement number
When the plc system is faulty, the corresponding message appears in the alarm band in the "Alarms" family. Level
1(A) diagnostic indicates the precise nature of the fault and the module concerned.
Level 2(B) diagnostic provides supplementary details:
- the column (3) indicates the emplacement of the fault on the slave concerned,
- column (4) indicates the type of apparatus, the card identification (E = input, A = ouput) and the smallest logic
address on the card.
3.10.10.1Display of controller variables
The "Display of controller variables" window, used for repairing faults, allows the user to access the latest controller
data.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 103/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
11 C
1-007581-01-02.svg
Contents of the controller variable in the selected

11 Button for keying in the controller variable C
format
3.10.11 Alarm statistics (option)
2 3 4 A 5 6 7
8
E 9
1 10
11
D
12
C 16 15 14 13
1-014292-01-02.svg
A Zone (E) scroll keys D Search statistics

B Research results E Alarms category
C Zone (D) scroll keys
1 Search parameter filter number 1 9 Time of search end
2 Search parameter filter number 2 10 Number of filters
3 Search parameter filter number 3 11 Search by parameters
4 Search parameter filter number 4 12 Apply multiple filters
5 Total number of alarms for the selected category 13 Print the search
6 Search start date 14 Export the search
7 Search start time 15 Search parameter filter number 5
Select the result as a percentage or a number of
8 Date of search end 16
alarms occurring
III - 3 - 104/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.11 "History" family

3.11.1 Functions
The "History" family groups together all of the production process variables over one year.
The indicators are refreshed every 10 s.
3.11.2 Description
A 14 13
B H
12
C 11
D 10
3 4 5 E F;G 6
1-008992-01-02.svg
A History charts display zone 4 Chart selection

B Zone duration display (A) 5 Press to open "Chart selection" window
C Start time 6 Display bar (F) or bar (G)
D Start date 7 Open the "Alarm statistics" window

Value at the cursor position on the graph(s)
E 8 Export the history to a drive
selected
F Graph configuration and cursor movement bar 9 Print current window
G Value search bar 10 Press to enter "End date"
Displacement bar for graph(s) selected in the
H 11 Press to enter "End date"
zone (A)
1 Increase the scale in zone (A) 12 Press to enter minimum value on display scale
2 Reduce the scale in zone (A) 13 Press to enter maximumm value on display scale
Operating mode selection key (Manual or
3 Confirm chart display 14
Automatic)
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 105/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.11.3 Simplified navigation through the histogram

3.11.3.1 Window movement
16 17
15
1-008993-01-xx.svg
15 Move by width of one window 17 Parameter evolution in real time

16 Move by width of half window
3.11.3.2 Cursor movement
18 19 20 22 23
21 6
1-008749-01-xx.svg
18 Open the graph profile selection window 21 Move cursor quickly

19 Open the graph profile save window 22 Move cursor slowly
20 Time at cursor position 23 Show/hide cursor
3.11.3.3 Searching for a value
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 6
1-008750-01-xx.svg
Activate the search for value to the left of the

24 Open the selected value entry window 28
cursor
25 Select an increasing value 29 Stop the value search
Activate the search for a value to the right of the
26 Select a reducing value 30
cursor
26 Time at cursor position
3.11.4 Chart selection

In the chart selection window you can:
- Visualise all of the charts available.
- Select a chart to be displayed in the history.
- Move up and down the list using the keys (31).
- Select a chart by pressing on the corresponding line (32).
- Confirm the chart display by pressing (33).
III - 3 - 106/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
32
31
33
1-006720-03-02.svg
3.11.5 Statistics
The "Statistics" window allows the user to display and print (34) the different values of the curves on display.
34
1-007617-03-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 107/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.12 "SPC" family (option)

3.12.1 Functions
The "SPC" family (Statistical Process Control) permits the preventive detection of process quantity drift affecting the
quality of the manufactured items.
The principle of the "SPC" method is to take periodic measurements of the process quantities (oven temperature,
preblowing pressure...) using sensors fitted to the machine. These readings are subjected to statistical analysis to
identify abnormal trends. When a drift is identified, the "SPC" family generates alarms.
The "SPC" function is only active if the machine is in production mode.
SIDEL recommends that a knowledge of statistics and more importantly knowledge of "SPC" is necessary for
this function to be used correctly.
3.12.2 Description
1 2 3
B
C
1-007755-02-02.svg
Display area of the process quantity displayed in

A 3 Button for accessing the "Trend" window
the control card

Button for accessing the "Process summary"
B Control cards 4
window
Button for accessing the "Configuring the "SPC"
C Configuration and display area of the sub-group 5
alarms" window
Button for selecting the process quantity Button for selecting the destination reader
1 6
Access to the "Curve selection" window Back up the control card in "pdf" format
2 Button for accessing the "Capability" window 7 Button for printing the control card
3.12.3 Sub-group
A sub-group is the number of samples (10) of the process quantity, taken for each "SPC" point of the curves,
shown on the control card.
III - 3 - 108/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
10
1-008994-01-02.svg
Buttons for moving the cursor to the previous or

D 8 Scroll up the list
next "Sub-group"
E Time display area of the "Sub-group" 9 Scroll down the list
Contents display area of the "Sub-group" (value
of the "n" samples of the "Sub-group") Button for accessing the window for keying in the
F 10
(minimum and maximum values are indicated in size of the "Sub-group"
red)
Characteristics of a "SPC" point with the
G
contents of the "Sub group" (F)
The user can:

- move from sample sub-group to sample sub-group using the cursor buttons (D) to display the value of the "SPC"
points (G). The time of the cursor position is displayed in (E).
Sample frequency is 10 s. The display of the new "SPC" point on the curves of the control card depends
therefore on the number of samples defined for the sub-group.
3.12.4 Control cards
The control card shows the "SPC" points in the form of (X ; R ; S) curves listed for a year.
The control card, essential tool of the "SPC", supplies information on process variation.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 109/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
XUCL
H
X
XLCL
RUCL
R I
RLCL
SUCL
S
J
K SLCL
L M 11 12
1-007755-04-02.svg
Average of the Process Typical Discrepancy

XUCL Upper control limit of the Process Mean J of all the (Sigma (S)) sub-groups for the
period displayed on the control card
Average of the Process Mean of all the sub-
Lower control limit of the Process Typical
H groups of the period displayed on the control SLCL
Discrepancy,
card
XLCL Lower control limit of the Process Mean K Start time and date of the curves display
RUCL Upper control limit of the Process Range L Display duration of the control cards
Average of the Process Range of all the sub-
Buttons for moving the window in the control
I groups for the period displayed on the control M
cards
card
RLCL Lower control limit of the Process Range 11 Press to enter "End time"
Upper control limit of the Process Typical
SUCL 12 Press to enter "End date"
Discrepancy
Each "SPC" point: mean, long, typical discrepancy (G) is determined by the "SPC" calculating system from the "n"
samples where "n" is equal to the size of the "Sub-group" (10).

m Control limits
Each curve comprises:
- a yellow line known as the central line, which corresponds to the process mean, the process range and the
process typical discrepancy depending on the curve.
- 2 red lines which correspond to the lower "LCL" and upper "UCL" control limits.
The control limits are calculated by the "SPC" system from:

- the process mean,
- the process range,
- the process typical discrepancy,
- the table of constants according to the number of samples taken for each "Sub-group".
The curves move from right to left. The most recent "SPC" points are situated to the right of the curves.
III - 3 - 110/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The user can:
- move in terms of time, using the buttons (M),
- position on a precise moment in the curves by keying in the end time (11) and the end date (12).
All the process quantities are controlled simultaneously, but only one at a time may be displayed (1).
m Interpretation
The control card can supply important information on the variation of the process:
- When the distribution of the measurement points is normal or homogeneous (curve in bell form or Gaussian),
the process is said to be statistically controllable. The majority of the measurement points are centred on the
mean (central line). Some measurement points may be close to the control limits but are not frequent.
- When the measurement points do not fall within the control limits, the process is said to statistically
uncontrollable. The user must therefore identify the cause.
- When a series of measurements is constant, it indicates a malfunction that requires the user to determine the
cause.
m X curve: Sample average
A point on this curve corresponds to the average of the "n" measurements of the "Sub-group" concerned. The "n"
measurements of the "Sub-group" are displayed in (F).
m R curve: Range
A point on this curve corresponds to the range calculated with the "n" measurements (F) of the sub-group
concerned.
m S curve: Typical Discrepancy
A point on this curve corresponds to the typical discrepancy calculated with the "n" measurements (F) of the sub-
group concerned.
3.12.4.1 Chart selection
In the chart selection window you can:
- Visualise all of the charts available.
- Select the curve to be displayed in "SPC".
- Move up and down the list using the keys (13).
- Select a chart by pressing on the corresponding line (14).
- Confirm the chart display by pressing (15).
14 13
15
1-007757-01-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 111/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.12.4.2 Principle of "SPC" calculation

m Average of a sample sub-group
X1, X2, Xn Sample measurements or values of a sub-group
n Number of samples in the sub-group
m Range of a sample sub-group

The range shows the difference between the biggest measurement and the smallest measurement of a sample
sub-group.
Xmax Maximum value of the sub-group samples

Xmin Minimum value of the sub-group samples
m Typical discrepancy of a sample sub-group

The typical discrepancy shows the measurement of the variation or the absolute dispersion. The typical
discrepancy describes how the measurements differ from their mean value.
Xi Values of the sub-group samples
n Number of samples in the sub-group
m Process mean
X1, X2, Xm Averages for each "SPC" point of the control card
m Total number of "SPC" points displayed on the control card
m Process range
R1, R2, Rm Ranges for each "SPC" point of the control card
m Process Typical Discrepancy (Sigma (S))
Typical discrepancies for each "SPC" point of the control

S1, S2, Sm
card
The control limits calculated by the "SPC" system for the Mean, Range and Typical Discrepancy,
approximately specify the 3 Sigma (S) boundaries. In normal distribution, 99,74 % of the measured values fall
within these boundaries.
m Control limits for the Mean "XUCL" ; "XLCL"
A2 Constant
III - 3 - 112/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Control limits for the Range "RUCL" ; "RLCL"
D3, D4 Constant
m Control limits for the Typical Discrepancy "SUCL" ; "SLCL"
B3, B4 Constant
m Skewness "Sk"
The Skewness "Sk" indicator shows the degree of asymmetry of the normal distribution (Gaussian).
Sk > 0 The mean of the distribution is shifted to the right
Sk < 0 The mean of the distribution is shifted to the left
m Kurtosis "Ku"
This indicator shows whether the distribution is peaking or flat.
Ku < 3 Distribution is fine with a relatively high summit
Ku > 3 Distribution is wide with a relatively low summit
m Constant
Size of the "Sub-group" Mean Range Typical Discrepancy

n A2 D3 D4 B3 B4
2 1,880 0 3,267 0 3,267
3 1,023 0 2,574 0 2,568
4 0,729 0 2,282 0 2,266
5 0,577 0 2,114 0 2,089
6 0,483 0 2,004 0,030 1,970
7 0,419 0,076 1,924 0,118 1,882

8 0,373 0,136 1,864 0,185 1,815
9 0,337 0,184 1,816 0,239 1,761
10 0,308 0,223 1,777 0,284 1,716
11 0,285 0,256 1,744 0,321 1,679
12 0,266 0,283 1,717 0,354 1,646
13 0,249 0,307 1,693 0,382 1,618
14 0,235 0,328 1,672 0,406 1,594
15 0,223 0,647 1,653 0,428 1,572
16 0,212 0,363 1,637 0,448 1,552
17 0,203 0,378 1,622 0,466 1,534
18 0,194 0,391 1,608 0,482 1,518
19 0,187 0,403 1,597 0,497 1,503
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 113/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Size of the "Sub-group" Mean Range Typical Discrepancy

n A2 D3 D4 B3 B4
20 0,180 0,415 1,585 0,510 1,490
21 0,173 0,425 1,575 0,523 1,477
22 0,167 0,434 1,566 0,534 1,466
23 0,162 0,443 1,557 0,545 1,455
24 0,157 0,451 1,548 0,555 1,445
25 0,153 0,459 1,541 0,565 1,435
3.12.4.3 Trend curves
D
E
C
D
1-007547-01-02.svg
A Name of the selected process quantity E Display scale

B Display area of the last 100 measured samples 1 Button for selecting the destination reader
Display area of the curve of the selected process
C 2 Print the contents of the trend window
quantity
D Upper "USL" and lower "LSL" tolerance limits
For the selected process quantity, the trend window displays in the form:
- of a table (B), the last 100 measured samples,
- of a curve (C), the development of the process quantity on the sample period.
The most recent measurement is situated at the top of the left column of the area (B). The most ancient
measurement is situated at the bottom of the right column of the area (B).
The measurement points displayed in flashing red in the area (B) are the points that do not fall within the
tolerance limits (D).
III - 3 - 114/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.12.4.4 Capability
1 D
A
F
2 B C B 3 E
1-007546-01-02.svg
A Display area of the curve G Value of the "Cpk", calculated in real time
6 Sigma (S) boundaries of the process, in real
B H Value of the "Sk", calculated in real time
time
C Display area of the process mean value I Value of the "Ku", calculated in real time
Button for keying in the number of "SPC"
D Display scale 1 histogram bars between the boundaries +/- 3
Sigma (S)
Button for keying in the lower "LSL" specification
E Key 2
limit
Button for keying in the upper "USL" limit
F Value of the "Cp", calculated in real time 3
specification
In the display area of the curve (A), are shown:

- the histogram of the process quantity by vertical green bars,
- the normal distribution (Gaussian) by a white curve,
- the mean process value (central ligne) by a vertical yellow line,
- the +/- 3 Sigma (S) boundaries by 2 vertical lines of blue dots,
- the "LSL" and "USL" tolerance limits by 2 vertical purple lines.
For each process quantity selected in the "SPC" family, the user fixes the tolerance limits "LSL" and "USL" (2 ;
3) which will guarantee the quality of the manufactured item.
The key area (E), displays the values "Cp ; Cpk ; Sk ; Ku" (F ; G ; H ; I) calculated in real time by the "SPC"
system. The key area (E) is an aid for interpreting the curve.
m Capability "Cp"
"Cp" shows the capability of a process to remain within the tolerance limits fixed by the user. A process is
considered "capable" (J) when the percentage of the measurements situated in the tolerance interval is greater
than a predefined value. The tolerance interval is equal to +/- 3 Sigma (S) from the mean value, this means that
99,74 % of measurements fall within the tolerance interval.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 115/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
J K
LSL USL LSL USL
1-007837-01-xx.svg
J The process quantity is "Capable" K The process quantity is "Not Capable"
The "Cp" capability is the ratio between the tolerance interval and 6 Sigma (S).
This indicator shows whether the distribution of the measurement points falls within the tolerance interval.
The variations of the process quantity remain within the

Cp > 1,0 tolerance limits "LSL" and "USL"
The process quantity is capable
Cp < 1,0 The process quantity is not capable
m Process capability "Cpk"

The process capability "Cpk" is similar to the "Cp" capability. This indicator shows where the mean is in relation to
the tolerance limits "LSL" and "USL" keyed in by the user. This indicator mathematically clarifies the "Cp"
capability.
To carry out the calculation, take the lowest of the 2 numerators indicated in the fraction below.
The process mean does not fall within the tolerance

Cpk < 0
limits
The process mean is equal to 1 of the 2 tolerance
Cpk = 0
limits
Cpk > 0 The process mean falls within the tolerance limits
One of the sides of the 6 Sigma (S) interval falls
Cpk = 1,0
within the tolerance limits
The 6 Sigma (S) interval falls entirely within the
Cpk > 1,0
tolerance limits
This indicator is also called the centring indicator.

3.12.4.5 Summary of the process
The "Process summary" window lists the latest measurements and calculations of all the process quantities.
III - 3 - 116/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10
11 12
1-007560-01-02.svg
A List of the process quantities 7 Typical Discrepancy

1 Lower "LSL" specification limit 8 Units of measurement
2 Minimum value measured 9 Scroll up the list
3 Last value measured 10 Scroll down the list
4 Maximum value measured 11 Button for selecting the destination reader
5 Upper "USL" specification limit 12 Print the process summary
6 Mean value
The measurement points that do not fall within the "LSL" and "USL" tolerance limits signal a drift in the
process. The user can display the control card, the process quantity that falls out of the tolerance limits, in the
"SPC" family to study its variation through time.
3.12.4.6 Configuration of the "SPC" alarms
The "SPC" function allows the user to permanently monitor the drift of all the process quantities. The ""SPC" alarm
configuration" window allows the user to configure the different types of checks that may be carried out, these are:
- For all the process quantities, except the current process quantity (C).
- For none of the process quantities (D).
- For all the process quantities (E).
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 117/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3
1
4
2
C
D
A
B E
6 7
5 8
1-007561-01-02.svg
Button for validating / revoking the monitoring

A List of alarms monitoring the process quantities 4
alarm controlling all the process quantities
Key words of the alarms monitoring the process Export the configuration of the monitoring alarms
B 5
quantities to a reader
Button for selecting the display of the list of Import the configuration of the monitoring alarms
1 6
monitoring alarms linked to the process mean from a reader
Button for selecting the display of the list of
2 7 Button for selecting the destination reader
monitoring alarms linked to the process range
Button for validating / revoking the monitoring
3 8 Print the configuration of the monitoring alarms
alarm controlling the current process quantity
The user has at his disposal:

- 12 monitoring alarms linked to the process mean, accessed via the button (1), The key word of each monitoring
alarm begins with the prefix "X" followed by the English abbreviation of the monitoring alarm.
- 3 monitoring alarms linked to the process range, accessed via the button (2). The key word of each monitoring
alarm begins with the prefix "R" followed by the English abbreviation of the monitoring alarm.
The revocation of a monitoring alarm for all the process quantities (4) takes priority over the validation or
revocation of the monitoring alarm for the current process quantity (3), see the example in the area (F). ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
III - 3 - 118/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Definition of the monitoring alarms for the process mean
+/- 2 S
+/- 3 S
1-007840-01-xx.svg
Falls out of one of the "XUCL" and "XUCL" 3 consecutive "SPC" points of the process mean fall
XOutsideCL
control limits outside the "XUCL" and "XLCL" control limits
3 consecutive "SPC" points of the process mean are
XAboveUCL Over the upper "XUCL" control limit
over the upper "XUCL" control limit
3 consectutive "SPC" points of the process mean fall
XBelowLCL Under the lower "XLCL" control limit
below the lower "XLCL" control limit
This monitoring alarm is set off when a "SPC" point of
A point off the median line (central line) by
XFreak the mean process falls outside an interval by +/- 2
more than 2 Sigma (S)
Sigma (S)
5 consecutive "SPC" points of the mean process fall
Out of the warning limits: 67 % of the "XUCL"
XOutsideW outside the warning limits, corresponding to 67 % of the
and "XLCL" control limits
"XUCL" and "XLCL" control limits
8 consecutive "SPC" points of the mean process are
XGradualUp Progressive increase over the mean
over the central line and drifting upwards.
8 consecutive "SPC" points of the process mean are
XGradualDn Progressive decrease under the mean
over the central line and drifting downwards.
5 "SPC" points of the mean process are subject to
XUpTrend Constant increase of the mean
consecutive and continuous increase.
5 "SPC" points of the proces mean are subject to
XDnTrend Constant decrease of the mean
consecutive and continuous decrease
Major fluctuations in the upper "XUCL" and 3 "SPC" points of the process mean undergo major and
XErratic
"XLCL" control limits irregular fluctuation
Several consecutive points close to the 15 "SPC" points of the process mean are constant in the
XStratific
median line by less than 1 Sigma (S) interval by +/- 1 Sigma (S) and the central line
Several consecutive points off the median 8 consecutive "SPC" points of the process mean are
XMixture
line by more than +/- 1 Sigma (S) over and under the central line by more than Sigma (S)
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 119/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Definition of the monitoring alarms of the process range
3
1
4
2
E
6 7
5 8
1-007758-01-02.svg
Falls out of one of the "RUCL" and "RLCL" 3 consecutive "SPC" points of the process range fall
ROutsideCL
control limits outside the "RUCL" and "RLCL" control limits
3 consecutive "SPC" points of the process range are
RAbove Over the upper "RAbove" control limit
over the upper "RUCL" and "RLCL" control limit
3 consecutive "SPC" points of the process range are
RBelowLCL Under the lower "RBelowLCL" control limit
under the lower "RUCL" and "RLCL" control limit
III - 3 - 120/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.13 "Maintenance" family

3.13.1 General presentation
The "Maintenance" family manages all of the preventive maintenance operations that need to be carried out on the
machine. Operator-level users have read-only access.
When the machine is first started, the Maintenance family allows the supervisor to confirm all of the sub-assemblies
physically present on the machine which require preventive maintenance.
3.13.1.1 What is preventive maintenance?
Preventive maintenance consists of carrying out actions with the intention of reducing the possibility that a machine
component may malfunction.
Preventive maintenance is based on a list of operations prepared and scheduled to be completed before the
probable date of a malfunction.
The objectives of preventive maintenance are as follows:
- increase machine reliability,
- reduce operating malfunctions,
- lengthen the effective service life of the equipment,
- improve the way in which works are organized,
- reduce and regulate the work load.
Preventive maintenance is composed of 2 stages:
- The first stage involves a periodic inspection of the condition of the machine components. These inspections
enable the collection of information which will establish laws for wear and tear as well as levels of tolerance,
- The second stage consists of enriching this basic data in the list of actions to improve the reliability of the
frequency of these actions. The second stage improves the operation of the machine.
3.13.1.2 Preventive maintenance as applied to the SBO UniversalTM machine
In the Maintenance family the machine is divided into X sections:
- preform feeder,
- oven,
- blow wheel,
- frame,
- control system.
Each section is sub-divided into functional assemblies based on broad operating principles.
Each assembly is divided into sub-assemblies which correspond to specific unitary parts on the machine.
A coding system identifies each sub-assembly on the machine.
The coding system is as follows:
- a 2-figure number for the category,
- a coded letter from A to Z for each of the assemblies in a category,
- a coded 3-figure number for each of the sub-assemblies.
Example 03D001:
- "Blow wheel" category: 03,

- "Blowing block" assembly: D,
- "Blowing solenoid valve" sub-assembly: 001.
The system is linked to a counter to which a period of time is attributed. A maintenance alarm appears when any of
the action frequencies is exceeded. The action frequency can be modified to improve the quality of the
maintenance.
In the case of curative maintenance and on certain sub-assemblies this data can be entered by the user in order to
trace operations.
In the Maintenance family, the scrolling bar displays the list of actions to be carried out in real time.
3.13.2 Functions
The Maintenance family shows the condition of the sub-assemblies in real time. All completed maintenance
operations are recorded in the maintenance family.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 121/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.13.3 Description
13
A
1
14
2
7
8 3
4
9
6
10 5
11 12
1-014356-01-02.svg
A Scheduled maintenance actions display bar

1 Navigate the list on the bar (A)
2 Button for accessing the window for keying in the "commissioning date of the machine"
3 Open the "Maintenance schedule" window
4 Button for importing the state of the maintenance module
5 Button for the overall initializing of the maintenance module
6 Button for exporting the state of the maintenance module
7 Open the "Explorer" window in the "Preform feeder" category (option)
8 Open the "Explorer" window in the "Oven" category
9 Open the "Explorer" window in the "Blow wheel" category
10 Open the "Explorer" window in the "Frame" category
11 Open the "Explorer" window in the "Control system" category
12 Open the "Explorer" window in the "Hygiene" cataegory (depending on the machine configuration)
14 Open the "Parameterizable maintenance" window
The bar (A) indicates the presence of actions that need to be carried out.
· Press on the line (13) to display the sub-assembly corresponding to the action to be carried out.
When the machine is in production, the "maintenance schedule" window (3) cannot be accessed.
3.13.4 Maintenance explorer

The "Explorer" window lists the following:
- all assemblies associated (1) with the category displayed,
- all sub-assemblies (2) associated with the assembly.
III - 3 - 122/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 4
1-006779-01-02.svg
3 Go up or down the list

4 Go up or down the list line by line
· Press on a sub-assembly (2 ; 5) to open the corresponding "Maintenance operation" window.

In order to optimize preventive maintenance, the supervisor must:
- confirm all of the sub-assemblies physically present (2) on the machine,
- unconfirm the sub-assemblies absent (5) from the machine.
5 2
1-006780-01-02.svg
Sub-assemblies are confirmed and unconfirmed in the "Maintenance operations" window.
3.13.5 Maintenance operations

The "Maintenance operations" window provides information on the condition of a sub-assembly according to the
following:
- the action frequency (1) (cycle time),
- the progress of the action (2) associated with the sub-assembly represented as a percentage and a time period
in hours or number of cycles,
- the maintenance action to be carried out (inspection, replacement, settings etc.).
Completed maintenance operations can be recorded in the "Maintenance operations" window by pressing the key
(6).
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 123/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
5
A
6
1-007620-01-02.svg
A Reference of the works sheet of the sheet Catalogue, associated with this maintenance operation
3 Change part number (station, arm, spindle etc.)
4 Confirm/unconfirm sub-assembly physically present
5 Open the "Maintenance history" window
6 Confirm and open the sub-assembly window
m Confirmation symbols
7 8 9 10 11
1-006782-01-xx.svg
7 Greasing and/or lubrication procedure confirmation

8 Removal/Refit procedure confirmation
9 Inspection/cleaning procedure confirmation
10 Safety inpsection procedure confirmation
11 Setting procedure confirmation
3.13.5.1 Maintenance history

The "Maintenance history" window lists information relating to maintenance actions corresponding to a sub-
assembly. ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
III - 3 - 124/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 4
2 3
6 7
5 8
1-008995-01-02.svg
1 Maintenance actions date 5 Display an element on a sub-assembly

2 Intervention frequency (in hours or cycles) 6 Display all of the elements on a sub-assembly
Display showing the number(s) affected by the
3 7 Export the maintenance history to a drive
maintenance actions and comments
4 Name of the person who confirmed the action 8 Print the maintenance history
3.13.6 Maintenance sub-assembly

The "Maintenance sub-assembly" window controls actions and observations relating to the maintenance of a sub-
assembly and its parts.
An action or observation can be confirmed for:
- a single part,
- all of the parts in a sub-assembly (for example, oven module no.x or oven modules nos.1 to 10 for an SBO
10/10).
1 3
2 4
1-006784-01-02.svg
1 Attribute an action and/or an observation to a single part

2 Attribute an action and/or a comment to all parts
3 Open the "Maintenance action observation" window (A)
4 Confirm the maintenance action and/or observation in progress
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 125/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-006785-01-02.svg
3.13.7 Maintenance schedule

The "Maintenance schedule" window allows the user to display, in real time, the progress of the maintenance
operations.
An Operator-level user can access the following information:
- All the maintenance operations (1).
- The operations falling due (2) at the due date (3).
1 2 3 4 5
1-007619-01-02.svg
A Display concerning the state of progress of the maintenance operation

1 Button for selecting the complete display of the maintenance operations
2 Button for selecting the display of the maintenance operations falling due
3 Button for accessing the window for keying in the deadline
4 Button for selecting the destination reader
5 Button for printing the maintenance schedule
Indication of the number of days remaining before the execution of a maintenance operation, displays after a
certain machine operating period. This indication is calculated more precisely according to experience.
3.13.8 Parameterizable maintenance
The "Parameterizable maintenance" window enables you to define new maintenance operations in addition to the
standard maintenance operations list.
III - 3 - 126/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.13.8.1 Maintenance explorer
A
1
1-014358-01-xx.svg
A Scroll keys
1 Machine families
2 Maintenance operations
3 Import parameterized operations
4 Export parameterized operations
3.13.8.2 Setting the maintenance operation parameters
1-014357-01-02.svg
A Type of maintenance operation

B Frequency of the maintenance operation
1 Name of the maintenance operation
2 Description of the maintenance operation
3 Delete selected operation
4 Confirm selected operation
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 127/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.14 "Settings" family
BSU-002
BCU-013
BPU-006, BPU-007, BPU-008
BNE-005, BNM-009
3.14.1 Functions
Position the operating mode switch key (Y) on "Settings" mode (Z) to test new machine settings, For further
information, please refer to chapter "Control and command panel" .
1-015491-01-xx.svg
The "Settings" family allows you to carry out the following tests:
- Blowing test.
- Testing the solenoids on the fixed section.
- Oven test.
- Preform feeder test.
The test windows in the "Settings" family are only accessible if the machine is stopped.
The test windows in the "Settings" family are only accessible if all of the machine safety doors are closed.
identical.
III - 3 - 128/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.14.2 Description
A
11
1
2
10
3
4
9
5
6
8
1-011727-01-02.svg
A Machine doors open display

Open the "Test solenoid valves in rotation"
1 2 Open the "JOG rotation" window
window
3 Check the alarm beacons 4 Open the "Brake efficiency" window
5 "Diagnostic" window access key 6 "Cabinet configuration" window access key
Window access key "Hygiene test" (depending
7 8 Open the "Oven test" window
on the machine configuration)
Open the "Feeder test" window (depending on
9 10 Open the "Fixed solenoid valves test" window
the machine configuration)
11 Open the "Blowing test" window
3.14.3 Blowing test

The "Blowing test" allows you to test the solenoid valves on a blowing station one by one, see
procedure "BPU-006".
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 129/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4 1 2 5 3 6
10
B
13
C
15
D
16
E
17 14 11 12 9
1-010758-01-02.svg
Test zone (the station to be tested is located in

A 7 Stretching control key
the white zone)
Nozzle cylinder control key
B Pressure in the low pressure circuit 8 First stage nozzle cylinder control key
Second stage nozzle cylinder control key
C Pressure in the high pressure circuit 9
D Pressure in the mold 10 Button for controlling "Push-up" (option)
E Solenoid valve "TORNADO" control pressure 11 Push-up base control key (option)
Button for controlling the bleeding of the air
F Control pressure of the nozzles 12
recycling system (option)
1 Preblowing control key 13 Preblowing circuit purge control key
Button for controlling the solenoid valves that
2 Blowing control key 14 pressurize the blowing circuit (option according
to model)
3 Exhaust control key 15 Low pressure air supply key
4 Piloted compensation control key (option) 16 High pressure air supply key
5 Air sweep control key (option) 17 Blow station number selection key
6 Air recovery control key (option)
The keys (2 ; 4) are active only if:

- the blow wheel has completed at least 1 full rotation,
- no mold locking faults have occurred on the last rotation,
- all of the saftey doors are closed.
All safety doors must be closed before turning on the high and low pressure air supplies.
3.14.4 Testing the solenoids on the fixed section

The "Fixed solenoid valves test" window allows each of the solenoid valves to be tested one by one, see
III - 3 - 130/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
48 18
47 19
46 20
45 21
44 22
43 23
42 24
41 25
40 26
27
28
39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 E D C B A
1-015966-01-02.svg
To test the solenoid valves, first turn on the low pressure air supply by pressing key (1).
To turn on the high and low pressure air supplies all machine doors must be closed.
A Flow of air to mold bodies D Pressure in the low pressure circuit

B Flow of air to mold bases and necks E Oven water flow
C Pressure in the low pressure circuit
"Perma" greasing control key (option according
1 High pressure air supply key 25
to model)
Cam greasing selection key (option according to
2 Atomizer nozzle drying control key (option) 26
model)
3 UV rail (option) lamps selection key 27 Button for controlling the lubrication of the cams
Bearing greasing control key (option according to
4 Bottle outfeed retractable guide control key 28
model)
5 Loading air-jet control key 29 Button for controlling spraying
6 Infeed wheel stop-pin control key 30 Mold necks and bases water circuit control key
Button for controlling the spraying solenoid

7 Infeed wheel retractable guide control key 31
valves
8 Aspirator control key (option) 32 Mold body water circuit control key
Bottle ejection at inspection module key (option
9 Eject preforms at the preform transfer 33
according to model)
10 Dedust solenoid valve control key (option) 34 Eject bottles at the bottle transfer
Distribution oven cooling by "VORTEX"
11 Eject preforms before oven 35
command key*
Pitch change wheel retractable guide control key Misloaded preform ejection cylinder number
12 36
(depending on model) select key*
13 Oven coolant flow pump control key (option) 37 Misloaded preform ejection cylinder number*
14 Brake control key 38 Misloaded preform ejection key*
Misloaded preform ejection cylinder number
15 Oven water circuit control key 39
select key*
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 131/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Button for controlling the cooling of items by

16 Button for controlling brake No. 2 (option) 40
"VORTEX" (option)
Button for controlling the ionization of the
17 41 Eject bottles from conveyor
preforms (option)
Button for controlling the quick stripping of the Control key for drying the sprayer nozzles at the
18 42
preforms (option) double bottle outfeed (option)
"Predis" drain control key (option according to
19 Manual rotation lock 43
model)
Start air supply to the sprayer at the double
20 Oven wheel brake command key* 44
bottle outfeed (option)
Start water supply to the sprayer at the double
21 Foodstuff-grade grease spray key (option) 45
bottle outfeed (option)
22 Stretching cam greasing control key 46 Turn on air supply to atomizer (option)
23 No-load control key (option according to model) 47 Turn on water supply to atomizer (option)
24 Loading cam greasing command key (option) 48 Low pressure air supply key
3.14.5 Solenoid valve test in operation

The "test solenoid valves in rotation" window enables you to test the solenoids while the blowing stations are in
operation.
11
10 1
9 2
5
A
4
B
3
1-011729-01-02.svg
The machine must be in operation to test the solenoids.
The values entered (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) are to test the solenoids. The values have no effect on the production
parameters.
A Control pressure of the nozzles B Pressure in the low pressure circuit

Open the second-stage nozzle raise data entry
Open the first-stage nozzle raise data entry
1 2 window (depending on the machine
window
configuration)
3 Output rate setting key 4
position of the end of "Pushed-up base"
5 6 "Pushed-up base" control key
position of the start of "Pushed-up base"
III - 3 - 132/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
7 Open the stretching rod raise data entry window 8 Stretching command key
Open the first-stage nozzle lower data entry
9 10 Nozzle cylinder control key
window
Open the second-stage nozzle lower data entry
11 window (depending on the machine
configuration)
3.14.6 Oven test

The "Oven test" window allows you to check the oven lamps, see procedure "BPU-007".
2 A
B C
5
3 6
4 7
1-010761-01-02.svg
Only one oven zone can be active at any time.
Switch on the oven zone to be tested to enter the heating percentage (5).
The heating percentage for the zone (5) to be tested is limited to a maximum of 5 %.
Switch off the heating command (3) to close the "Oven test" window.
A Oven zones status display 4 Heating control key

Open the heating percentage entry window for
B Temperature of the fluids in the ovens 5
the selected zone
C Oven water flow 6 Window access key "X preform neck cooling"
Open the oven air extraction percentage window
1 Oven zone selection key 7
(option)
Open the data entry window for the number of
2 8 Window access key "Preform neck cooling"
the oven to be tested
3 Half-oven selection key
3.14.6.1 X preform neck cooling (option)
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 133/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.14.6.2 Preform neck cooling (option)
3.14.7 Preform feeder test (option)

The "Preform feeder test" window allows you to test the preforms feeder system in operation, see
The "Feeder test" can only be accessed when the preform feeder is stopped.
The visual may be different depending on the machine model and configuration.
1 10 6 2 3 7 4 11 8 12 13
15
14
19
18
20
22
23
25
29 26 30 16 31 27 32 28 24 21 17
1-010762-01-02.svg
Select the ejection system stop pin for preforms

1 45 ° Unscrambler unit selection key 17
which are too long
2 Preform recycle belt selection key 18 Moto-turbine selection key
3 Hopper vibrator selection key* 19 Hopper ionizer selection key*
Select the air shield at the start of the
4 20 Select the unscrambler roller ionizer*
unscrambler rollers*
5 Select the aspirator at the unscrambler roller exit* 21 Select reverse for the small hopper recycle belt*
6 Select the hopper over-pressure unit* 22 Rollers conveyor belt reverse key*
Select preform blockage at unscrambler roller
7 23 Rollers conveyor belt forward key*
exit*
8 Select air shield at unscrambler roller exit* 24 Select forward for the small hopper recycle belt*
Hopper elevator column select key*
9 Service air supply 25
Remote hopper elevator column select key*
Open the data entry window for the hopper
elevator column run instruction*
10 Select fallen preform ejection system* 26
Open the data entry window for the remote
hopper elevator column run instruction*
11 Select fallen preform ejection system purge* 27 Small hopper select key*
Open the data entry window for the small hopper
12 Conveyor selection key* 28
elevator column run instruction*
III - 3 - 134/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
13 Conveyor reverse key* 29 Unscrambler rollers selection key

Open the data entry window for the unscrambler
14 UV rail lamp select key* 30
rollers run instruction
Select ejection system for preforms which are Hopper selection key*
15 31
too long* Remote hopper select key*
Open the data entry window for the hopper run
Purge ejection system for preforms which are too instruction*
16 32
long* Open the data entry window for the remote
hopper run instruction*
Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator start/stop" key on the lower display bar PCC is
activated.
33
34
1-006375-17-xx.svg
The buttons (33 ; 34) located on the unscrambler roller unit frame have the same function ast the "Preform
elevator start/stop" key on the lower display bar of the PCC.
These buttons (33 ; 34) are used to:
- Start or stop the various parts of the unscrambler rollers as selected in the "Feeder test" window in order to
observe their performance in contact with the preforms.
- Restart the preform feeder from the gantry after any operator intervention.
3.14.8 Hygiene test (depending on the machine configuration)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1-015968-02-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 135/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Window access key "Preform decontamination Window access key "Filler blower isolation test"
1 5
test" (depending on the machine configuration)
2 Window access key "Oven UV lamps test" 6 Window access key "Infeed rail UV lamp test"
3 Window access key "Surface disinfection test" 7 Window access key "Sprayer test"
Window access key "Filter steam sterilization
4
test" (depending on the machine configuration)
3.14.8.1 Preform decontamination test
9 1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
1-011730-01-02.svg
A Fixed diffuser position display

Button for controlling the bleeding of the preform
Control key for preform decontamination liquid
1 decontamination liquid circuit of station 2 2
line purge at station 1
(option)
Control key for opening the preform Control key for preform decontamination tank
3 4
decontamination tank filling line filling pump
5 Preform decontamination extractor control key 6 power of the vapour extractor in preform
decontamination
Control key for preform decontamination fixed Control key for preform decontamination aseptic
7 8
diffuser clamping solution tank pressurization
Control key for preform decontamination

9
evaporation station air supply line
For further information, please refer to chapter "The "Hygiene" family"
III - 3 - 136/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.14.8.2 Oven UV lamps test
3 2
1-011731-01-02.svg
For machines fitted with 2 UV chambers, the screen only shows 2 UV chambers.
Display showing the temperature in the preform

A B Display zone showing the UV lamp operation
exterior decontaminaiton module
Control key for the preform exterior Oven UV cooling setpoint entry window access
1 2
decontamination module cooling system key
Control key for the UV lamps in the preform
3
exterior decontamination modules
3.14.8.3 Surface disinfection test
3 6 8 10 12 14
1
2
9
4
11
5 13
1-010605-01-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 137/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Control key for the solenoid valve controlling the

Control key for the disinfectant tank
1 8 supply of disinfectant to the bottle transfer grips
pressurization solenoid valve
spray nozzles
Control key for the manual disinfection system Control key for the air supply solenoid to the
2 9
air supply solenoid valve preform transfer grips spray nozzles
Control key for the solenoid valve controlling the Control key for the solenoid valve controlling the
3 supply of disinfectant to the manual disinfection 10 supply of disinfectant to the preform transfer
system grips
Control key for the solenoid valve controlling the
Control key for the nozzles and molds
4 11 supply of air to the oven wheel plate spray
disinfection system cylinder operation
nozzle
5 supply of air to the nozzles and molds spray 12 supply of disinfectant to the oven wheel plate
nozzles spray nozzle
6 supply of disinfectant to the nozzle and mold 13 supply of air to the oven outfeed guide spray
spray nozzles nozzle
7 supply of air to the bottle transfer grips spray 14 supply of disinfectant to the oven outfeed guide
nozzles spray nozzle
3.14.8.4 Filter steam sterilization test (depending on the machine configuration)
1-010606-01-02.svg
1 Steam inlet solenoid valve control button 4 Condensate purge solenoid valve control button
Filter temperature raise solenoid valve control
2 Upstream blowing circuit isolating control button 5
key
Blowing circuit downstream isolating solenoid

3
valve control key
III - 3 - 138/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.14.8.5 Filler blower isolation test (depending on the machine configuration)
1
6
2
5
3
1-011732-01-02.svg
1 Seal inflate solenoid control key 2 Gate solenoid control key

3 Retractable guide solenoid control key 4 Service air supply
5 Torque-hold solenoid control key 6 Torque engage solenoid control key
7 Bottle outfeed guide solenoid control key
5 7

4 6
3.14.8.6 Infeed rail UV lamp test (depending on the machine configuration)
2
3
1-015967-01-02.svg
1 UV rail ventilation control key 3 UV rail lamp control key

2 UV rail ventilation setpoint
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 139/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.14.8.7 Sprayer test (depending on the machine configuration)
7 2
6
3
5
4
1-015968-01-02.svg
1 Extraction hood ventilation control key 5 Status of can filling solenoid valve
2 Sprayer control key 6 Status of sprayer circuit filter
Status of spray system pressurization solenoid
3 Spray system pressure display 7
valve
4 Can filling pump control key
3.14.9 Jog rotation controls

The "JOG rotation" window allows you to:
- rotate the machine using the JOG system,
- maintain the low pressure air supply to the machine when safety doors are open.
B
1
A 2
1-011733-01-02.svg
A Message display bar B Angular position of mold number 1

Oven synchronization command key (depending
1 2 Low pressure air supply key
on the machine configuration)
Preform dedust air supply solenoid command
3 Display of the pressure of the dedust circuit 4
key (depending on the machine configuration)
5 JOG locator active
III - 3 - 140/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
For further information, please refer to chapter "JOG".
3.14.10 Diagnostics
3.14.11 Brake efficiency

The "Brake efficiency" window displays the efficiency of the braking system.
1-010415-01-02.svg
Opens the entry field for the brake efficiency

A Display showing the brake efficiency 1
threshold
B Braking duration in number of blowing stations
3.14.12 Configuring the cabinets

The "Cabinet configuuration" window enables you to configure each heating cabinet individually.
E A
D 1
C B
3 2
1-011734-01-02.svg
A Fault on a cabinet B Message display bar

C Cabinet modification in progress D At least one lamp is active in each cabinet
E No lamps active in the cabinet

1 Cabinet activate/deactivate key 2 Cabinet confguration reinitialize key
3 Cabinet configuration confirm key
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 141/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.15 "Options" family
BCU-021
3.15.1 Functions
The Options family allows you to configure the PCC application with regard to the machine and to set up and
confirm certain functions.
3.15.2 Description
1 3
4 6
1-007626-01-02.svg
1 "Machine parameters" window access key 4 Open the "Option selection" window
2 Open the "PCC parameters" window 5 Open the "Customize production" window
3 Open the "Filler" window (option) 6 Open the "Option summary" window
3.15.3 Machine parameter settings

Setting these parameters will confirm the basic functions of the machine.
Stop the machine before carrying out this operation.
Incorrect parameter settings will cause the machine to malfunction.
Some of the parameters are not accessible depnding on the type of machine.
III - 3 - 142/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-010387-01-02.svg
Machine number entry key the number will be

1 4 Enter the minimum output rate
printed an all paper print-outs
Set the parameters for the bottle ejection
2 Enter the minimum exhaust time 5
sensors
3 Enter the maximum output rate 6 Machine parameters initialisation confirm key
3.15.4 PCC parameter settings

The "PCC parameters" window is where you can set the following parameters:
- system time,
- system date,
- screensaver parameters,
- language,
- user access levels,
- misc..
21 1
20 2
19 3
18 4
17 6
16 5
15 7
14 8
13 22
12 9
11 10
1-014174-01-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 143/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Select the destination drive for the import of the "Application security intialisation" window
1 2
application security* access*
3 "Keypad selection" window 4 "Screensaver" settings
5 Touchscreen calibration 6 "Printers" window
Turn on and off operator action confirmation
7 8 Screen cleaning key
request
"System network connection" window access
9 "System property" window access key* 10
key*
Select the destination drive for the system data
11 IP CPU address setting key* 12
back-up
13 "Documentation update" window 14 "PCC application update" window
Button for accessing the "Archive deletion"
15 16 Open the "System information" window
window
17 "Calculator" 18 "Measurement unit" window
19 "Change language" window 20 "User management" window
Select the destination drive for the export of the
21 22 Disconnect from the USB
application security*
* Accessible only by the administrator
3.15.4.1 User management
The "User management" window is only accessible to the PCC administrator.
The "User management" window allows the administrator to:

- Creating a new user account.
- Modify an existing user account.
- Delete a user account.
- Set the length of time after which a user will automatically be logged out if no actions have been entered in the
PCC.
- Sort the user list.
1
8
2
5 4
1-010385-04-02.svg
1 Sort users by alphabetical order from lowest to highest level or vice versa
2 Go to prior/next page in the user list
3 Open the Automatic logout window
4 Print a list of users
5 Open the "Create user" window
III - 3 - 144/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
6 User update key
7 Access "Edit user" window to modify or delete the user account for this line
8 Sort the users by ascending/descending in alphabetical order
m Creating a new user account
m Modify or delete a user account
Each user level must include at least 1 user.
3.15.4.2 Units of measurement
The "Measurement units" window is only accessible at supervisor access level.
You can select the units of measurement for the following:

- Length.
- Weight .
- Volume .
- Output rate.
- Pressure.
- Temperature.
- Flow .
1-011736-01-02.svg
The units selected in the "Measurement units" window will be applied to all screens, graphs and printouts.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 145/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.15.4.3 Changing the language
1-011737-01-02.svg
· Press a key (1) to select a language.
The application will switch to the selected language.
3.15.4.4 Selecting the keyboard
Select the type of virtual keyboard for entering alphanumerical characters.
1 2
4 3 5
1-006725-04-02.svg
1 Select "QWERTY" keyboard

2 Select "AZERTY" keyboard

3 Select keyboard with characters specifc to the current language
4 Select "ABCDEF" keyboard
The "Keyboard selection" window can also be accessed by pressing (5) on the virtual keyboard.
3.15.4.5 Updating the PCC

The function accessed in supervisor mode allows the user to install PCC application updates.
· Select the source reader containing the update to be executed, after confirmation of the update.
3.15.4.6 Screensaver
The "Screen saver" window allows the user to define the display parameters of the screen saver.
III - 3 - 146/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 4
2 5
3 6
1-007579-01-02.svg
Button for activating and deactivating the display

Button for activating and deactivating the rate
1 5 showing the general percentage of the heating
display
power applied to the oven
Button for activating and deactivating the preform Button for activating and deactivating the time
2 6
temperature display display
Button for activating and deactivating the bottle Button for accessing the window for keying in the
3 7
counter display activation delays for the screen saver
Button for activating and deactivating the
4
external temperature display
3.15.4.7 System information

The "System information" window shows the status of the different parts of the system (memories, versions etc.)
1-008968-01-02.svg
3.15.4.8 Printers
The "Printers" window allows the user to choose the default printer.
1-006728-01-02.svg
3.15.4.9 Deleting archives
The "Archive deletion" window can only be accessed by a SIDEL technician.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 147/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
3.15.5 Filler (option)

The "Filler" window allows the user to display the state of communication between the filler and the blower.
A 1
2 B
1-010562-02-02.svg
Window for displaying the information Indicators showing the state of the transmitted
A 2
transmitted from the blower to the filler information
Window for displaying the information
B 3 Window access key "Filler blower isolation"
transmitted from the filler to the blower
Button for activating and deactivating the slave
1
function of the blower
3.15.5.1 Filler blower isolation
4 5
1-015969-01-02.svg
1 Isolation cycle activation key 4 Isolation gate seal low pressure

2 Isolation confirm key 5 Isolation gate seal high pressure

3 Isolation gate seal pressure
3.15.6 Option selection

Options selection enables you to confirm options physically present on the machine which were not covered in the
"Machine parameters" section.
Stop the machine before carrying out this operation.
If the machine parameters are not set correctly, the machine may malfunction.
The options to be confirmed are classified by page. These pages can be accessed by pressing the
corresponding tab.
III - 3 - 148/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-007629-01-02.svg
1 "Wheel" page access key 5 "Miscellaneous" page access key

2 "Oven" page access key 6 "Preform feeder" page access key
3 "Sensors" page access key 7 Scroll up the list
4 "Transfer arm" page access key 8 Scroll down the list
3.15.6.1 Blowing machine option selection
Check that all of the options physically present on the machine have been activated in the PCC application as
per your machine configuration.
The activation of the blowing air recovery inhibits the preform internal decontamination. For further
information, please refer to chapter ""Options" family".
m List of options that may be parameterized for the "Wheel" page
- "Push-up".
- Scavenging.
- Air recovery.
- Air recycling system filter.
- Nozzle raise safety cam.
- Stretching lift safety cam.
- Blowing circuit rate.
- Bottle pressure variation check.
- Controlled mold compensation.
- Control of the nozzle control pressure.

- Additional blowing air line.
- Anticipation of the end of blowing.
- Regulation process.
- Individualization of the start of preblowing.
- Presence of a second temperature probe for the molds.
- Mold necks and bases thermoregulator.
- Mold bodies thermoregulator.
- Mold necks and bases oil thermoregulator.
- Mold bodies oil thermoregulator.
- Mold shell supports oil thermoregulator.
- Dew point sensor for the blowing system.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 149/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- Differential compensation.
- Optimized airsweep.
- Ejection of defective bottles following vision control.
- "Pushed-up base".
- Versatile thermoregulator for Mold bases and necks fluids.
- Versatile thermoregulator for Mold body fluids.
- Versatile thermoregulator for mold shell supports.
- Inhibition of stretching lower due a non-locked mold.
- Upstream temperature sensors for the mould fluids.
- Stop blowing due to faulty bottle.
- Low-pressure preblowing.
m List of options that may be parameterized for the "Oven" page
- SIDEL extraction hood.
- Heat recovery unit.
- Fluid regulation for the oven.
- Oven of 50 mm pitch.
- Preform dedust.
- Preferential heating.
- Separate ventilation of the neck and the body of the preform.
- Oven regulation via X cameras.
- Indexing of the preforms in the oven.
- Preform ionization.
- Neck cooling on the bend.
- Regulated ventilation of the preform neck on the bend.
- Client extractor hood.
- X preform neck cooling.
- Vortex on distribution ovens.
- Oven synchronization.
- Articles ejected due to heating cabinet fault
- Dedust pressure control.
m List of options that may be parameterized for the "Cameras" page
- Preform neck.
- Preform base.
- Bottle output.
- Loading rail.
- Thermal imaging of the preform.

- Spindle tip.
m List of options that may be parameterized for the "Transfer arm" page
- Oriented arm.
- Controlled grips.
- Late bottle ejection.
- Transfer arm springs control
m List of options that may be parameterized for the "Various" page
- SPC.
- Monitor by vision system.
- Thermoregulator instruction by PCC.
- Double bottle outlet.
III - 3 - 150/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- Filler.
- Greasing the pinions using spray.
- Cam lubrication.
- Greasing the separate bearings.
- Foodstuff-grade spray greasing.
- Ejection of 2 bottles following a bottle inspection.
- Water system by-pass.
- Presence of a second brake.
- Bottle inspection module.
- Debris aspirator.
- Filler blower isolation.
- Downstream conveyor slaved to blower.
- Presence of air extractor on preform transfer.
- Presence of diagnostic repeaters.
- Vortex at bottle transfer.
- Sprayer.
- Communication with the "Profibus" conveyor.
- Communication with conveyor by Ethernet in "SIEMENS" format.
- Communication with conveyor by Ethernet in "ISO-ON-TCP" format.
- Upline conveyor on Ethernet "TCP".
- Parameterized alarm correlation.
- Do you want to create a "COMBI" type report.
The application program PCC adapts the propositions resulting out of the machine configuration selected in
the Options pages.
3.15.6.2 Preform distributor option selection
Check that all of the options physically present on the machine have been activated in the PCC application as
per your machine configuration.
m List of options that may be parameterized for the "Feeder" page
- Tipper slave system.
- Electric tipper.
- Air shield in the stabilization area.
- Ejection of over-long preforms.
- Ejection of fallen preforms.
- Discharge of the small hopper.
- Presence of the small hopper.
- Presence of the vibrator on the hopper.

- Hopper horizontal cowling.
- Overpressure unit of the hopper.
- Presence of the blockage cell in the spillway of the elevator column.
- Presence of the "D2" cell.
- Presence of the blockage cells in the conveyor.
- Blowmolder without preform feeder.
- Unscrambler rollers only.
- UV infeed rail.
- Intermediary client conveyor.
- SIDEL intermediate conveyor.
- Presence of the remote hopper.
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 151/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- Infeed rail positioned at 45 degrees.

- Ionizer.
- Preform distributor XTM.
- Clean feeder.
- Detection of fallen preforms.
- Hopper vertical cowling.
- Acknowledge alarms from the gantry.
- Hopper clearance onto SIDEL intermediate conveyors.
- Hopper clearance onto external mobile conveyor.
- Easy feedTM.
- Hopper upline conveyor.
- Ethernet communication with intermediate conveyors.
- Blockage on movement inspection.
- Aspirator .
- "UV Philips" rail cooled.
The application program PCC adapts the propositions resulting out of the machine configuration selected in
the Options pages.
3.15.7 Customizing production
Production can be customized according to the options physically present on the machine.
2
16
3
15
4
5
14
6
13
12 ©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation
11 10 9 8 7
1-011738-01-02.svg
1 Button for accessing the "Wheel customization" page

2 "Loading on X molds" window access key
3 "Oven customization" window access key
4 "Bottle check" window access key
5 "Item ejection" window access key
6 "Preform check" window access key
7 "Automatic greasing" window access key (depending on the machine configuration)
8 Button for accessing the "Machine synchronization adjustment" page
Access key to the window in which the maximum and minimum flow thresholds for the blowing circuit can be
9
entered
10 Start/stop the vortex at the bottle transfer (depending on the machine configuration)
III - 3 - 152/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
11 Start/stop the vortex on the distribution oven (depending on the machine configuration)
12 Activate/deactivate the atomizer (depending on the machine configuration)
13 Activate/deactivate loading 1 mold in 2 (this function requires an infeed wheel which has one notch in two)
Activate/deactivate forced preform loading (this function is available in Manual Mode by first pressing "F5" on the
14 Control bar. Preforms will continue feeding into the oven regardless of the temperature)
Preforms must be ejected by the operator
15 "Auxiliary equipment" window access key
16 "Sampling" window access key
3.15.7.1 Sampling
Sampling allows items to be taken out of production either manually or automatically for quality control.
1 3
2 6
1-006731-01-02.svg
1 Sampling mode select key (automatic or manual)

Sampling mode define key, when in automatic mode (if the sample frequency is 0 min, sampling will take place
2
on every wheel revolution)
3 Sample request key, when in manual mode
4 Select the first mold to be sampled
5 Define the number of bottles to be ejected (number of molds to be sampled)
6 Define the number of consecutive revolutions over which sampling will be carried out
3.15.7.2 Customizing the wheel

The "Wheel customization" window allows the user to check the stopping parameters of the machine when the
same mold does not lock for X consecutive revolutions or when the same nozzle does not lift for X consecutive
revolutions. This function allows the user to detect a mold locking problem or a nozzle lifting problem.
1 2
3 4
1-007558-01-02.svg
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 153/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1 Activate/deactivate machine stoppage after X molds not locked

2 Enter the number of consecutive times a mold fails to lock after which the machine will stop
3 Button for activating or deactivating the machine stop on X nozzles that have not lifted
Button for keying in the number of consecutive revolutions during which the same nozzle has not locked before
4
machine stop
3.15.7.3 Loading on X molds

Loading on X molds allows blowing trials to be carried out on a chosen mold.
1
5
2
6
3
A
4
1-010416-02-02.svg
1 Defines the number of preforms ejected before blowing

2 Selects the first mold to be loaded
3 Defines the number of molds to be used in the trial
4 Defines the number of preforms ejected after blowing
5 Activates/deactivates the "Loading on X molds" function
Defines the number of wheel revolutions between loads:
- 1: Loading on every revolution
6
- 2: Loading every 1 revolution in 2
- 3: Loading every 1 revolution in 3
A Display showing number number of preforms loaded for the trial
3.15.7.4 Auxiliary equipment

The "Auxiliary" equipment window automates some of the linkng functions for machines located downstream and
confirms the selected operating mode in the plc program.
1
2
12
13
11 10 9 8 7 6
III - 3 - 154/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-010417-01-02.svg
Certain keys become inactive according to:

- the programmed configuration,
- the operating logic.
Management of the downstream auxiliary is carried out by either:

- A "Profibus" communication if the presence of an SPS (Sidel Packaging Systeme) conveyor is activated
(4) (option).
- Cells "C1", "C2" and "C3" for another type of conveyor.
The "C5" and "C6" sensor cells enable the rate to be varied by +/- 1%. The "C5" and "C6" sensor cells are
present or not depending on the machine.
Each cell corresponds to a controller input:
- cell "C1" corresponds to the controller input "E15.0".
1 Enter the machine rate when the machine is on standby

2 Enter the delay (min) after which the entered setpoint (1) becomes active
3 Activate/deactivate manual gate operation
4 Button for activating and deactivating the presence of an SPS conveyor (option)
5 Buttons for setting the parameters of the time delays associated with the SPS conveyor (option)
6 Activate/deactivate preform ejection at transfer
7 Activate/deactivate bottle ejection at transfer
8 Button for activating and deactivating the presence of cell "C1"
11 Set the time delay parameters at the "C1", "C2", "C3" cells
Set the time delay parameters at the "C5", "C6" cells (Sensor cells present depending on the machine
12
configuration)
13 Window access key "Auxiliary equipment regulation" (depending on the machine configuration)
m Examples of slave systems

C3 C2 C1
1-006690-02-xx.svg
Example 1 for the following configuration:
- the cells "C1", "C2" and "C3" are present,
- ejection of the preforms to the preform transfer is activated,
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 155/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
- ejection of the bottles to the bottle transfer is activated,

- the gate is in automatic mode.
When cell "C2" or "C3" is occulted, the loading cylinder stops loading preforms on to the feeder plate upstream of
the oven.
If cell "C1" is occulted, ejection is activated on the bottle transfer, the preform transfer and the automatique gate
opens.
When "C1" is no longer occulted, the automatic gate closes and ejection is deactivated on the bottle transfer and
the preform transfer.
When cell "C2" or "C3" is no longer occulted, preform loading into the oven restarts as does production.
Example 2 for the following configuration:
- the presence of a SPS conveyor is activated,
- the gate is in automatic mode.
When the downstream auxiliary is overloaded:
- the automatic gate opens.
When the downstream auxiliary is no longer overloaded, ejection is stopped, the gate closes and preform loading
restarts as does production.
3.15.7.5 Customizing the oven
This function customizes production by setting the parameters for certain oven functions.
3
13 4
5
12
6
7
11
8
9
10
1-011740-01-02.svg
1 Activate/deactivate "Machine stop due to broken lamps" function

2 Enter the number of broken lamps allowed before production stops
3 Activate/deactivate "Cut Zones 1 and 2, machine on standby" function
4 Activate/deactivate "Accelerated oven preheating" function
5 Activate/deactivate "command 1st half-oven on loading request" function
6 Activate/deactivate "1st half-oven command"
7 Display showing the spindle chain version
8 Spindle tip temperature threshold entry key
9 Spindle tip temperature display
10 Activate/deactivate key for the spindle tip temperature reading by the sensor
III - 3 - 156/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
11 Selection of the spindle chain version
12 Fine set the synchronization of the closing of the loading actuator
13 Fine set the synchronization of the opening of the loading actuator
m Cut zones 1 and 2, machine on standby

This function stops heating on zones 1 and 2 when the machine is set to standby.
m Accelerated oven preheating
This function accelerates the speed at which the oven heats up after feeding has been interrupted in order to return
to working temperature more quickly.
The production start percentage is corrected according to the percentage before the stoppage if:
- the duration of the stoppage is less than 60 min,
- heating regulation has been operating for minimum 5 minutes.
3.15.7.6 Bottle check
For further information, please refer to chapter ""Wheel" family".
3.15.7.7 Bottle ejection

The "Item ejection" function ejects preforms annd bottles at the start and the end of production batches.
1 2 3 4
A B
D 5
6 16
17
C
19
9 20
7 8 15 12 10 13 14 11 21 18 E
1-010134-01-02.svg
This function becomes operational from the moment when at least one of the date entry fields in the window is
different from "0".
This function is not available when "Loading on X molds" is selected.
A Dynamic window showing number of preforms and bottles ejected from the start of the batch
B Dynamic window showing number of preforms and bottles ejected from the end of the batch
C Preform ejection bin before oven
D Preform ejection bin at transfer
E Bottle ejection bin at transfer
1 Enter the number of preforms to be ejected at the start of the batch
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 157/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
2 Enter the number of preforms to be ejected at the end of the batch

3 Enter the number of bottles to be ejected at the start of the batch
4 Enter the number of bottles to be ejected at the end of the batch
5 Activate/deactivate the ejection of items from the first revolution of the blow wheel
Enter the threshold for the number of remaining preforms for machine stoppage before the preform ejection bin
6
before the oven is completely full
7 Enter the maximum number of preforms in the preform ejection bin before the oven
8 Reset the counter for preforms in the preform ejection bin before the oven
9 Indicator showing the level of preforms in the ejection bin before the oven
Enter the threshold for the number of preforms remaining before the preform ejection bin at transfer is completely
10
full
Select "Stop loading" if the remaining preform threshold is reached before the preform ejection bin at transfer is
11
completely full
Select "Stop machine" if the remaining preform threshold is reached before the preform ejection bin at transfer is
12
completely full
13 Enter the maximum number of preforms in the preform ejection bin at transfer
14 Reset the preform ejection counter at the transfer
15 Level indicator for preform ejection bin at transfer
16 Enter the number of bottles before the bottle ejection bin at transfer is completely full
Select "Stop loading" if the number of remaining bottles before the bottle ejection bin at transfer is completely full
17
has been reached
Select "Stop machine" if the number of remaining bottles before the bottle ejection bin at transfer is completely
18
full has been reached
19 Enter the maximum number of bottles in the bottle ejection bin on transfer
20 Reset the bottle ejection counter at transfer
21 Level of bottles in the bottle ejection bin at transfer
Preforms at either end of the batch receive a higher level of heat (as shown on the preform temperature
display) and for certain production types this may pose a problem during blowing.
Preforms or bottles or both can be ejected to check items after treatment.
According to the type of production, it may require a blow wheel revolution to reach the required parameters. It
will then be possible to eject the blown bottles from this first revolution before starting production proper.
The values entered for preform and bottle ejection will be added to those bottles already ejected on the first
revolution.
3.15.7.8 Preform check

3.15.7.9 Adjusting machine synchronization

The "Machine synchronization adjustment" window allows the user to parameterize:
- Ejection settings in sample mode.
- Loading settings for X molds.
- Ejection settings for X molds.
- Ejection synchronization of the preforms before entering the oven in normal functioning mode (depending on the
machine configuration).
- Ejection synchronization of the preforms after leaving the oven in normal functioning mode.
- Ejection synchronization of the items.
- The synchronization of the ejection of articles at the inspection module (depending on the machine
configuration).
III - 3 - 158/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
A B
5 1
8 2
9 3
10 13
11 14
12 15
17
16
18 4
19
20
1-014173-01-02.svg
A Window for parameterizing synchronization in normal functioning mode

B Window parameterizing synchronization in sample mode
1 Button for accessing the window for keying in the sample interval
2 Button for accessing the window for keying in the loading interval for X molds
3 Button for accessing the window for keying in the ejection interval for X molds
4 Button for validating the resetting of parameters to default
Button for accessing the window for keying in the value, in machine step percentages, of the exit control of the
5
cyclinder for ejecting preforms before entering the oven (depending on the machine configuration)
Button for accessing the window for keying in the value, machine step percentages, of the entry control of the
6
cylinder for ejecting preforms before entering the oven (depending on the machine configuration)
Button for accessing the window for keying in, in machine step percentages, the exit control of the cylinder for
7
ejecting preforms after leaving the oven
Button for accessing the window for keying in the value, in machine step percentages, of the entry control of the
8
cylinder for ejecting preforms after leaving the oven
Button for accessing the window for keying in the value, in machine step percentages, of the exit control of the
9
cylinder for ejecting items

Button for accessing the window for keying in the value, in machine step percentages, the entry control of the
10
cylinder for ejecting items
Access the window to enter the bottle ejection cylinder extend command value, in machine pitch percentage, at
11
the inspection modules (depending on the machine configuration)
Access the window to enter the bottle ejection cylinder retraction command value, in machine pitch percentage,
12
at the inspection modules
13 Access the window to enter the spindle offset value for preferential heating fault
14 Access the window to enter the spindle offset value for indexing fault
15 Access the window to enter the pin offset value for indexing fault
16 Confirm the spindle correlation setting
17 Access the window to enter the spindle number
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 159/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
18 Spindle number display

19 Access the window to enter the spindle offset value: preform present in penetration oven
20 Access the window to enter the spindle offset value: preform present on the bend
3.15.7.10Automatic lubrication (depending on the machine configuration)

The automatic greasing window enables you to visualize and modify the automatic greasing systems.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Automated self-lubricating system".
For further information, please refer to chapter "Automatic grease spray system".
A B
1 4
2 5
3 6
C D
7 10
8 11
9 12
1-010770-01-xx.svg
A Automatic grease spray display and settings field (depending on the machine configuration)
Area for displaying and parameterizing the automatic lubrication system of the cams (depending on the machine
B
configuration)
Area for displaying and paramaterizing the automatic lubrication system of the bearings (depending on the
C
machine configuration)
D Display and parameters for the foodstuff-grade greasing system (depending on the machine configuration)
Display showing the number of wheel turns between each automatic grease spray cycle
1
Access key to data entry field for the number of wheel turns between each automatic grease spray cycle
2 Automatic centralized greasing cycle frequency display
3 Automatic grease spray cycle activation key
Display of the number of wheel revolutions between each automatic lubrication cycle of the bearings
4 Button for accessing the window for keying in the value of the number of wheel revolutions between each
automatic lubrication cycle of the bearings

5 Display of the frequency of the automatic lubrication cycles of the bearings
6 Button for activating an automatic lubrication cycle for the bearings
Display of the number of wheel revolutions between each automatic lubrication cycle of the cams
7 Button for accessing the window for keying in the value of the number of wheel revolutions between each
automatic lubrication cycle of the cams
8 Display of the frequency of the automatic lubrication cycles of the cams
9 Button for activating the automatic lubricating cycle of the cams
Display showing the number of wheel turns between each foodstuff-grade greasing cycle
10
Open the data entry window for the number of wheel turns between each foodstuff-grade greasing cycle
11 Display showing the frequency of foodstuff-grade cycles
12 Activate the foodstuff-grade greasing cycle
III - 3 - 160/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
The machine must be turning in order to activate a greasing cycle.
When the number of turns between each cycle (1 ; 4 ; 7 ; 10) is modified the frequency value (2 ; 5 ; 8 ; 11) is
automatically recalculated. A technician can carry out a greasing cycle outside of the defined period using the keys
(3 ; 6 ; 9 ; 12). The keys (3 ; 6 ; 9 ; 12) change status during the entire greasing cycle.
3.15.8 Option summary
The "Options" summary displays the active or inactive status of all of the options fitted on the machine.
1-006735-01-02.svg
· Turn the pages in the window using the keys in zone (A).
30/03/2015 III - 3 - 161/162

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
III - 3 - 162/162 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Setting up the machine for production Part III
4 SETTING UP THE MACHINE FOR PRODUCTION

4.1 Presentation
The information in this chapter is intended for personnel who have been trained in setting up the machine for
production. This chapter contains certain recommendations but will not suffice alone for setting up production.
4.2 General methodology
The recommended methodology is as follows:
- become familiar with the preform drawings,
- ensure that the preforms conform to the drawings,
- become familiar with the specifications for the item to be produced,
- find an existing machine set-up with a preform/bottle profile and an output rate similar to the new production set-
up,
Use the same settings to start the setting up process:

- for the blowing machine. If you cannot find a similar set-up, use the presettings indicated in this chapter.
- for the preform feeder in "Auto-adapt" mode, please refer to chapter "Auto-adapting the speed of the
preform feeder". If you cannot find a similar machine set-up use the "Manual" mode to carry out a "Search
for start-up setpoints" for the preform feeder as indicated in this chapter.
The settings indicated in this chapter are relatively broad. Only the experience of a machine setter will enable
these settings to be adjusted according to local factors and the condition of the machine.
- carry out trials and then make adjustments until the item produced satisfies the specifications,
- note down the parameters and the results obtained to keep a record of the setting up process followed.
4.3 Machine administration
The administrator is responsible for:
- the creation, modification and deletion of machine user accounts,
- the management of user levels and their access to functions within the PCC application.
4.4 Production process set-up tools

The machine is equipped with tools for which the main function is to assist you with setting up the machine for
production and production management.
4.4.1 Tools for refining the blowing machine set-up
The tools can be accessed through the "Options" family and are as follows:
- "Loading on X molds".
- "Sampling".
- "Item ejection".
- "Auxiliary equipment configuration" (option).
- "Bottle check".
- "Automatic restart".
- "Forced loading".
- "Broken lamp inspection parameters".
- "Molds not locked inpsection parameters".
- "Ejection of cold preforms".
4.4.2 Tools for refining the preform feeder set-up
The tools available can be accessded through the "Feeder" family and are as follows:
- "Manual mode" window.
- The "Auto-adapt" window.
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 1/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part III User Manual / Setting up the machine for production
4.5 Preliminary checks and adjustments
4.6 P, I, D regulation parameters (depending on the machine configuration)

4.6.1 Functions
Modifying the "P, I, D," parameters allows you to control the automatic regulation systems installed on the
machine.
4.6.2 Principles
The "Proportional" action "P" acts on the rapidity of response when staus changes.
The "Integral" action "I" completes the "Proportional" action in controlling residual error in the regime.
The "Derived" action "D" smooths oscillations and reduces disturbances in order to accelerate stabilization.
Effect
Simple action Observations
Stability Rapidity
As "P" gets smaller the response becomes
When you increase "P"
slower but more accurate
As "I" gets smaller, the setpoint will be
When you increase "I"
exceeded by a greater margin on start up
As "D" increases so also does the time taken
When you increase "D"
to reach stabilization
4.6.3 Examples of regulation graphs

The graphs below represent the value as measured (vertical axis) against time (horizontal axis).
m Variations in "P"
If "P" is elevated:
1-007221-01-xx.svg
If "P" is weak:
1-007281-01-xx.svg
m Variations in "I"
If "I" is elevated:
III - 4 - 2/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-007224-01-xx.svg
If "I" is weak:
1-007282-01-xx.svg
m Variations in "D"
If "D" is elevated:
1-007225-01-xx.svg
If "D" is weak:
1-007283-01-xx.svg
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 3/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4.7 Heating profile

4.7.1 Principles of oven regulation
B1
18 10 11 12
1
0% L8
28 % L7
32 % L6
36 % L5
40 % L4 2
40 % L3
17 40 % L2
40 % L1
A1
16 15 14 13 8 7 6 5 4
0% 60 % OFF L8
28 % 70 % ON L7
32 % 80 % ON L6
9 3
100 % ON 70 % ON 36 % 90 % 40 % ON L5
40 % 100 % ON L4
40 % 100 % ON L3
40 % 100 % ON L2
40 % 100 % ON L1
1-013956-01-xx.svg
A1 Programmable logic controller (PLC) 9 Analog output card

B1 Regulated oven (distribution oven) 10 Heating power at lamps (output % x zone %)
1 Oven heat sensor 11 Lamps
2 Oven outfeed temperature sensor* 12 False lamp
Activate/deactivate preform neck and body
3 Analog input card 13
cooling
4 Lamps 14 Preform neck and body cooling power (output %)
5 Activate/deactivate lamps 15 Activate/deactivate lamp base cooling
6 Heating output percentage (output %) 16 Lamp base cooling power (output %)
7 Heating power per zone (% zone) 17 Lamp base cooling fan
8 Heating power at lamps (output % x zone %) 18 Preform neck and body cooling fan
* In the presence of several cameras, the principle of regulation remains the same. Each camera is affected to a group of heating areas, please refer to
chapter "Setting the oven parameters (option)".
III - 4 - 4/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4.7.2 Principles of starting/stopping oven
Y1 K
100%
N
A 80%
H
B 50%
I Y2
C 110°C
D 103°C
J Q
E 30°C
F 20°C
Y3 P
100 %
L 70 %
T1
1-013977-01-xx.svg
Heating output percentage graph Preform temperature graph
Oven temperature graph Lamp base cooling percentage graph

Preform neck and body cooling percentage

graph
X Time C Temperature limit (general oven)

Y1 Oven heating output % D Temperature setpoint (for preforms)
Y2 Temperature E Oven temperature after cooling has stopped
Production room temperature (ambient
Y3 Oven cooling output % F
temperature)
A Production start percentage T1 Cooling time after heating has stopped
B Standby percentage
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 5/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m (G) oven start up

If the oven is empty it will go to standby when started. In standby mode, the heating output percentage is equal to
the standby percentage.
m (H) preform feeding request
As soon as preform feeding is requested the heating output percentage goes to 100 %.
m (I) first preform loaded
The first preform is loaded onto the infeed wheel when the oven has reached the temperature limit.
When the first preforms enter the oven the heating output percentage is equal to the start percentage.
m (J) preform passes in front of the temperature sensor
The sensor at the oven outfeed reads the temperatures of the preform bodies and sends this information to the
heating regulation system.
m (K) regulation
The heating output percentage is corrected every x preforms.
x is the value of the "heating correction frequency" parameter in the "Oven family".
1-006811-01-xx.svg
%Rx Percentage regulation to time x Tpm Temperature measured on preform

%Rx-1 Percentage regulation to time x-1 Tpc Temperature setpoint (for preforms)
z Correction coefficient
m (L) start of lamp base cooling

On starting oven heating (G), the lamp base cooling percentage changes to 100 %.
m (M) start of preform neck and body cooling
On starting oven heating (G), the preform neck and body cooling percentage changes to the setpoint percentage
set on the PCC (70 %).
m (N) stopping of oven
On stopping the oven, the heating output percentage (Y1) changes to 0 %.
Wait for the oven cooling to finish before opening the doors to avoid the risk of burns.
m (O) stopping of preform neck and body cooling

On stopping the oven , the preform neck and body cooling output percentage 100 % changes to 7 min for *4.
m (P) stopping of lamp base cooling
On stopping the oven , the lamp base cooling output percentage 100 % remains at 7 min for *4.
4.7.3 Alternating energy-saving standby
"Alternating energy-saving standby" (1) keeps the oven in standby mode following a stop in production, at a
temperature (parameter set on PCC) close to the loading temperature.
4.7.3.1 Alternating energy-saving standby deactivated
When preform loading is intentionally or unintentionally stopped and the alternating energy-saving standby is
deactivated, the oven heating output percentage changes to the standby setpoint percentage (parameter set on
PCC), the cooling output percentages remain the same as for production.
4.7.3.2 Activated alternating energy-saving standby
The "Alternating energy-saving standby" mode (1) can be accessed if the "Ecoven module" option is activated in
the PLC program.
III - 4 - 6/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
1-013962-00-02.svg
When the "Ecoven module" option has been activated in the PLC program, the number of lamps changes to 8
in the "Lamp configuration" window.
The "Ecoven module" option prohibits accelerated preheating of the oven.
4.7.3.3 Production stop of less than 5 minutes (T2)

When the oven is put in standby for less than 5 minutes, the heating output percentage and the cooling percentage
change to 0 %.
When the operator restarts the oven after a standby time of less than 5 minutes, the oven heating output
percentage (5) is calculated using a straight line (4) going from the last regulation percentage (1) to the start
percentage (parameter set on PCC) for 5 minutes.
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 7/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Y1 4 5 7
100%
A 80%
B 50% T2 1
Y2
C 110°C
D 103°C
E 30°C
F 20°C
Y3
100 %
70 %
1-014009-01-xx.svg
m (1) oven heating output percentage put in standby

On intentionally or unintentionally stopping preform loading, the oven heating output percentage changes to 0 %.
m (2) stopping of oven cooling
On putting oven heating in standby, the preform neck/body and lamp base cooling output percentage changes to 0
%.
(3) restart of oven heating
m
On expiry of the standby time (T2) of less than 5 minutes, the operator restarts the oven from the PCC.
m (4) heating output percentage graph prior to 5 minutes
If the standby time (T2) is less than 5 minutes, the heating output percentage is calculated using a straight line
going from the last regulation percentage to the start percentage.
m (5) heating output percentage on oven restart
The heating output percentage on restart is defined by a point on the heating output percentage graph (4)
according to the standby time (T2).
m (6) restart of oven cooling
On starting oven heating , the lamp base cooling percentage changes to 100 %.
On starting oven heating , the preform neck and body cooling percentage changes to the setpoint percentage set
on the PCC (70 %).
III - 4 - 8/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m (7) regulation of oven heating output percentage
On expiry of the standby time (T2) of less than 5 minutes, the operator restarts the oven from the PCC.
When the first preform passes in front of the oven outfeed camera, the oven heating output percentage is corrected
every x preforms.
4.7.3.4 Production stop of more than 5 minutes (T3)

When the oven is put in standby for more than 5 minutes, the heating output percentage and the cooling
percentage simultaneously alternate every 5 minutes between 0 % and the setpoint values set on the PCC.
When the operator restarts the oven after a standby time of more than 5 minutes, the oven heating output
percentage changes to 100 % until the oven threshold temperature is reached.
Y1 1 T3 7 9
100%
A 80%
B 50%
T5 5
T4
3
Y2
C 110°C
D 103°C
E 30°C
F 20°C
Y3
100 %
2
70 %
6
1-014010-01-xx.svg

On intentionally or unintentionally stopping preform loading, the oven heating output percentage changes to 0 %.
On putting oven heating in standby, the preform neck/body and lamp base cooling output percentage changes to 0
%.
m (3) restart of oven heating
When the standby time is more than (T4) = 5 minutes, the heating output percentage returns to the setpoint value
set on the PCC.
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 9/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115

When the standby time is more than (T4) = 5 minutes, the oven cooling output percentages return to the setpoint
value set on the PCC.
During the oven standby period, when the heating time is more than (T5) = 5 minutes, the oven heating output
percentage changes to 0 %.
During the oven standby period, when the heating time is more than (T5) = 5 minutes, the oven cooling output
percentages change to 0 %.
m (7) heating output percentage on oven restart
On expiry of the standby time (T3) of more than 5 minutes, the operator restarts the oven from the PCC.
When the operator restarts the oven after a standby time of more than 5 minutes, the oven heating output
percentage changes to 100 % until the oven threshold temperature is reached.
On starting oven heating , the lamp base cooling percentage changes to 100 %.
On starting oven heating , the preform neck and body cooling percentage changes to the setpoint percentage set
on the PCC (70 %).
m (9) regulation of oven heating output percentage
The oven heating output percentage changes to the start setpoint value set on the PCC.
When the first preform passes in front of the oven outfeed camera, the oven heating output percentage is corrected
every x preforms.
4.7.4 Heating setpoints
5 1
6 11
15 2
10
17 7 16 8 9
1-011722-02-02.svg
Heating setpoints are entered in the "Oven" family. Press the key corresponding to the setpoint to be modified in
order to enter a new value.
III - 4 - 10/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "Correction frequency" parameter (1)
This is the number of preforms that pass in between each correction of the output percentage.
Pre-set value: time necessary for the blowing wheel to make 4 revolutions (depending on the rate of the
machine).
This parameter is used to calculate regulation.
m "Correction coefficient" (2)

This is the coefficient applied to the output percentage when correction takes place. The level is set between 0.1
and 1.
SIDEL recommends that this value is not changed.
Pre-set value: 0,3.
m "Immediate correction" (3)

The "Immediate correction" function continuously corrects the output percentage. "Immediate correction"
accelerates regulation.
m "Preform temperature" setpoint (4)
The "Loading temperature" setpoint is the temperature of the oven at which the plc authorizes preform feeding onto
the infeed wheel. The setpoint must be between 35 and 200 °C.
Pre-set value: 120 °C, see procedure "BPU-010".
The "Loading temperature" setpoint is close to the oven temperature.

The temperature in the oven at the sensor varies according to the following:
- the number of lamps in service,
- the heating percentage at the lamps.
During the trials measure the temperature of the oven. Enter a setpoint instruction 5 to 10 °C lower than the
temperature of the oven.
m "Heat recovery" setpoint (5) (option)
Pre-set value: 0 °C, see procedure "BPU-010".
m "Standby" setpoint (6)

This is the heating power percentage used when the oven is empty. The setpoint must be between 30 and 40 %.
Pre-set value: 40 %, see procedure "BPU-010".
This setting maintains the temperature in the oven when it is empty without damaging the equipment.
m "Ventilation" setpoint (7)

This is the cooling ventilation percentage for the oven. The setpoint must be between 50 and 100 %.
Pre-set value: 70 % and 85 % if "HR" machine, see procedure "BPU-010".
m "Extractor hood" setpoint (8 ; 16) (option)
Pre-set value: 100 %, see procedure "BPU-010".
m "Preform neck cooling" setpoint (15) (option)

The "Preform neck cooling" window regulates the air temperature on the preform neck on the oven bend, please
refer to chapter "Preform neck cooling" .
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 11/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m "X preform body cooling" setpoint (17) (option)

The "X preform body cooling" window enables the temperature of the preform body air to be regulated, please refer
to chapter , "X preform neck cooling" .
12
13
14
1-007559-03-02.svg
Instructions for heating the body, neck and base of the preforms are accessed using buttons (9), (10) and
(11). The presentation of the "Temperature of the preform neck" window and the "Temperature of the preform
base" window is identical (option).
m "Preform temperature" (12) setpoint
The "Preform temperature" setpoint is the setpoint for the temperature of preforms at the oven outfeed.
Regulation is based on the "Preform temperature" setpoint. During trials take the temperature of the preforms
at the oven outfeed and adjust the setpoint value.
m "Production start" setpoint (13)
This is the heating percentage applied when the first preforms load onto the infeed wheel. The setpoint must be
between 70 and 100 %.
Pre-set value: 80-85 %.
During the trials, note the "Output percentage" (equal to the heating power percentage). Enter a setpoint
instruction of 1 to 2 % lower than the "Output percentage".
m Operating mode selection key (Manual or Automatic) (14)
To perfect the process, select "Manual" mode. For production, select "Automatic" mode.
4.7.5 Lamp and oven zone commands
III - 4 - 12/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
B A
D C
1-006736-03-02.svg
Open the "Lamp command" windows (A) using the keys (1). Define the status of the lamps and the heating
percentage of the zones. Display the new configuration of the oven in the window (B).
Balance the number of penetration and distribution ovens using the keys (2).
m Penetration ovens
To achieve better penetration, the "overall heating %" values should be between 80 and 100 %.
· Activation of lamps necessary on 40 % penetration oven modules.

m Distribution ovens
For "HR" machines, first activate the lamps of the last modules of the distribution ovens.
At the start of production process set-up:

· Activate the required lamps on 50 % distribution oven modules.
· Enter 100 % as a setpoint value for zone 1(C).
· Enter a value of between 80 and 100 % for the other zones (D).
4.8 Blowing profile
4.8.1 Principles of PET bi-orientation
The speed of stretching depends on the preform and the rate of bi-orientation. The stretching speed varies
according to the slope of the stretching cam.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Stretching".
4.8.2 Output rate setpoint
Caution: modifying the "Output rate" will automatically generate a recalculation of the production timings by
the plc. The quality of the production may be altered.
· Define the output rate before setting the blowing profile.
4.8.3 Preblowing configuration
For further information, please refer to chapter ""Wheel" family".
m Preblow pressure
Pre-set value: 8 bar, see procedure "BPU-010".
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 13/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Start of preblowing
The "Preblowing" window is accessed thorugh the "Wheel" family.
The start of preblowing is expressed in tenths of the stretching phase, with zero being the start of active
stretching.
1-007570-04-02.svg
Pre-set value: + 1/10, see procedure "BPU-010".
· Position the cursor (1) at + 1/10 to set the start of preblowing to point "0" + 1/10.
4.8.4 Blowing configuration
The "Blowing" window (A) is accessed through the "Wheel" family.
For further information, please refer to chapter "Blowing".
2
1
3
4
5
10
6
11 7
8
9
1-007575-03-02.svg
III - 4 - 14/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Blowing pressure
Pre-set value: 30 bar and 38 bar if "HR" machine, see procedure "BPU-010".
m Time of stretching raising and lowering
The blowing time is determined by the preblowing and exhaust times.
· Press on buttons (1) and (2) to modify the raising and lowering parameters of stretching.
m Preblowing time
The end of preblowing at point "10" is active.
· To modify the preblowing time, press key (3) and enter a new value.
m Exhaust time
- For items whose volume is less than 0,5 L, exhaust time is set at 0,2 s.
- For items whose volume is less than 1,5 L, exhaust time is set at 0,4 s.
- For items whose volume is greater than 1,5 L, exhaust time is set at 0,5 s.
· To modify the exhaust time, press key (4) and enter a new value.
m Compensation time
The operations described below relate only to optional equipment.
· To modify the piloted compensation start advance, press key (5) and enter a new value.
· To modify the piloted compensation start delay, press key (6) and enter a new value.
m Air recycling time
· Press on the button (7) and key in the new value to modify the air recycling time.
m Scavenging time
- For items with a volume of between 2 L and 1,5 L, the sweep time is set at 0,8 s.
- For items with a volume of less than 1,5 L, sweep time is set at 0,4 s.
· Press on button (8) and key in the new value to modify sweep time.
m Anticipation time of the end of blowing
· Press on the button (9) and key in the new value to modify the anticipation time of the end of blowing.
m Angular position of "Push-up"
· Press on the button (10) and key in the new value to modify the angular position of the start of "Push-up".
· Press on the button (11) and key in the new value to modify the angular position of the end of "Push-up".
"Push-up" must start after the sweep and stop at the start of the lowering of the mould base.
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 15/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
4.9 Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints
4.10 Production set-up trials (in "Manual" mode)
4.11 Saving a new production set-up
4.12 Bottle faults: causes and remedies
1-006570-01-xx.svg
5 6
1-006495-01-xx.svg
The table below gives the general principles of the production process of simple items. Adhering to the
specifications of an item, especially for complex items or the "HR", requires detailed knowledge of the
process. For all developments and additional training, please contact SIDEL.
Fault Designation Zones Probable cause Possible remedy

Marbled effect C1 R1
D1 2;3;4
Silverish tint on side of bottle C31 R9 ; R11 ; R24
Opalescence
D2 2;3;4 C2 R2 ; R25
Start of crystallization
C3 R1
C13 R9
D3 Internal folding at base 4
C14 R11
C32 R26
C4 R1
Excess material at base C13 R9
D4 4
Magnifying effect C14 R11
C32 R26
III - 4 - 16/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115

C1 R7
C2 R2
C10 R8
C12 R10
D5 Off-center base 4
C15 R12
C16 R16
C30 R19
C33 R27
C17 R15
D6 Over-stretched foot (marbled effect) 4
C24 R10 ; R12
C13 R9
C14 R11
D7 Internal folding at area under neck 2
C31 R9 ; R11 ; R27
C32 R26
C7 R5
D8 Deformed neck 1 C8 R23
C9 R6 ; R25
C20 R17
D9 Marks under the bottle neck 2;3;4
C27 R22
D10 Marked seal plane 2;3 C21 R18
D11 Mold shape taken poorly 2;3;4 C18 R13
C14 R15
D12 Poorly formed petaloid base 4 C15 R13
C25 R9 ; R13
C6 R1
C13 R9
D13 Over-thickness in the form of rings 2;3
C14 R11
C31 R9 ; R11 ; R24
Defective distribution of thickness around C29 R4
D14 2;3;4
circumference C30 R19
C5 R3
Defective distribution of thickness along
D15 2;3;4 C12 ; C13 R9 ; R10
length
C14 ; C15 R11 ; R12
C5 ; C12 ; C13 ;
D16 Insufficient resistance to compression 4 C14 ; C15 ; C27 ; R20
C28
R1 ; R2 ; R7 ; R8 ; R9 ;
R10 ; R11; R12 ; R15 ;
C22
D17 Bottle splits when it it falls 4 R16 ; R19 ; R25 ; R26 ;
R27
C27 R21
C2 ; C7 ; C8 ; C9 R2
D18 Abnormal CO2 loss 1;2;3;4
C26 R20
C2 ; C5 ; C12 ;
C13 ; C14 ; C15 ; R2
D19 Excessive creep 2;3;4 C29 ; C30
C28 R20
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 17/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115

R1 ; R2 ; R7 ; R8 ; R9 ;
R10 ; R11 ; R12 ; R15 ;
C22
R16 ; R19 ; R25 ; R26 ;
D20 Bottle bursts at abnormally low pressure 3;4 R27
C23 R21
C28 R20
Cause Designation
C1 Preform temperature too low
C2 Preform temperature too high
C3 Excess heating at preform base
C4 Insufficient heating at preform base
C5 Poor heating profile
C6 Zones on preform bodies too cold
C7 Abnormal heating of spindles or cooling shields
C8 Abnormal heating of preform necks
C9 Oven ventilation insufficient
C10 Pressure in stretching cylinders too low
C11 Stretching rod not set correctly
C12 Preblowing too soon
C13 Preblowing too late
C14 Preblowing pressure too low
C15 Preblowing pressure too high
C16 Blowing too soon
C17 Blowing too late
C18 Blowing pressure too low
C19 Blowing pressure too high
C20 Mechanical friction on preforms and bottles
C21 Compensation fault
C22 Base incorrectly oriented
C23 Fragile injection point
C24 Fault in thickness of preforms due to lack of material
C25 Fault in thickness of preforms due to excess material
C26 Outer edge of neck scratched or incomplete
C27 Poor preform quality
C28 Viscosity of material too low
C29 Irregular rotation of preforms

C30 Incorrect preform concentricity
C31 Stretching rod touches the preform
C32 Preblowing flow too weak
Remedy Designation
R1 Increase the general heating percentage or the heating percentage at the zone concerned
R2 Reduce the general heating percentage or the heating percentage at the zone concerned
R3 Adjust the heating profile
R4 Check the rotation of the preforms
R5 Check the water circuit through the cooling shields
R6 Check the oven fans
III - 4 - 18/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Remedy Designation
R7 Adjust the gap between the stretching rod and the mold base
R8 Increase the pressure in the stretching rods
R9 Bring preblowing forward
R10 Delay preblowing
R11 Increase preblowing pressure
R12 Reduce preblowing pressure
R13 Increase blowing pressure
R14 Reduce blowing pressure
R15 Bring blowing forward
R16 Delay blowing
R17 Check the movement of the preforms through the oven and the bottle outfeed settings
R18 Check the compensation circuit
R19 Check the concentricity of the preforms
R20 Check the quality of the material
R21 Check the preform injection point
R22 Check the quality of the preforms (impacts, scratches, sticking, fully filled)
R23 Set the height and distance of the shields in relation to the preform necks (1 mm)
R24 Check that the stretching rod conforms to the preforms
R25 Increase the power to the oven fans
R26 Increase the preblowing flow
R27 Check the condition of the diffuser and the stretching rod guide ring
30/03/2015 III - 4 - 19/20

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
III - 4 - 20/20 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Assistance with starting the machine and commencing Part III
production
5 ASSISTANCE WITH STARTING THE MACHINE AND COMMENCING

PRODUCTION
5.1 General information
Users must be familiar with the machine manuals and the safety precautions before starting production on the
machine.
This chapter will guide you though the operations required to start machine production.
For production set-up procedures and parameters, please refer to chapter "Setting up the machine for
production".
5.2 Production flow chart

This flow chart describes the various steps in article production.
1-017345-01-02.svg
m Definition of steps
Preparatory operations before starting a new production, with the creation of a new recipe:
- Check that the new preforms are in place in the feeder hopper,
30/03/2015 III - 5 - 1/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part III User Manual / Assistance with starting the machine and commencing
production
- Check that custom parts are in place and correctly adjusted,

- Log in, to the PCC, with user account, see procedure "BCU-024",
- Define point "0" at the PCC, see procedure "BPU-001",
- Acknowledge any faults at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-023" and see procedure "BCU-026",
- Validate, PCC, the "start and end of preform train" ejection,
- Create the new recipe, see procedure "BPU-005" and see procedure "BPU-010",
- Start a surface long disinfection cycle, see procedure "BCU-040",
- Start production for approximately thirty articles, see procedure "BCU-006",
- Check the quality of the bottles.
Preparatory operations before starting a new production, with a recipe change:

- Check that the preforms are in place in the feeder hopper,
- Load the recipe corresponding to the desired production, see procedure "BPU-005",
- Acknowledge any faults at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-023" and see procedure "BCU-026", ,
- Check there are no preforms in the machine,
- Start a surface long disinfection cycle, see procedure "BCU-040",
- Start production for approximately thirty articles, see procedure "BCU-006",
- Check the quality of the bottles produced.
The type of decontamination operation depends on the various criteria below.
Machine decontamination operations:

- If
· Shift changeover with identical production and no machine door opened.
No disinfection cycle to be started.
- If
· Shift changeover with identical production and at least one machine door opened.
Start a surface short disinfection cycle, see procedure "BCU-040".
- If
· New production with change of (existing or new) recipe.
Start a surface long disinfection cycle, see procedure "BCU-040".
- If
· New production following a stoppage time of more than 48 hours.

Start a surface long disinfection cycle, see procedure "BCU-040" and start a blow air sterilization cycle, see
procedure "BCU-044".
Production:
- Create a new shift report at the PCC,
- Start production at nominal output rate, see procedure "BCU-006",
- Regularly check the preform and bottle ejection bins and empty them if necessary.
A shift changeover with identical production corresponds to a change in operator for the same article
production, with no action required in the machine.
Shift changeover with identical production:
III - 5 - 2/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
production
- Create a new shift report at the PCC,
- If a door has been opened, start a surface short disinfection cycle, see procedure "BCU-040",
- Start production at nominal output rate, see procedure "BCU-006".
End of production:
- Stop production, see procedure "BCU-006",
- Check there are no preforms in the machine,
- Empty the preform and bottle ejection bins,
- In case of prolonged stoppage (more than 48 hour), turn off power to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012".
5.3 Decontamination of the blowing machine
The decontamination process of the blowing machine includes two phases:
- Disinfection of the surfaces in contact with the article to be produced,
- Sterilisation of the blow air.
m Disinfection of surfaces
· Which surfaces are disinfected?
When starting a disinfection cycle, disinfect:
- Manually: the stretching rods and the internal surfaces of the mold.
Using the alcohol spray gun:
- The bottle outfeed wheel,
- The bottle outfeed guides,
- The service glove.
In Automatic mode:
- The preform grips and the bottle grips,
- The oven plate and the oven guide,
- The nozzle tips and the upper faces of the molds.
- The spindle tips (via the oven UV rails).
Before any production change, manually disinfect:
- The stretching rods,
- The internal surfaces of the molds.
· How many types of disinfection cycles are there?

There are 2 types of disinfection cycles:
- 1 short cycle and 1 long cycle.
The short cycle takes approximately 20 minutes. It includes an alcohol spraying phase with the gun and 2
automatic disinfection sequences (grips, oven plate and guide, nozzle tips, mold upper faces and spindle tips.
The long cycle takes approximately 30 minutes. It includes an alcohol spraying phase with the gun and 4 automatic
disinfection sequences (grips, oven plate and guide, nozzle tips, mold upper faces and spindle tips.
Before starting any disinfection cycle, it is essential to isolate the blowing machine from the filling machine by
closing the blower / filler connecting gate.
· When is it necessary to perform a short disinfection cycle?

Whenever a machine door has been opened.
After any work in the machine (routine maintenance).
For any specific need identified by the operator.
· When is it necessary to perform a long disinfection cycle?
30/03/2015 III - 5 - 3/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
production
Whenever the PLC has been stopped.

Whenever a recipe has been changed.
Whenever the machine has been stopped for more than 6 hours.
After each cleaning cycle performed on the filler.
For any specific need identified by the operator.
· How to carry out these operations?

Close the blower / filler connecting gate, see procedure "BCU-042".
Start a short disinfection cycle of the surfaces, see procedure "BCU-040".
Start a long disinfection cycle of the surfaces, see procedure "BCU-040".
m Sterilisation of the blow air

· Which filters are sterilised?
During the cycle, only the "SRF" filter (the last filter on the air line) is steam-sterilized.
the "0,1 µ" and "AK" filters are not sterilized during the cycle.
In the case of a two-stage filtration, only the SRF filter on each stage is sterilized.
· How many types of blow air sterilization cycles are there?

There are 1 types of sterilization cycles. This cycle takes approximately 1 hour and 15 minutes (1 hour and 30
minutes for a two-stage filtration).
· When is it necessary to sterilize the blow air?

Every 120 hours.
When a system clogging information is displayed at the control station.
· How to carry out this cycle?

Carry out a blow air sterilization cycle, see procedure "BCU-044".
5.4 Operator and personnel hygiene
5.4.1 General information
Always follow the hygiene rules and the procedures in this chapter for any work carried out on the production
zone. Non-respect of these regulations and procedures may cause the contamination of the product.
5.4.1.1 Procedure and training
Personnel must follow the manufacturing, cleaning and disinfection procedures as stipulated by the company
quality department.
Respecting production methodology ensures hygiene is maintained. Personnel must be trained in hygiene and in
the observance of these procedures. The same rules apply to temporary and seasonal staff.
Carry out training for personnel involved in operations where hygiene is a priority. This training should be based on
the initial training, on-going training and experience of the staff memeber concerned.
5.4.1.2 Health
Personnel working in the production zone must be monitored so that they do not contaminate the products. These
requirements apply especially in the case of short interventions which do not require any operations to return the
machine to the necessary physical, chemical and microbiological standards.
m Personal hygiene
Personnel entering the production area must maintain a satisfactory level of personal hygiene. Personnel who
receive cuts or other injuries, but are authorised to continue work, must disinfect their injuries and cover them with
waterproof plasters.
III - 5 - 4/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
production
Personnel must wash their hands:

- after eating,
- immediately after using the toilets,
- after carrying out any dirty activity,
- before handling preforms or products required for the operation and maintenance of the machine,
- before entering the production area.
m Hand cleaning procedures
· Allow the water to run.
· Wet hands.
· Place liquid soap in the palm of your hands.
· Rub your hands and lower arms together thoroughly for 1 minute.
· Rinse all soap off your hands.
· Dry your hands with single-use paper towels.
· Throw the paper towel in the bin.
5.4.1.3 Clothing
m In the production zone
In the production, maintenance and storage zones, overalls and safety shoes are obligatory. These clothes must be
worn only in the production, maintenance and storage areas.
m In hygiene-controlled areas
Clothing for personnel authorised to intervene on the machine during production or to be in contact with the product
must cover the entire body.
Use disposable clothing for dirty work or work which requires optimum cleanness.
Do not wear jewellery, watches or personal objects in the production area.
5.4.1.4 Behaviour
Personnel must respect the hygiene requirements stpulated by the production facility internal regulations.
Persons present inside the production area should avoid behaviour which may result in product contamination.
5.4.1.5 Access to production areas
Rules for access apply to all personnel entering the production, maintenance and storage areas:
- production personnel,
- laboratory personnel,
- maintenance personnel,
- factory managers.
Staff may only enter areas to which they are authorised.
Close all doors to the production, maintenance and storage each time you pass through. Keep all windows
closed in the production, maintenance and storage areas.
The following items must be transported and stored according to the flow and storage zones:
- carts and raw materials containers,
- cleaning and servicing products,
- cleaning and servicing equipment.
30/03/2015 III - 5 - 5/6

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
production
5.4.2 Working on the machine
see procedure "BCU-038"
5.5 Operations prior to starting production
Always follow the safety precautions. For further information, please refer to chapter "General safety
precautions".
· Make sure that there are sufficient preforms in the hopper.
· Make sure that all of personalized parts are the correct ones for the production you are about to carry out.
· Make sure that the machine and preform feeder settings correspond to the item you wish to produce.
· Turn on the power supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-001".
The PCC and "Windows" start up.
Wait until all of the "Windows" files have opened before starting the PCC application.
· Acknowledge the faults at the PCC.

· Turn on the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-003".
· Enter the name of the user at the start of the shift, see procedure "BCU-024".
· Load or create a production recipe, see procedure "BPU-005".
Position the operating mode switch key (1) on "Production" mode (B) to start producing items.
1-015492-01-xx.svg
Before starting the machine, You MUST wait 3 hours minimum for the molds to reach the required heating
temperature.
· Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006".
· Load a few preforms into the machine and wait for them to be blown, see procedure "BCU-006".
· Check the quality of the bottles.
· Start production.
5.6 End of production
· Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006".
· Turn off the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-010".
· Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012".
III - 5 - 6/6 30/03/2015

SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Table of Contents Part IV

OPERATION Part III
MAINTENANCE Part V
APPENDIX Part VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
30/03/2015 IV - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part IV User Manual / Table of Contents
IV - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / General information Part IV
1 GENERAL INFORMATION
The primary start-up of the machine is carried out by SIDEL qualified technicians and includes:
- final machine settings, leveling up and assembly of all sub-components,
- adjustments and machine operation checks,
- production of articles in order to sign over the machine.
The "Presentation Manual" includes all of the information required for machine installation and start-up:
- characteristics,
- general safety precautions: handling, installation, operation,
- limits of use: related effects, material waste,
- hygiene: risk factors, environment and cleaning,
- machine layout and utilities: plans, energy supplies and fluid connections,
- installation and set-up: reception, storage, preparations, unpacking, equipment, handling, set-up.
The machine sale contract stipulates, very precisely, the rights, guarantees and limits of responsibility of each
party.
30/03/2015 IV - 1 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part IV User Manual / General information
IV - 1 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Table of Contents Part V

OPERATION Part III
MAINTENANCE Part V
APPENDIX Part VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
Safety recommendations .................................................................................................................................... 1.1
Safety pictograms ............................................................................................................................................... 1.2
MAINTENANCE GUIDE 2
General recommendations ................................................................................................................................. 2.1
General information ................................................................................................................................... 2.1.1
Maintenance levels .................................................................................................................................... 2.1.2
Definitions of maintenance levels ...................................................................................................... 2.1.2.1
Classification of maintenance levels ................................................................................................. 2.1.2.2
Maintenance schedule ........................................................................................................................................ 2.2
Blowing machine maintenance schedule ................................................................................................... 2.2.1
Maintenance schedule for the preform distributor ...................................................................................... 2.2.2
List of tools supplied with the machine ............................................................................................................... 2.3
Lubricant characteristics ..................................................................................................................................... 2.4
Greasing schedule .............................................................................................................................................. 2.5
Cleaning agents .................................................................................................................................................. 2.6
Decontamination and disinfectant products ........................................................................................................ 2.7
Decontamination ........................................................................................................................................ 2.7.1
Disinfectant ................................................................................................................................................ 2.7.2
PRODUCTION ITEM CHANGES 3

Definitions of machine interventions ................................................................................................................... 3.1
Intervention selection procedure ................................................................................................................ 3.1.1
Changing over to a new production item on the blowing machine ..................................................................... 3.2
Table of mechanical procedures ................................................................................................................ 3.2.1

Supplementary interventions ............................................................................................................. 3.2.1.1
List of custom parts .................................................................................................................................... 3.2.2
Item changes for options ............................................................................................................................ 3.2.3
Table of mechanical procedures ....................................................................................................... 3.2.3.1
List of custom parts ........................................................................................................................... 3.2.3.3
Changing over the production item on the preform distributor ........................................................................... 3.3
Table of mechanical procedures ................................................................................................................ 3.3.1
List of custom parts .................................................................................................................................... 3.3.2
30/03/2015 V - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part V User Manual / Table of Contents
V - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / General safety precautions Part V
1 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.1 Safety recommendations
All setting up operations, repairs, maintenance and adjustments may only be carried out by qualified and
authorized personnel who must be familiar with the instruction manual, the precautions specified by SIDEL
and who must be equipped with all necessary safety and protective equipment (safety shoes, blade cut
protective gloves and safety goggles).
Except for specific indications related to a procedure, before attempting any operations on the machine, make
sure that:
- the power supply has been shut off,
- the high and low pressure air lines have been purged and shut off,
- the water supply has been shut off,
- The PCC application is not in setting mode.
The machine doors are fitted with electrical safety devices. Opening any of these doors will stop the machine
immediately and vent the air systems. The doors prevent access to moving parts. Never by-pass or disable a
door electrical safety device in order to run the machine with an open door.
The key locked panels prevent access to moving parts. Only maintenance agents are authorized to open
these panels and they must take all precautions deemed necessary to avoid accidents.
For any use of the JOG (depending on procedure), the technician must be in possession of the control box
JOG throughout the duration of the works.
In exceptional cases where manual rotation is to be used, technicians must follow the general safety
precautions, please refer to chapter "General safety precautions" in the Presentation Manual or in the User
manual.
Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it.
Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see
procedure "BSU-001".
Never attempt any work on the machine during a "Fixed or mobile solenoid valve test":
- doors open, the machine is energised (water, electricity, air etc.).
Before carrying out any work on the open PCC make sure that you are familiar with the ESD (Electrostatic
Sensitive Device) directives.
Block manual rotation during the whole removal/refit operation on the machine, see procedure "BSU-002".
Prohibit machine rotation using the lockable pin for all major maintenance operations. Activating this blocking
system prevents the machine from being rotated.
When maintenance on the top of the machine is required, you must use a certified safety harness.
1.2 Safety pictograms

Potential risks are indicated by labels posted around the machine:
30/03/2015 V - 1 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part V User Manual / General safety precautions
m Warnings
Warning. Always read carefully Danger - high pressure
Danger - risk of injury Danger - laser beam
Danger - risk of being crushed Danger - hot surface
Danger - electrical hazard Danger - UV-C rays
Danger - corrosive material Danger magnetic field
Danger - risk of falls
m Obligations
Breathing protection is obligatory Ear protection obligatory
Individual protection from falls obligatory Body protection obligatory
Hand protection obligatory Eye protection is obligatory
Face protection obligatory Head protection obligatory
Foot protection obligatory

m Prohibited
Walking prohibited here Do not touch
Prohibited for people fitted with active

Do not remove safety devices
medical implants
Do not clean, lubricate, repair or adjust Access probitied for non-authorized

moving parts personnel
V - 1 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Maintenance guide Part V
2 MAINTENANCE GUIDE
2.1 General recommendations
2.1.1 General information
Identify precisely which part(s) are malfunctioning before attempting any maintenance operations on the
machine.
The frequencies indicated for carrying out these operations are provided as a simple guide. The frequencies
are calculated as follows:
- 24 machine service hours, (= 1 day).
- 125 machine service hours, (= 1 week).
- 250 machine service hours, (= 2 weeks).
- 500 machine service hours, (= 1 month).
- 1500 machine service hours, (= 3 months).
- 6000 machine service hours, (= 1 year).
- 12000 machine service hours, (= 2 years).
In the general maintenance schedule, the lengths of time for each operation are based the time taken by one
technician carrying out that operation. The operations timings do not take into account:
- purging and draining pneumatic and hydraulic circuits,
- removing cover panels and opening doors,
- preparing tools.
The general maintenance schedule and the greasing schedule make reference to servicing procedure numbers.
Respecting the recommended safety precautions, the procedures, the frequencies for the servicing
procedures and the materials requirements (oils, greases, tools etc.) will guarantee that your machine
functions at the best possible level. Non-respect of these recommendations may cause undue wear and tear
which may result in injury to the personnel working with the machine.
m Initial and final condition of the machine
All servicing procedures (except operating procedures) assume that the machine has been correctly installed,
stopped normally (no faults) and has been connected to all required utilities (high and low pressure air, water,
electricity etc.). If this is not the case, you should first ensure that the machine meets these requirements. All
power supplies to the machine (except those required by and specified in the servicing procedure) must be
shut off.
When you have completed a procedure, always check the following

- that the area where the procedure has been carried out is clean,
- that no tools or foreign objects have been left behind,
- that the machine has been returned to production set up,
- that the machine does not pose any potential danger to the personnel and their surroundings.
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 1/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part V User Manual / Maintenance guide
2.1.2 Maintenance levels

2.1.2.1 Definitions of maintenance levels
The maintenance levels determine the complexity of the maintenance to be carried out according to the following:
- the difficulty of the operation,
- the difficulty in setting up or using the equipment required for the operation.
Interventions are classed in a rising order of technical complexity.
m First level of maintenance (Level 1)
Simple actions carried out on parts which are easily and safely accessed and using equipment integrated with the
machine.
m Second level of maintenance (Level 2)
Actions which follow simple procedures and/or use simple equipment (integrated with the machine or external)
which is easy to install and operate or requiring a specific qualification.
Personnel quailified when they have received training permitting them work safely on a unit which presents
certain risks. Personnel are qualified when they have been designated for the operation due to their specific
knowledge and aptitude.
m Third level of maintenance (Level 3)
Operations which follow procedures and/or using equipment which is complex to install or operate.
m Fourth level of maintenance (Level 4)
Operations which follow procedures requiring full knowledge of a specific technique or technology and/or the use of
specialized equipment.
m Fifth level of maintenance (Level 5)
Operations which follow procedures requiring specific knowledge of techniques and technologies with specialized
processes and/or procedures.
By definition, these types of maintenance (renovation, reconstruction etc.) are carried out by the manufacturer
or by a specialist company. These procedures require equipment defined by the manufacturer and therefore
close to construction.
2.1.2.2 Classification of maintenance levels
Maintenance operations Operation particulars Personnel Information on the operation

Simple action
Level 1 Simple procedures Client Technical Documentation
Easy access
Simple action
Level 2 Client Technical Documentation
Simple set-up and tools
Complex procedure
Level 3 Client Technical Documentation
Complex set-up
Client* Addition to machine manual
Specific technology
Level 4 SIDEL After-Sales After-Sales Department
Specific equipment
Department intervention range
SIDEL After-Sales After-Sales Department
Manufacturer-level knowhow Department intervention range
Level 5
Industrial equipment Specific supplier
Other personnel**
documentation
* The client may carry out the operation under conditions which the SIDEL After-Sales Department will have communicated to them in the a specific
servicing procedure, and where the technicians will be qualified for the operation.
** SIDEL suppliers (specialized component companies or suppliers)
All 1 to 5 maintenance levels are identified in the User Manual. Only 1 to 3 maintenance levels are associated
with a procedure in the Servicing Procedure catalog.
For all other operations not identified in the general maintenance schedule you should contact the SIDEL
After-Sales Department.
V - 2 - 2/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
If necessary, the different maintenance levels are subject to different access levels at the PCC.
These access levels are controlled by a password.
2.2 Maintenance schedule

2.2.1 Blowing machine maintenance schedule
The frequency attributed to these operations is intended for maintenance not assisted by the PCC. The
frequency given when using the maintenance assistant in the PCC application may be different according to
the counter associated with the maintenance operation concerned.
m Frequency: 24 hours
Procedure
Intervention T* N** General information
no.
- Checking the motor current intensity on start A peak in intensity is a sign of an
1 min
up abnormal load during operation
Not defined
- Visual inspection of the closing of each mold The counter cam must not move
3 min
support unit (at nominal rate) in normal operation
- Emptying the preform and bottle collecting 1
Not defined 2 min None
bins
Walk around the machine
- Listening for air leaks 3 min
None listening for possible leaks
- Clearing ejected preforms and bottles 5 min None
If "Vision system "Pressco"", then:

4 min to 15 min 1
- Cleaning the glass (lighting and cameras) of Refer to the "Pressco" technical
None (according to the
all the parts of the vision system documentation
number of parts)
* T = Intervention time
** N = Intervention level
Procedure
no.
If "Locking shafts and pins have no DLC
treatment", then:
2
- Greasing the mold support unit locking shaft
BGM-019 1 min/station None
and pins
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 3/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Aspirating the "PET" particles from the
15 min None
machine
- Cleaning the preform and bottle guides 15 min None
- Cleaning the contact surfaces between the

10 s/station None
molds and nozzle tips
- Cleaning the transfer cams and the transfer BNM-041 1
15 min None
arms
- Cleaning the blowing units 30 s/station None
- Cleaning the bottle outfeed 2 min None
- Cleaning the oven 20 min None
- Cleaning the molds on the machine BNM-064 1 min/mold 1 None
Non-applicable if "KHOLOX"
- Greasing the mold centering studs, rings and option present
BGM-011 1 min/mold
wear washers Visually check the condition of
the molds
2
- Greasing the preform ejection cams (at oven
BGM-020 3 min
infeed)
None
- Greasing the upper notches of the oven
BGM-050 Not defined
wheel and the forks
If "Transfer arm metal followers" and if
not "Automatic lubrication", then: 2
- Transfer cam lubrication BGM-030 3 min None
If "Locking shafts and pins with DLC

treatment", then:
2
- Oiling the DLC locking shaft and locking pins
BGM-019 2,5 min/station None
of mold support units (without cleaning)
If "Stand-alone automatic greasers", then:
- Inspecting the spindle roller automatic grease 2
BNM-074 1 min None
applicators
If "Transfer arm equipped with controlled
grip" and if "Stand-alone automatic
greasers", then: 2
- Inspecting the automatic lubricators for the
BNM-074 1 min None
transfer arm grip opening/closing rollers
If "Double bottle outlet" and if "Stand-alone
automatic greasers", then:
2
BNM-074 1 min None
double bottle outfeed transfer wheel
If "Automatic lubrication", then:
- Visual inspection of the centralized automatic
Check the lubricant consumption

greasing system (cams, guide rails, drive Not defined 2 min
in the grease tanks
ring)
- Cleaning the mold base raise/lower cam
2
- Cleaning the preform and bottle transfer
cams
BNM-019 15 min None
- Cleaning the loading and offloading cams
- Cleaning the stretching cam
- Cleaning the mold opening/closing cam
If "Metal locking followers" and if "Automatic
lubrication", then: 2
- Cleaning the mold locking/unlocking cams BNM-019 Not defined None
V - 2 - 4/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
If "Metal rollers on the pitch change wheel" and
if "Automatic lubrication", then: 2
- Cleaning the pitch change wheel cam BNM-019 Not defined None
If not "Automatic lubrication", then:

- Greasing the stretching cam BGM-004 3 min
Manual greasing includes an
- Greasing the mold opening/closing cam 2 min
BGM-032 initial cleaning of the cams
- Greasing the mold base up-down cam 4 min 2
- Greasing the blow wheel drive ring
BGM-015 Manual greasing of the bearings
movements
7 min includes an initial cleaning of the
- Greasing the oven wheel drive ring drive rings
BGM-017
movements
If not "Automated grease spray", then:
- Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel
drive ring
BGM-006 2
- Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel 15 min None
drive ring BGM-007
- Greasing the drive pinions
If "C3" or "C5", then:
- Inspection and cleaning the fixed diffuser in BNM-023
15 min/unit None
the preform interior decontamination module BDM-136 2
- Inspection and cleaning the preform interior
BNM-025 15 min/unit None
decontamination module
If "Preferential heating", then:
- Greasing the controlled grip opening/closing
BGM-030 3 min
cams
2 None
- Greasing the no-offload protection cams BGM-039 1 min
- Greasing the fast offloading key BGM-052 1 min
- Cam box oil level check BNM-031 2 min
If "Preferential heating" and if "Disengageable
spindle tips", then:
3
- Checking the tightening torque of the Check 30 % of the spindles every
BNM-032 5 min/spindle
disengageable spindle tips 125 production hours
If "Bottle Switch", then:
- Cleaning the molds, mold base plates and 1
BGM-044 Not defined Mold and base spacer
the shell supports

Procedure
no.
2
- Greasing the transfer arm guides BGM-001 45 s/arm None
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 5/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
Not
- Visual inspection of the condition of the
None 10 s/station defin None
molds ed
- Cleaning the transparent surfaces inside the
None 15 min
machine
- Cleaning the stretching rods BDM-026 30 s/station
- Cleaning the infrared camera(s) (in the oven) BNE-003 5 min 1 None
- Cleaning the photo-electric sensors BNE-004 10 min

- Checking the operation of the warning lights
BNE-005 2 min
(Beacon stack)
BNM-001 If ECOVEN oven, the infrared
- Inspection/cleaning the lamps, reflectors and
2 min/module lamps can be cleaned every 3
dummy lamps of the oven (if present) BNM-003 000 hours
- Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors BNM-020 10 min None
If new belt(s): to be carried out

2 after 500 and 1 000 production
- Checking the belt tensions BNM-048 10 min
hours and then every 6 000
hours
- Cleaning the filters on the hydraulic lines BDM-007 10 min
- Greasing the mold support unitlocking system None
BGM-019 1 min/station
holding lock
- Analyzing the quality of the distribution circuit BNM-049 A specialist company can be
Not defined
water BNM-050 called in
Turn on the low pressure air
- Listening for air leaks from the actuating lines BPU-006 6 min 3 supply to the machine
To be carried out after 500
- Checking the general synchronization of the
BNM-012 25 min production hours, then every 3
various transfers
000 hours
If "Automated grease spray", then:
- Cleaning the nozzles that spray grease onto
5 min
the drive rings 2
BNM-007 None
- Remove excess grease from the drive rings
Not defined
and drive pinions
2
- Filling the grease tanks BGM-023 10 min None
If not "Stand-alone automatic greasers", then:

- Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover 2
BGM-005 35 min None
ramps
treatment", then: 2
- Cleaning the locking pins Not defined 1,5 min/station None
If "Dedust", then:
- Cleaning the filters in the aspirator and the BNM-018 1
30 min None
dedust extraction hood BDM-168
2
- Greasing the spindle indexing cams BGM-038 Not defined None

- Cleaning camera lenses, ventilation filters of 15 min to 50 min 2 Refer to the "Pressco" technical
the system "Intellispec" and the external box None (according to the
documentation
filter number of parts)
V - 2 - 6/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Frequency: 1 000 hours
Procedure
no.
after 500 and 1 000 production
- Checking the belt tensions BNM-048 10 min 2
hours and then every 6 000
hours
If "Oven air filtration" outside of the machine "
C5", and outside Matrix Oven, then:
- Replacing the oven cooling system filters BDM-056 1h 2 None
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 7/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Visual inspection of the reducer motor BNM-011 2 min
- Checking the tension of the spindle chain, the
position of the tensioner and the tension of BRM-003 5 min
2 None
the spindle rotation fixed chain
- Checking the setting of the lower stretching
BRM-009 3 min
thrusts
If "Oven MATRIX Oven", then:
1
- Replacing the oven cooling system filters BDM-056 Not defined None
If "C5", then:
- Replacing the prefilters on the aeraulic BDM-085 17 min/filter 1
None
systems (wheel + oven) BDM-129 5 min/filter
If "Double bottle outlet", then:
1
- Cleaning the grip control cams Not defined 15 min None

- Inspection/cleaning of the PCC screen Not applicable if the PCC is fitted
ventilation filters 2 with an air-condition
BCU-036 12 min/filter
- Inspection/cleaning of the electrical box
None
ventilation filters
- Greasing the mold support bar BGM-043 Not defined Mold and base spacer
1
- Greasing the tooling cams BGM-045 Not defined Indexing
- Light curtain operating inspection BSU-011 Not defined Mold and base spacer
Indexing
- Visual inspection of the Bottle switch system BNM-062 Not defined
3 Mold and base spacer
- Non-locked mold shell safety inspection BNM-063 Not defined Mold and base spacer
V - 2 - 8/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Cleaning the machine plastron frame None 60 min
- Replacing the stretching down limit-stop 1 None
BDM-017 6 min/station
damper
- Checking the gap between the mold bases
Not defined 2 min/station Set when cold
and the molds
- Checking the operation of the nozzle-not-free
Not defined 2 min
safety Detection can be checked using
- Checking the operation of the mold opening/ the PCC
Not defined 2 min
closing roller tool-not-lowered safety
2
- Visual inspection of the cleanliness of the
circuits/condition of the pneumatic and Not defined 10 s/station
hydraulic hoses
None
- Checking for leaks on the hydraulic circuit Not defined 5 min
- Cleaning the quartz bars (if present in the
Not defined 10 min/module
oven)
BNM-002
- Inspecting the torque limiters 11 min
BRE-010
- Checking the mold closing and locking safety
BNM-004 6 min
devices
- Checking the misload safety device BNM-005 2 min 2 None
- Checking the safety devices on the stretching
BNM-015 5 min
cam
- Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles BNM-045 1 min/spindle
- Replacing the mold support unit dampers BDM-001 4 min/station
For the "preferential heating"
- Greasing the transfer arm guides BGM-001 45 s/arm machines, the greasing interval
for the transfer arms is 250 hours
- Greasing the pivot pins and open pins of the Includes the initial cleaning and
BGM-013 3 min/station 2
mold support units the final cleaning
- Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam BGM-021 1 min None
- Checking the setting of the mold/tool

BRM-001 2 min/station Set when cold
opening/closing rollers
- Replacing the ventilation filters of the control
BNE-002 35 min 1
station and the on-board electrical boxes
- Inspection/cleaning: braking system BNM-009 15 min None
- Replacing the compensation seals and If HIGH SPEED or HR machine,

polyurethane springs of the mold support BDM-016 10 min/station the spring washers do not have
units to be systematically replaced
- Replacing the scraper seal on the stretching
BDM-032 5 min/station 3
rods (on the blowing block)
- Replacing the silencers of the mold support

BDM-106 1 min/station None
unit compensation solenoid valves
- Checking the general synchronization of the
BNM-012 25 min
various transfers
- Degreasing the mold base up/down cams 15 min
- Degreasing the loading/offloading cams Not defined
- Degreasing the mold opening/closing cam 90 min 2 Includes the regreasing before
BNM-021
- Degreasing the stretching cam 10 min restarting the machine
- Degreasing the preform and bottle transfer
Not defined
cams
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 9/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Degreasing the toothing on the oven and 2 Includes the regreasing before
BNM-014 60 min
blow wheel drive rings restarting the machine
If "Metal locking followers" and if "Automatic
lubrication", then: 2
- Degreasing the mold locking/unlocking cams BNM-021 Not defined None
If "Metal rollers on the pitch change wheel" and

if "Automatic lubrication", then: 2
- Degreasing the pitch change wheel cam BNM-021 Not defined None

2
- Replacing the batteries and grease cartridges BGM-036 5 min/greaser None
If "Controlled automatic greaser", then:

2
- Replacing the grease cartridges BGM-033 5 min/greaser None
If "Double bottle outlet" and if "Stand-alone

- Replacing the batteries and grease cartridges BGM-036 5 min/greaser 2 None
If "SBO 6 HR" or "SBO 8 HR", then:

2 Only for type "MAIER" rotary
- Greasing the "MAIER" hydraulic rotary union BGM-012 None
union
If "Oven ECOVEN " or "Oven MATRIX
Oven ", then:
2
- Inspection/cleaning the oven infrared lamps Not defined Not defined
None
- Cleaning the infrared lamp base protections BNM-055 2 min/module
If "4 stroke nozzle cylinders (HR or Preferential
heating)", then:
3 Plan to replace the nozzle
- Reconditioning the nozzle cylinders BDM-032 40 min/cylinder cylinders after 18 000 production
hours
If ""Pushed-up bases" on the mold support
units", then:
2 Plan to replace the "Pushed-up
- Reconditioning the "Pushed-up bases" BDM-128 120 min/base bases" after 18 000 production
hours
If "Synthetic followers on transfer arms", then:
2
- Replacing the transfer arm followers BDM-038 15 min/arm None
If "Controlled grips" and if "Synthetic

rollers", then: 2
- Replacing the pliers control synthetic rollers Not defined Not defined None
If "Synthetic rollers on locking system", then:

- Replacing the locking synthetic rollers of the
BDM-042 3 min/station 2 None

mold support units
If "Double bottle outlet" and if "Synthetic
rollers", then:
2
- Replacing the synthetic rollers of the ottle
BDM-187 5 min/arm None
outfeed wheels
- Checking / cleaning the quartz plates of the
preform exterior decontamination modules BNM-052 Not defined 2 None
(Oven UV cabin)
- Cleaning the "BRONKHORST" station of the
preform interior decontamination module with BNM-072 1h 3 None
demineralized water (PREDIS)
If "C5", then:
V - 2 - 10/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Replacing the AK and SRF filters on the dual
BDM-041 18 min
filtration circuit
- Inspection / cleaning of inlet filter on the
BNM-047 10 min 2 None
steam sterilization circuit
- Replacing the filters in the oven aeraulic
BDM-101 50 min/filter
modules
If "HR", then:
- Replacement of the shock absorbers of the 2
upper stretching stop
Not applicable if the PCC is fitted
- Replacing the PCC screen ventilation filters
BCU-036 Not defined 2 with an air-condition
- Replacing the electrical box ventilation filters None
If "Pitch change wheel" and if "Synthetic

rollers", then: 2
- Replacing the pitch change wheel rollers BDM-070 10 min/arm None

- Checking the indexing system rollers 5 min
2
- Checking the condition of the neck indexing Not defined Not defined
5 min
pin
If "Belt bottle outfeed", then:
- Greasing the universal joints of the belt bottle 2
Not defined 5 min Not defined
outfeed
If "Polypropylene machine", then:
3
- Replacing the low pressure solenoid valves BDM-194 15 min Not defined
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 11/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Greasing the stretching guides BGM-008 1 min/station 2 None
Procedure
no.
- Checking the emergency stop buttons BSU-005 15 min
- Replacing the oven reflectors BNM-003 1 min/reflector
- Replacing the exhaust silencers (of the 1 None
blowing blocks)
- Checking the electrical connections BNE-001 15 min
- Checking the belt tensions BNM-048 10 min
- Replacing the low pressure air circuit filters BDM-005 2 min/station
- Replacing the silencers on the nozzle cylinder
distributors
- Replacing the stretching cylinder silencers BDM-144 2 min/station
- Replacing the one-way stop valves on the
stretching cylinders
- Replacing the on-board air circuit filters (Low
BDM-155 15 min
pressure air circuit)
- Replacing the silencers on the pneumatic 2 None
BDM-156 30 min
control circuits
- Greasing the reducer motor bearing BGM-035 1 min
- Greasing the coder wheel gear BGM-014 3 min
- Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings BGM-018 2 min
1 min/mold base
- Greasing the mold base support guides BGM-009
support
- Replacing the plc batteries BDE-001 1 min
- Replacing the oven lamps BDE-009 1,5 min / oven
- Replacing the filters in the high pressure air Filters to be replaced after the
circuit (40 bar) BDM-006 20 min 2 first 3000 production hours and
- Replacing the air recovery filter then every 6000 hours
- Pneumatic circuit safety checks BSU-004 10 min
- Replacing the friction pads on the braking None
BDM-033 60 min/brake
system
3
- Reconditioning the blowing solenoid valves Plan to replace the solenoid
(preblowing, blowing, exhaust and air BDM-150 90 min/station valves after 12 000 production
recovery) (if present) hours
2
- Replacing the stretching rollers BDM-146 5 min/station
If "2 stroke nozzle cylinders (standard)", then:
3 Plan to replace the nozzle
- Reconditioning the nozzle cylinders BDM-032 45 min/cylinder cylinders after 18 000 production
hours
If ""NUMATIC" pneumatic distributors on nozzle
cylinders", then: 2
- Replacing the pneumatic distributors BDM-036 5 min/station
V - 2 - 12/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
If ""MAC VALVE" pneumatic distributors on
stretching cylinders", then:
2 Plan to replace the "MAC
- Reconditioning the pneumatic distributors BDM-149 10 min/station VALVE" distributors after 12 000
production hours
Only for springs with rotating
If "Double spring transfer arm", then: loop ends or springs with flat
2 ends
12 000 hours for ball-end springs
- Replacing the transfer arm springs BDM-147 3 min/arm
If ""Non reinforced" spindle chain", then:

It is not mandatory to recondition
3 the spindles on the SBO 6 to
- Reconditioning the oven spindles BDM-095 12 min/spindle
SBO 8 machines, cleaning the
spindles is sufficient
If ""Reinforced" spindle chain with 40 mm
pitch", then: 3
- Reconditioning the oven spindles BDM-095 12 min/spindle None
If "Steel followers on transfer arm", then:

2
- Replacing the transfer arm followers BDM-038 15 min/arm None
If "Oven extractor unit", then:

- Checking the condition of the transmission 2
belts of the oven extractor unit
grip" and if "Stand-alone automatic
greasers", then:
- Replacing the batteries and grease cartridges BGM-036 5 min/greaser 2 None
If "Dedust", then:
- Setting the differential pressure switch on the
BRE-013 5 min
dedust aspirator
- Replacing the dedust circuit filters BDM-051 20 min 2 None
- Replacing the dedust module rollers BDM-055 3 min/unit
- Greasing the dedust shaft bearings BGM-022 5 min
If "Pitch change wheel" and if "Steel
rollers", then: 2
- Replacing the pitch change wheel rollers BDM-070 10 min/arm None
If "Double filtration", outside of the machine

C5, then:
2
- Replacing the AK and SRF filters on the dual
BDM-041 20 min None
filtration circuit
- Draining the oil tank of the "MAIER" hydraulic 2 Only for type "MAIER" rotary
BDM-068 30 min
rotary union union
If "HR", then:
BDM-043 2
- Draining the hydraulic systems 2h None
BDM-075
If "Push-up", then:
- Replacing the silencer of the "Push-up"
Not defined 3 min Not defined
solenoid valve 2
- Replacing the 5 µm filter of the "Push-up"
Not defined 5 min
(before the pressure reducing valve)
If "Sprayer", then:
1
- Replacing the hydraulic filters of the sprayer Not defined 10 min None
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 13/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
If "Machine TM", then:
2
- Greasing the manual rotation bearings BGM-027 2 min None

- Greasing the bearings of the transmission 1
reinforcing piece
- Greasing the bearings of the belt bottle 1
outfeed
If "Oven MATRIX Oven " or "EVO2 Oven" and/or
if "Bearing spindle chain", then: 3
- Replacing the tensioner wheel sectors BDM-122 5 min None
If "EVO2 Oven", then:

- Replacing the loading/offloading rollers on the 2
BDM-118 Not defined None
oven wheel
If "C5", then:
- Replacing the total filters in the blow wheel
aeraulic modules 1 None
- Replacing the total filters in the oven aeraulic

modules
- Inspection/cleaning - preform external
BNM-039 10 min/unit
decontamination modules (Oven UV cabin)
- Replacing the bottle outfeed air circuit filter BDM-102 5 min None
- Filling the bottle outfeed air circuit oil tank BGM-040 5 min
- Replacing the vapor line outfeed filter(s) BDM-103 10 min
- Replacing the ventilation filters of the preform
2 Except on SBO 24 & SBO 26
exterior decontamination modules (Oven UV BDM-184 10 min/fan
machine
cabin)
- Replacing the "Philips" UV lamps of the BDE-012
preform external decontamination module 30 min None
(Oven UV cabin) BPU-035
- Replacing the "Philips" UV lamps on the
BDE-010 2 h 40
infeed rail
- Checking and calibrating the wheel and oven BRM-053
1 h 30 min 3
differential pressure sensors BNM-069
- Cleaning/inspection of the float-type draining
BNM-075 50 min
systems
1 None
- Replacing the UV module ventilation filters on
BDM-183 20 min
the infeed rail
V - 2 - 14/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Replacing the air filter on the preform internal
BDM-064 10 min
decontamination module (PREDIS)
- Replacing the aseptic solution filter of the
preform internal decontamination module 5 min
(PREDIS) BDM-065
2 None
- Replacing the seal on the tank of the aseptic BDM-066
solution system on the preform interior 5 min
- Replacing the surface disinfectant product
BDM-083 5 min
filter
- Replacing the micro clamp coupling seals BDM-137 15 min 3 None
- Replacing the "BRONKHORST" station, the

Contact SIDEL to define a
flow meters and the mixing valve of the
None Not defined 5 standard exchange, without
preform interior decontamination module
affecting production
(PREDIS)
Procedure
no.
If "Machine > SBO 10" and if ""Reinforced"
spindle chain with 50 mm pitch", then:
- Replacing the upper and lower bearings of
Not defined 16 h None
the oven wheel 3
- Reconditioning the oven spindles BDM-095 12 min/spindle None
If "Single spring transfer arm", then:

- Replacing the transfer arm followers BDM-038 1 min/arm 2 None
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 15/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Intervention Procedure no. T* N** General information

- Replacing the pressure regulator on the
Not defined 15 min 2 Not defined
onboard 7 bar air system
- Replacing the safety pin assemblies of Do not replace just the rollers: risk
the mold base rollers of breaking the safety pins
- Replacing the stretching cylinder ball
BDM-139 Not defined
joints
2
- Replacing the forward and rear slides
on the mold support unit
- Replacing the mold opening/closing None
BDM-145 Not defined
rollers
- Replacing the blowing solenoid valves
(preblowing, blowing, exhaust and air BDM-063 30 min/station
recovery (if present))
Plan to replace the stretching
3
- Reconditioning the stretching cylinders BDM-030 45 min/cylinder cylinders after 18 000 production
hours
- Reconditioning the mold opening/
BDM-148 Not defined
closing retractable guide
- Replacing the rotary air union To be defined 120 min 3 None
If "Oven ECOVEN " or "Oven MATRIX

Oven", then: 2
- Replacing the lamp cap protectors BDM-133 1 min / oven None

2
- Replacing the stretching rollers BDM-146 5 min/station
If "Double spring transfer arm", then: Only for ball-end springs
2 6 000 hours for springs with
- Replacing the transfer arm springs BDM-147 3 min/arm rotating loop ends and springs with
flat ends
stretching cylinders or "BOSCH
FV20"", then: 2
- Replacing the pneumatic distributors
and pilot systems
nozzle cylinders", then:
2
- Replacement of nozzle cylinder
BDM-036 7 min/cylinder None
distributors
If "Metal locking followers", then:
2
- Replacing the locking followers BDM-042 3 min/station None
If ""Controlled" compensation solenoid

valves" and if they are "Hyper SEITZ"
solenoid valves, then: 3

- Replacing the controlled compensation If "Hyper SEITZ" valves, do not
solenoid valves systematically replace
- Replacing the belts and belt rotation 3
Not defined 4h None
bearings of the bottle outfeed
- Replacing the metal rollers of the 2
BDM-187 5 min/grip None
double outlet grips
V - 2 - 16/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115

If " Machine ≤ SBO 8 "and If ""Reinforced"
- Reconditioning the oven spindles and 3
replacing the upper and lower bearings BDM-095 12 min/spindle None
of the oven wheel
If " Machine ≥ SBO10 "and If ""Reinforced"
3
- Replacing the upper and lower bearings
Not defined 16 h None
of the oven wheel
If ""Non reinforced" spindle chain", then:
- Complete reconditioning of the oven
wheel (ball-bearing rollers, upper and
Not defined 16 h
lower bearings, pins, anti-torque
pins, springs , forks) 3
None
- Replacing the spindle chain, spindle BDM-151
rotation fixed chains and fixed chain BDM-152 6h
guides BDM-157
If "Bearing spindle chain", then:
- Reconditioning the oven spindles and 3
replacing the upper and lower bearings BDM-095 12 min/spindle None
of the oven wheel
If "C5" and if ""HERAEUS" UV
lamps", then:
- Replacing the UV lamps in the preform BDE-012
exterior decontamination module (Oven 30 min
UV cabin) BPU-035
2 None
- Replacing the "HERAEUS" UV lamps
BDE-010 2 h 40
on the infeed rail
2
- Replacing the carriage control hoses Not defined Not defined Indexing
If "Multipitch" then:
2
- Replacing the rollers BDM-195 Not defined None
Procedure
no.
If ""Hyper SEITZ" "controlled" compensation
solenoid valves" and if "Machine rate is 2 200 B/
H/M", then:***
3
If the machine rate is less than 2
- Replacing the controlled compensation
BDM-107 4 min/station 200 B/H/M, replace after 18 000
solenoid valves
production hours***
*** B/H/M = bottles per hour per mold.
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 17/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115

- Replacing the stretching cylinders BDM-014 20 min/cylinder None
2 Contact SIDEL to check the motor

- Changing the oil in the reducer motor BGM-010 60 min type and if necessary, the type of
oil to be used
- Replacing the nozzle cylinders BDM-015 14 min/cylinder 3 None
- Replacing the electrical collector of the

To be defined 120 min 3 None
wheel
- Replacing the transmission belts, the
belt tensioner bearings and the None Not defined 4 None
tranmissions
If ""Hyper SEITZ" "controlled"
compensation solenoid valves" and if "The
machine rate is less than 2 100 B/H/
3
M", then:***
- Replacing the controlled compensation
solenoid valves
If " Machine ≥ SBO10 "and If ""Reinforced"
spindle chain", then:
- Complete reconditioning of the oven
wheel (ball-bearing rollers, upper and
Not defined 16 h
lower bearings, pins, anti-torque 3
pins, springs , forks) None
- Replacing the spindle chain, spindle BDM-151
rotation fixed chains and fixed chain BDM-152 Not defined
guides BDM-157
If ""Pushed-up bases" on the mold support
units", then: 2
- Replacing the "Pushed-up bases" Not defined Not defined None

2
- Greasing the tensioner wheel guide BGM-041 2 min
- Replacing the electrical collector and None
the air rotary union of the oven None 120 min 4
pneumatic ejection
If "C5", then:
- Replacing the thermostatic purges of 1
the high pressure filter sterilization line BDM-138 10 min/unit None
(40 bar)
*** B/H/M = bottles per hour per mold.
V - 2 - 18/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
If "SBO 6 to SBO 8 machine" and if ""Reinforced"
spindle chain", then:
- Complete reconditioning of the oven wheel
(ball-bearing rollers, upper and lower
Not defined 16 h
bearings, pins, anti-torque 3
pins, springs , forks) None
BDM-151
- Replacing the spindle chain, spindle rotation
BDM-152 Not defined
fixed chains and fixed chain guides
BDM-157
If "Bearing spindle chain", then:
- Complete reconditioning of the oven wheel
(ball-bearing rollers, upper and lower
Not defined 16 h
bearings, pins, anti-torque
pins, springs , forks) 3
None
BDM-151
- Replacing the spindle chain, spindle rotation
BDM-152 Not defined
fixed chains and fixed chain guides
BDM-157
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 19/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Frequency: As required
Procedure
no.
- Replacing the grease cartridge of the
5 min min/
automatic greaser of the oven wheel load/ BGM-033
greaser
unload cams
- Replacing the oven lamps BDE-009 1,5 min / oven
2 According to PCC indication
- Replacing a filter on the high pressure air
BDM-006 4 min 30 s
circuit
- Inspection/cleaning - grease distributors BNM-020 10 min
- Filling the grease tanks BGM-023 10 min
If "Double filtration", then:
- Replacing the filters on the dual filtration
BDM-041 4 min 30 s/filter
circuit 2 According to PCC indication
- Inspection/cleaning the steam line inlet filter BNM-047 10 min
- Replacing the air filter on the preform internal
BDM-064 10 min
- Draining/filling: aseptic solution circuit in the 2
preform internal decontamination module BDM-066 25 min According to PCC indication
(PREDIS)
- Replacing the window of the fixed diffuser in
the preform interior decontamination module BDM-136 40 min 3
(PREDIS)
If "C5", then:
Not
- Adjusting the alcohol circulation controlers Not defined 5 min/unit defin
ed
- Replacing the total filters in the blow wheel
aeraulic modules
- Filling the alcohol product tank BDM-092 5 min 1
According to PCC indication
- Replacing the total filters in the oven aeraulic
modules
- Replacing the prefilters in the oven aeraulic
modules
- Replacing the UV lamps in the preform 2
BDE-012
exterior decontamination module (Oven UV 30 min/unit
cabin) BPU-035
- Replacing the temperature sensors on the After incoherent readings
None Not defined 3
decontamination module signalled at the PCC
If "Grease collection tank at mold opening/
closing cam outfeed", then: 2
- Emptying the tank BNM-034 10 min According to PCC indication
2.2.2 Maintenance schedule for the preform distributor
V - 2 - 20/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
- Clearing ejected preforms None Not defined 1 None
Procedure
no.
- Cleaning the preform guides None Not defined 1 None
m Frequency:500 hours
Procedure
no.
- Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder BNM-013 1h 1 None
- Checking the belt tensions (Not applicable if after 500 and 1 000 production
BNM-048 6 min 2
automatic tensioner) hours and then every 6 000
hours
- Cleaning the photo-electric sensors BNE-004 5 min 1 None
m Frequency:1 000 hours
Procedure
no.
- Checking the belt tensions (Not applicable if after 500 and 1 000 production
BNM-048 6 min 2
automatic tensioner) hours and then every 6 000
hours

Procedure
no.
- Inspection/cleaning the ventilation filters of
BNE-002 12 min/filter 1 None
the electrical boxes
- Checking / cleaning the conveyor belts and
Not defined Not defined 1 None
the drive belt of the orienting rollers
If "Hopper in overpressure", then:
- Replacing the gravimetric primary filters on 2
BDM-057 Not defined None
the hopper suppressor
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 21/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Procedure
no.
If "The length of the unscrambler rollers is equal
to or more than 4 meter", then:
2
- Checking the guiding rollers of the
unscrambler rollers
If "Ionized air system", then:
1
- Visual inspection of the ionizer suction circuit BNM-056 5 min None
If "UV 3M infeed rail", then:

- Visual inspection of the ionizer air filter 1
BNM-058 1 min None
clogging indicator
Procedure
no.
- Checking the emergency stop buttons BSU-005 Not defined 1 None
- Checking the belt tensions (Not applicable if
BNM-048 6 min 1 None
automatic tensioner)
- Checking the electrical connections BNE-001 Not defined 2 None
If "UV infeed rail", then:

- Replacing the UV lamps BDE-010 1h20 min/unit 2 None
- Checking the lamp supports UV BNM-054 5 min/unit 3 None
If "UV infeed rail" and if "Ventilation of UV

boxes", then:
1
- Checking the UV module ventilation filters on
BNM-068 Not defined None
infeed rail
If "UV 3M infeed rail", then:
1
- Replacing the ionizer air filter BDM-064 1 min None
Procedure
no.
- Replacing the "HEPA" total filters on the 2

BDM-062 15 min None
hopper suppressor
V - 2 - 22/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
m Frequency: As required
Procedure
no.
If "Ultra-clean preform distributor" or "Ionized air
system", then: 1
- Cleaning the aspiration system BNM-036 Not defined According to PCC indication
- Replacing the "HEPA" total filters on the 2
BDM-062 15 min According to PCC indication
hopper suppressor
If "UV infeed rail", then:
2
- Replacing the lamps on the UV rail BDE-010 1h20 min/unit According to PCC indication
2.3 List of tools supplied with the machine
Depending on the machine configuration, some of the items listed below may not be included in the tools
supplied with the machine.
Safety equipment Application

Padlock Lock out the supplies / safeties
Step Access to blowing station, oven, preform feeder
Ladder Access to the blowing machine/hopper platform
Mold support unit locking system brace Maintenance on open molds (except SUPM)
Standard tools Application

Tool box
Grease pumps
Cart for grease tank
Ryznar index kit case and chloride Regulation water quality control
Transport and installation tools Application

Slings Moving the machine
Shackles Moving the machine
Sheaths Moving the machine
Solid steel ruler Positioning the machine
Sling extender Positioning the machine
Sliding plate Positioning the machine
Mason’s ruler Positioning the machine

Blow wheel/oven synchronizing pin 4M and 5M heating cabinet support frame
Set of rails for replacing the rotary union Only for GM / TM machines
Moving the machine
Sling spacer for preform transfer cam
Only for GM HR machines
Positioning the machine
Blower/filler coupling toolings
Only for Combi machines
Positioning the machine
Shims and braces for securing the blower/filler
Only for Combi machines
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 23/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Oven adjustment and maintenance tool Application

Dummy oven wheel sector Adjusting machine synchronization
Spindle holding wrench
Spindle pitch adjustment tool If the "Preferential heating" option is fitted on the machine
to be re-used (SV) If the "Preferential heating" option is fitted on the machine
Misload safety system checking ring
Checking kit for UV lamps Only for C5 machines
Blow wheel/oven synchronization tool
V - 2 - 24/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Wheel adjustment and maintenance tool Application

Neck-ring guide collar
Orienting cam lifting accessory
Transfer arm tools :
Measuring stud for transfer arm height
Transfer arm synchronization and height adjustment tool Single spring transfer arm
Transfer arm replacement tool
Transfer arm tools CHP: If the "Preferential heating" option is fitted on the machine
Transfer arm grip height adjustment tool
CHP transfer arm adjustment kit:
Dummy orienting arm head
Dummy orienting arm head and controlled grips
Arm head adjustment tool
Controlled grip height adjustment bar
Dummy stretching rod for centering on the mold
Nozzle tools:
Nozzle cylinder reconditioning set
Nozzle tip holding wrench
Nozzle ring removal tool
Dummy stretching rod
Nozzle cylinder centering base tooling
Nozzle cylinder centering cone
Tool for checking the parallelism of the stretching rod fixing
clamps
Nozzle cylinder filter removal wrench
Nozzle cylinder holding wrenches
Threaded washer fitting tool For Ø50 ; Ø60 nozzles
Nozzle cylinder piston holding wrench For Ø60 nozzles
Nozzle cylinder bell end holding wrench For Ø60 nozzles
Holding wrench for nozzle cylinder tightening ring For Ø60 nozzles
Holding wrench for nozzle cylinder tightening nut For Ø60 nozzles
UPM tools:
Mold support unit locking system brace Maintenance on open molds (except SUPM)
Dummy locking pin
Locking thrust positioning gauge
Transfer arm grips height adjustment bar
Compensation adjustment gauge
Base and spacer centering tool

UPM calibration assembly
Mold closing damper adjustment tool Only for GUPM
Compensation check gauge Only for PUPM
(PUPM) tools Only for PUPM
Mold lock adjustmant gauge
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 25/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Specific tools Application

Tools for adjusting the preform infeed rails
Tool for replacing the seal on the bottle outfeed shaft Only for Combi machines
Dummy vane grip Only for Combi machines
2.4 Lubricant characteristics
LUB number LUB 29 LUB 30

Current reference TOTAL ceran WR2 TOTAL copal GEP0
Color Ochre Anthracite
ISO standard ISO-L-XBFIB 2 ISO-L-XBDHB 0
NGLI grade 2 0
Soap Calcium sulfonate Complex aluminum
Base oil viscocity (at 40° C)
180 750
(mm²/s)
Temperature (min/max) -25 °C / 180 °C -20 °C / 150 °C
Type of base oil Mineral Mineral
Packaging Cartridge Pail Drum Drum
Quantity 425 g 18 kg 50 kg 18 kg
SIDEL Code 00000106120 00000106814 00000106642 00000106208
LUB number LUB 34*

Current reference TOTAL altis MV2
Color Cobalt green
ISO standard ISO-L-XBECB 2
NGLI grade 2
Soap Polyurea
160
(mm²/s)
Temperature (min/max) -25 °C / 160 °C
Type of base oil
Packaging Cartridge
Quantity 400 g
SIDEL Code 00000106346
* The LUB 34 lubricant is used only on SBO 6 HR and SBO 8 HR
machines fitted with "MAIER" rotary union
LUB number LUB 37

Current reference SHELL tivela S220
Color Amber
ISO standard Flender Ag. SEW
NGLI grade
Soap
222
(mm²/s)
Temperature (min/max)
Type of base oil Synthetic
V - 2 - 26/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
LUB number LUB 37

Packaging Drum
Quantity 20 L
LUB number LUB 38*

Current reference TOTAL seriola ETA32
Color Yellow
ISO standard ISO 6743-12
NGLI grade
Soap
32
(mm²/s)
Temperature (min/max)
Type of base oil Mineral
Packaging Barrel Drum
Quantity 208 L 60 L
SIDEL Code 00000114664 00000114665
* The LUB 38 lubricant is used only on SBO 6 HR and SBO 8 HR machines fitted
with "MAIER" rotary union
LUB number LUB 40 LUB A03 LUB A06

LUBRIFICATION
TOTAL FINAVESTAN A
Current reference ENGINEER LUBRIPLATE FP 150 L
100B
PYROSHIELD 5182
Color Purple Transparent Transparent
ISO standard USDA type H1 CODEX
NGLI grade 2
Soap Bentone
650 to 100°C 103 18
(mm²/s)
Temperature (min/max) --- °C / 232 °C -5 °C / 195 °C
Type of base oil Synthetic USP Mineral White oil CODEX
Packaging Cartridge Drum Drum
Quantity 312 g 3,75 L 20 L
SIDEL Code 00000117998 00000097453 00000106341
LUB number LUB A08*

SHELL CASSIDA
Current reference
GREASE EPS 1
Color Ivory
ISO standard USDA type H1
NGLI grade 2
Soap Complex aluminum
220
(mm²/s)
* This lubricant corresponds to the grease contained in the
cartridges of stand-alone automatic greasers
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 27/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
LUB number LUB A08*

Type of base oil Synthetic
Automatic greasing
Packaging
cartridge
Quantity 120 g
cartridges of stand-alone automatic greasers
LUB number LUB A13 LUB A23

KLUBER synth UH1
Current reference TOTAL nevastane XMF 2
14-151
Color White Light beige
ISO standard USDA type H1 NSF H1
NGLI grade 1 2
Soap Complex aluminum Complex aluminum
150 120
(mm²/s)
Type of base oil Synthetic USP Mineral
Packaging Cartridge Pail Cartridge
Quantity 400 g 16 kg 375 g
SIDEL Code 00000097990 00000202511 00000202508
LUB number LUB A17*

KLUBER SF10 PARALIQ
Current reference
GA 351
Color Beige
NGLI grade 1
Soap Complex aluminum
230
(mm²/s)
Type of base oil Mineral/ Synthetic
Automatic greasing
Packaging
cartridge
Quantity 120 g
cartridges of piloted automatic greasers

LUBRIFICATION
KLUBERSYNTH UH1
Current reference ENGINEER QUINPLEX
14–31
4024
Color White White
ISO standard USDA type H1 USDA type H1
NGLI grade 1 1
Soap Complex aluminum Complex aluminum
V - 2 - 28/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115

30
(mm²/s)
Type of base oil USP Mineral Synthetic (PAO)
Packaging Cartridge Cartridge
Quantity 400 g 370 g
SIDEL Code 00000134233 00000161795
LUB number LUB A21

Current reference KLUBERFOOD NH1 94-402
Color Beige
NGLI grade 2
Soap Calcium sulfonate
400
(mm²/s)
Temperature (min/max) -30°C / 140°C
Type of base oil Synthetic (PAO)
Packaging Drum Pail Cartridge
Quantity 50 Kg 25 Kg 400 g
SIDEL Code 00000173111 00000173112 00000173113
2.5 Greasing schedule
Nature of
Designation Lubricant Frequency Procedure no.
intervention
- Greasing the mold centering studs, rings and Apply grease with
LUB A21 125 hours BGM-011
wear washers paintbrush
- Greasing the preform ejection cams (at oven LUB A21 Apply grease with
125 hours BGM-020
infeed) paintbrush
- Greasing the upper notches of the oven LUB A21 Apply grease with
125 hours BGM-050
wheel and the forks paintbrush
- Greasing the mold support unitlocking Apply grease with
system holding lock paintbrush
- Greasing the pivot pins and open pins of the Apply grease with
LUB 29 3 000 hours BGM-013

mold support units grease gun
Apply grease with
- Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam LUB 29 3 000 hours BGM-021
paintbrush
- Greasing the transfer arm guides (except fot Apply grease with
LUB A13 3 000 hours BGM-001
"preferential heating" option) grease gun
Apply grease with
- Greasing the stretching guides LUB A13 4 500 hours BGM-008
grease gun
Apply grease with
- Greasing the reducer motor bearing LUB 29 6 000 hours BGM-035
grease gun
Apply grease with
- Greasing the coder wheel gear LUB 29 6 000 hours BGM-014
paintbrush
* Oven Matrix Oven
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 29/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Nature of
intervention
LUB 29
Apply grease with
- Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings 6 000 hours BGM-018
grease gun
LUB A21*
Apply grease with
- Greasing the mold base support guides LUB A13 6 000 hours BGM-009
grease gun
- Changing the oil in the reducer motor LUB 37 Grease pump 18 000 hours BGM-010
treatment", then:
- Oiling the DLC locking shaft and locking pins Apply grease with
of mold support units (without cleaning) paintbrush
- Cleaning the locking pins None None 500 hours Not defined
If "Locking shafts and pins have no DLC

treatment", then:
- Greasing the mold support unit locking shaft Apply grease with
and pins paintbrush
- Inspecting the spindle roller automatic grease
None None 125 hours BNM-074
applicators
- Replacing the batteries and grease
LUB A08 Refill the greaser 3 000 hours BGM-036
cartridges
If "Controlled automatic greaser", then:
3 000 hours
or
- Replacing the grease cartridges LUB A17 Refill the greaser BGM-033
According to
PCC indication
grip", and if "Stand-alone automatic
greasers", then:
transfer arm grip opening/closing rollers
cartridges
If "Double bottle outlet", and if "Stand-alone
double bottle outfeed transfer wheel
cartridges
If not "Stand-alone automatic greasers", then:
- Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover Apply grease with
ramps paintbrush

- Visual inspection of the centralized automatic
greasing system (cams, guide rails, drive None None 125 hours Not defined
ring)
LUB 29
500 hours
LUB 30
or
- Filling the grease tanks Grease pump BGM-023
LUB A18 According to
PCC indication
LUB A21*
* Oven Matrix Oven
V - 2 - 30/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Nature of
intervention
BGM-004
Apply grease with
- Greasing the stretching cam LUB 29 125 hours or
paintbrush
BGM-032
Apply grease with
- Greasing the mold opening/closing cam LUB 29 125 hours BGM-032
paintbrush
Apply grease with
- Greasing the mold base up-down cam LUB 29 125 hours BGM-032
paintbrush
- Greasing the blow wheel drive ring Apply grease with
LUB 29 125 hours BGM-015
movements grease gun
- Greasing the oven wheel drive ring Apply grease with
movements grease gun
- Cleaning the nozzles that spray grease onto
the drive rings
- Degreasing the toothing on the oven and
None None 3 000 hours BNM-014
blow wheel drive rings
If not "Automated grease spray", then:
- Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel Apply grease with
LUB 40 125 hours
drive ring paintbrush
- Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel Apply grease with BGM-006
LUB 40 125 hours
drive ring paintbrush BGM-007
Apply grease with
- Greasing the drive pinions LUB 40 125 hours
paintbrush
If "Metal locking followers" and if not "Automatic
lubrication", then:
- Lubrication of the unlocking and locking Apply grease with
cams of the mold-support units paintbrush
If "Transfer arm metal followers" and if
not "Automatic lubrication", then:
Apply greasing
- Transfer cam lubrication LUB 29 with paintbrush 125 hours BGM-030
and grease gun
Apply grease with
- Greasing the "MAIER" hydraulic rotary union LUB 34 3 000 hours BGM-012
grease gun
- Draining the oil tank of the "MAIER" hydraulic
LUB 38 None 6 000 hours BDM-068
rotary union
If "C5", then:
- Filling the bottle outfeed air circuit oil tank LUB A06 None 6 000 hours BGM-040
- Greasing the bearings of the transmission Apply grease with

LUB 29 6 000 hours Not defined
reinforcing piece grease gun
If "Machine TM", then:
Apply grease with
- Greasing the manual rotation bearings LUB 29 6 000 hours BGM-027
grease gun
Apply greasing
- Greasing the controlled grip opening/closing
LUB 29 with paintbrush 125 hours BGM-030
cams
and grease gun
Apply grease with
- Greasing the no-offload protection cams LUB A21 125 hours BGM-039
paintbrush
Apply grease with
- Greasing the fast offloading key LUB A21 125 hours BGM-052
paintbrush
* Oven Matrix Oven
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 31/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Nature of
intervention
LUB 29 Apply grease with 250 hours
- Greasing the transfer arm guides BGM-001
LUB A13 grease gun 3 000 heures
Apply grease with
- Greasing the spindle indexing cams LUB A21 500 hours BGM-038
paintbrush
- Greasing the universal joints of the belt bottle
LUB A21 Not defined 3 000 hours Not defined
outfeed
- Greasing the bearings of the belt bottle Apply grease with
LUB 29 6 000 hours Not defined
outfeed grease gun
Apply grease with
- Greasing the tensioner wheel guide LUB A19 18 000 hours BGM-041
grease gun
- Greasing the mold centering studs, rings and Apply grease with
wear washers paintbrush
Apply grease with
- Carriage lubrication LUB A13 125 hours BGM-044
paintbrush
Apply grease with
- Greasing the tooling cams LUB 29 1 500 hours BGM-045
paintbrush
Apply grease with
- Greasing the mold support bar LUB A21 1 500 hours BGM-043
grease gun
- Greasing the centering pieces and the Apply grease with
LUB 29 1 500 hours BGM-043
carriage balls paintbrush
* Oven Matrix Oven
2.6 Cleaning agents
NET number NET A02 NET A03 NET A04

Current reference BRILINOX CAP 1000 A SECURICLEAN ER SPE
Color No color No color No color
SIDEL Code 00000136065 00000136066 00000203016
Packaging Drum Drum Drum
Quantity 5L 5L 5L
Tensio-active detergent, sea Inflammable hydrocarbonated
Composition Paraffin oil, vegetable waxes
salts solvants
Liquid foodstuff-standard Foodstuff-standard cleaning Foodstuff-standard cleaning
Operation cleaning agent for stainless agent, dilutable in water, for agent for grease, oil and
steel and aluminum machine equipment sludge
NET number NET A05

Current reference CL-99
Color No color
Packaging Drum
Quantity 5 kg
Refer to the technical
Composition documentation supplied with
the equipment
Operation Cleaning agent for hot molds
Technical sheets and safety data sheets are supplied with each cleaning agent.
V - 2 - 32/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
2.7 Decontamination and disinfectant products

2.7.1 Decontamination
For the decontamination of preforms with hydrogen peroxide, Sidel requires the following product to be used:

concentration
H2O2 SOLVAY
2.7.2 Disinfectant
For the disinfection of surfaces in contact with preforms, Sidel requires one of the following two products to be
used:
- Divodes FT29 supplied by DIVERSEY.
- P3 Alcodes supplied by ECOLAB.

concentration
Alcohol- Spraying on surface
Surface disinfection based areas DIVERSEY Divodes FT 29
disinfectant 100%
Alcohol- Spraying on surface
Surface disinfection based areas ECOLAB P3-Alcodes
disinfectant 100%
30/03/2015 V - 2 - 33/34
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
V - 2 - 34/34 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Production item changes Part V
3 PRODUCTION ITEM CHANGES

3.1 Definitions of machine interventions
An item change corresponds to all of the interventions required to set up the machine for the production of a new
item. Each intervention is described in a procedure contained in the Servicing Procedure Catalog.
Mechancial operations (replacing "Custom" parts, adjustments to certain parts) are defined in chapter "Table of
mechanical procedures". The selection of the operations to be carried out depends on the new item to be
produced. The times indicated assume the presence of 2 technicians.
This table does not take into account the time required for:
- purging and draining pneumatic and hydraulic circuits,
- removing cover panels and opening doors,
- preparing tools,
- inspection and greasing of certain parts,
- synchronization of certain parts as necessary.
These interventions, whether or not they need to be carried out, are defined in the chapter "Supplementary
interventions". Procedures for production process set-up refer back to procedures contained in the Servicing
Procedure Catalog.
Personnel must be familiar with and observe the:
- safety precautions,
- general recommendations.
3.1.1 Intervention selection procedure
Select the actions required according to the new item to be produced from chapters:
- Table of mechanical procedures.
- Supplementary interventions.
This list constitutes all of the actions required for the production of the new item.
The 3 cases defined in the "Mechancial Procedures Table" represent the majority of the variants possible
between the production of one item and another. For more specific cases or for confirmation of the operations
you need to carry out, contact SIDEL.
3.2 Changing over to a new production item on the blowing machine

3.2.1 Table of mechanical procedures
According to the differences between 2 productions, some actions may be required and others not, please
refer to chapter "Supplementary interventions".
m Intervention
Description Case No.1 Case No.2 Case No.3
Changing production recipes BPU-005 BPU-005 BPU-005

Replacing the mold body BDM-011 BDM-011 BDM-011
Replacing the mold bases BDM-011 BDM-011 BDM-011
Replacing the lower stretching limit-stops BDM-031 BDM-031
Replacing the body-guide plate assembly of the bottle outfeed wheel BDM-046 BDM-046
Replacing the bottle outfeed body guides BDM-049 BDM-049
* For transfer arms fitted with controlled grips and/or orienting head options, follow procedure "BDM-073" when removing the transfer arm heads
30/03/2015 V - 3 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part V User Manual / Production item changes
Setting the bottle base outfeed guide BRM-022 BRM-022

Replacing the preform infeed wheel BDM-020
Replacing the infeed guide BDM-021
Replacing the infeed retractable guide BDM-022
Replacing the oven infeed wheel BDM-023
Replacing the oven outfeed guide BDM-028
Replacing the spindle tips BDM-012
Replacing transfer grips* BDM-024
Replacing the nozzle tips BDM-025
Replacing the ejection guide of the bottle outfeed BDM-047
Replacing the bottle outfeed neck guides BDM-048
Replacing the neck-guide plate assembly of the bottle outfeed wheel BDM-082
Replacing the fixed or retractable guide of the bottle outfeed BDM-104
Replacing the bottle outfeed wheel BDM-105
* For transfer arms fitted with controlled grips and/or orienting head options, follow procedure "BDM-073" when removing the transfer arm heads
m Intervention time
3.2.1.1 Supplementary interventions
These interventions will be required or not on a case by case basis according to the new item to be produced.
Intervention Procedure no. / Chapter

Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields BRM-010
Replacing the stretching cams BDM-027
Replacing the stretching rollers (option according to model) BDM-146
Setting points "0" and "10" BPU-001
Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera BRE-003
Replacing the stretching rods BDM-026
Synchronizing preform loading BRE-005
Setting the optical sensors (option according to model) BRE-021
Setting the lower stretching limit stops BRM-009
Setting the heights of the dummy lamps (option according to model) BRM-050
Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed BRE-002

Preblowing configuration please refer to chapter: "Blowing profile"
Blowing configuration please refer to chapter: "Blowing profile"
Regulating the black bars (option according to model) please refer to chapter: "Heating module"
Switching from a "HR" production set-up to a cold production set-up (if
BPU-033
Versatile configuration is present)
Switching from cold production set-up to "HR" set-up (if Versatile
BPU-034
configuration is present)
Configuring the mold hoses depending on the type of production set-up (if
BPU-039
Versatile configuration is present)
V - 3 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Production item changes Part V
3.2.2 List of custom parts
The list below is given as an example. The real list depends on the different items to be produced and can be
found in the documentation supplied with the machine.
Assembly Custom parts

Feeding Infeed wheel plate, retractable guide and fixed guide
Oven wheel Oven outfeed guide and infeed wheel (3 sectors)
Spindle chain system Spindle tip and ejectors
Transfer arm Transfer grips (preforms and bottles)
Nozzle cylinder Bell-covers, diffusers and spacers
Stretching system Lower stretching limit-stops and stretching rods
Neck guides, body guides, base guides, retractable guides and outfeed wheel
Bottle outfeed
plate (option)
Mold set Molds, mold bases and spacers
3.2.3 Item changes for options

3.2.3.1 Table of mechanical procedures
Intervention Case No.1 Case No.2 Case No.3
Replacing the dedust cam BDM-052 BDM-052

Replacing the dedust neck guides BDM-053
Replacing the dedust wheels BDM-054
Replacing the plates and guides in the decontamination module BDM-067
Replacing the indexing pins BDM-074


Adjusting the spray cloud from the atomizer BRM-024

Setting the height of the extraction hood BRM-025
Setting the transfer arm grips BRM-031
Setting the height of the vision system cameras BCU-036
3.2.3.3 List of custom parts
30/03/2015 V - 3 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part V User Manual / Production item changes
Option Custom parts

Dedust Dedust cam, neck guides and dedust wheels
Preform decontamination module Neck guides and plates on the decontamination module
Preform neck orientation system Indexing pins
3.3 Changing over the production item on the preform distributor

3.3.1 Table of mechanical procedures
m Intervention
Changing production recipes BPU-005 BPU-005 BPU-005

Replacing the upstream feed block BDM-018
Replacing the downstream feedblock BDM-019
Setting the infeed rail BRM-011
Setting the spacing between the unscrambler rollers BRM-013
Setting the gap between the stabilization rails BRM-017
Setting the height of the unscrambler unit BRM-016
Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail BRE-014
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail BRE-015
Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers BRE-016


Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly BRE-018
Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper (option) BRE-017
3.3.2 List of custom parts
Assembly Custom parts

Preform feeder Upstream feed block
V - 3 - 4/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Table of Contents Part VI

OPERATION Part III
MAINTENANCE Part V
APPENDIX Part VI
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUES 1
VOCABULARY USED IN THIS MANUAL 2
SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS RELATED TO THE USE OF HYDROGEN PEROXIDE (DECONTAMINATION

OPTION) 3
Product reference(s) .......................................................................................................................................... 3.1
Storage conditions .............................................................................................................................................. 3.2
Safety during production ..................................................................................................................................... 3.3
Recommendations in the case of accidents ....................................................................................................... 3.4
DOCUMENT PACKAGE SURVEY 4

Your details ......................................................................................................................................................... 4.1
Your technical documentation reference ............................................................................................................ 4.2
Survey ................................................................................................................................................................ 4.3
Using the documentation ........................................................................................................................... 4.3.1
The document package ............................................................................................................................. 4.3.2
Technical documentation ........................................................................................................................... 4.3.3
The Presentation Manual .................................................................................................................. 4.3.3.1
User and Servicing Procedure Manuals ............................................................................................ 4.3.3.2
Spare Parts Catalog ................................................................................................................................... 4.3.4
How do I return the survey? ............................................................................................................................... 4.4
30/03/2015 VI - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part VI User Manual / Table of Contents
VI - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Bolt tightening torques Part VI
1 BOLT TIGHTENING TORQUES
The table below applies to hollow steel hexagonal cylindrical (CHC) bolts or to hexagonal steel head (H) bolts
for which the tightening torque has not been specified in the brochure.
The tightening torques have been determined to 3/4 of the elastic tolerance for a friction coeficient of 0,12,
which corresponds precision made bolts fitted with grease. This table is an extract from the "FACOM"
tightening guide.
The torques are expressed in N.m and vary according to the diameter and class of bolt. For example, an M8 H
class 8-8 bolt must be tightened to a torque of 23,6 N.m.
Bolt diameter Tightening torque for Tightening torque for Tightening torque for Tightening torque for
(mm) bolt class 6-8 (N.m) bolt class 8-8 (N.m) bolt class 10-9 (N.m) bolt class 12-9 (N.m)
1,6 0,137 0,183 0,257 0,309
2 0,276 0,368 0,518 0,622
2,5 0,558 0,745 1,04 1,25
3 0,957 1,27 1,79 2,15
3,5 1,47 1,96 2,76 3,32
4 2,20 2,94 4,13 4,96
5 4,28 5,71 8,04 9,65
6 7,41 9,88 13,90 16,68
7 12 16 22,50 27,01
8 17,72 23,63 33,24 39,88
10 34,79 46,38 65,23 78,27
12 59,32 79,09 111 133
14 94,20 125 176 211
16 145 193 271 326
18 201 268 378 453
20 282 377 530 636
22 385 513 722 866
24 489 652 917 1 100
27 710 947 1 332 1 599
30 972 1 296 1 822 2 187
33 1 307 1 743 2 451 2 941
36 1 689 2 253 3 168 3 802
39 2 177 2 903 4 083 4 899
42 2 705 3 607 5 072 6 087
45 3 364 4 486 6 309 7 570
48 4 061 5 415 7 615 9 138
52 5 195 6 927 9 742 11 690
30/03/2015 VI - 1 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part VI User Manual / Bolt tightening torques
VI - 1 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Vocabulary used in this manual Part VI
2 VOCABULARY USED IN THIS MANUAL
Term describing the consequences of a "Critical" fault. The machine stops immediately in its
Critical shutdown
current status.
Term describing the consequences of an "Alert" fault. The machine stops after first
Progressive shutdown
completing the production cycle in progress.
Item Object treated by the machine.
Annular surface of the upper part of the neck (of a preform or a bottle), transition between
Rim
the exterior and the interior of the neck.
Part, generally metal, making up the upper cast (neck and body) of the shape to be
Mold shell
produced. The mold shells go in pairs and are mounted in the shell supports.
Start Start of operation, implementation of movement.
Man / machine interface allowing the user to display and control the machine’s functions by
Touch screen
touching the screen.
All the screens, windows and displays relating to a function or part of a machine, comprising
Family
a main page accessible via a button that is always displayed on the screen.
Part of the machine comprising for the most part: heating modules, the spindle chain,
Oven ventilators and electrical equipment; it ensures that the preforms are at the right
temperature before blowing.
Assembly of oven modules to ensure the heating profile specificality of the preforms. The
Distribution oven power of the active lamps is parameterized per area and subject to regulation modulations
linked to the temperature of the preforms at the oven outfeed.
Assembly of oven modules ensuring the main heating of the preforms. The active lamps are
Penetration oven in full power and only subject to regulation modulations linked to the temperature of the
preforms at the oven outfeed.
Filter in which the separation of pollutants is due to the wetting properties of a porous
Coalescent filter
medium. Liquid particles in suspension adhere to and form particles of greater volume.
Tool made of soft material, generally in a long cylindrical shape, used with a hammer or
Drift
some such to extract or put in place assembled parts.
LIE (Lower Limit of Concentration limit of a mixture of a given product with air, for which the mixture is of
Explosiveness) sufficiently low concentration so as to not produce an explosion.
LSE (Upper Limit of Concentration limit of a mixture of a given product with air, for which the mixture is of
Explosiveness) sufficiently low concentration so as to not produce an explosion.
Max Maximum.
Min Minimum.
Starting production Start of a cycle producing items in accordance with a defined process.
Mechanical assembly comprising generally 6 to 10 superimposed infrared lamps, ensuring
Heating module
foremost their spatial positioning in front of the moving preforms.
Operator Person responsible for observing the machine and ensuring that production runs smoothly.
Control and Command Station: Industrial PC from which the user sets up, operates and
PCC
monitors the machine.
"Custom" parts constitute all of the parts which have been designed according to the
Custom parts dimensions and characteristics of the articles to be treated in the machine. These parts may
be replaced when changing production.

Guide stud Cylindrical part that positions a component comprising a bore.
Console Unit in which are housed the PCC, the printer and the inverter.
Statistical Process Control. Method for controlling production based on statistical analysis
SPC which gives priority to preventive appoaches by evaluating continuously the ability of the
process.
Person responsible for production, having received specific training on production set-up,
Supervisor
control etc.
Person having received specific training allowing them to work on the machine to rectify
Technician
specific problems.
Mechanical sub-assembly used for holding the preform by the neck and rotating it during its
Spindle
conveyance through the oven.
Mechanical sub-assembly ensuring the airtight connection between the blowing air system,
Nozzle
the top of the mold or the neck of the item to be blown.
30/03/2015 VI - 2 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part VI User Manual / Vocabulary used in this manual
Person qualified to operate and/or carry out work on the machine, at any level of
User
intervention.
Jacking Action of a cylinder, or qualifier for a fluid system (air, oil...) used to actuate a cylinder.
Assembly oven lamps situated on the same horizontal line, identified and displayed on the
Oven area
PCC.
VI - 2 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Safety recommendations related to the use of hydrogen Part VI
peroxide (Decontamination option)
3 SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS RELATED TO THE USE OF HYDROGEN

PEROXIDE (DECONTAMINATION OPTION)
3.1 Product reference(s)
The use of the following product is imposed by Sidel:

concentration
H2O2 SOLVAY
3.2 Storage conditions
Store hydrogen peroxide as follows:

- an airy, well-ventilated room, away from any source of heat,
- in aluminium (purity greater than 95 %) or stainless steel containers fitted with safety valves,
- in PEHD (HDPE - High Density Polyethylene) containers.
Ensure that hydrogen peroxide is kept away from sunlight at a temperature of less than 60 °C.
Direct light will cause the photo-chemical decomposition hydrogen peroxide.
High temperatures cause the decomposition of the product with a transformation into water and oxygen and
raising the temperature further. The raise in temperature will cause a rise in pressure with a risk of explosion
and fire. Once started, the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide accelerates under the effect of the
temperature. Hydrogen peroxide decomposes rapidly and may cause boiling and splashing.
Never use containers designed for, or already used for, other products for the storage and transport of
hydrogen peroxide.
3.3 Safety during production
Always wear a face mask:

- when handling hydrogen peroxide,
- when working with the decontamination module.
Inhaling hydrogen peroxide may cause:

- irritations to the nose and mouth,
- coughing,
- sore throat,
- nosebleeds.
prolonged or repeated exposure to hydrogen peroxide may cause chronic bronchitis.
Always wear PVC or latex gloves when handling hydrogen peroxide.
Hydrogen peroxide may burn the skin.
30/03/2015 VI - 3 - 1/2
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part VI User Manual / Safety recommendations related to the use of hydrogen
peroxide (Decontamination option)
Never allow spilled hydrogen peroxide to evaporate. Immediately dilute spilled hydrogen peroxide with water.
Dilute hydrogen peroxide to 0,1 % before flushing down the drain.
Avoid contact between hydrogen peroxide and:

- Iron.
- Steel.
- Copper.
- Brass.
- Nickel.
- Chrome.
Never allow hydrogen peroxide to come into contact with the materials below (risk of explosion or
spontaneous combustion):
- Ethanol.
- Organic materials.
- Alcohol.
- Acetone.
Use all available methods (rinsing, diluting, water tanks etc;) to clear out waste (cloths, paper towels etc.)
which have become impregnated with hydrogen peroxide. Never dry clothes which have become impregnated
with hydrogen peroxide. Wash the clothes before drying them. Clothes and cloths impreganted with hydrogen
peroxide can spontaneously ignite.
m For the tanks used for filling the machine treatment circuit
Rinse the tank using distilled water every time before filling.
Change the hydrogen peroxide tank 1 time each year.
Write the date of the next change on the hydrogen peroxide tank.
3.4 Recommendations in the case of accidents
If there is an accident, make use of emergency medical equipment and treat the eyes first.
In all cases consult a medical doctor.

m For the eyes

· Rinse the eyes with clean water for 15 min keeping them wide open.
· See an opthalmologist urgently to prevent serious or permanent injury.
m For the skin
· Wash the skin with clean water.
m If swallowed
Never force a person who has swallowed hydrogen peroxide to vomit.
· Rinse the mouth and drink large quantities of cold water.
VI - 3 - 2/2 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Document package survey Part VI
4 DOCUMENT PACKAGE SURVEY
This questionnaire only concerns the documentation package. The manuals concerned are as follows:
Technical Documentation Presentation Manual

User Manual
Servicing Procedure Catalog
Spare-parts catalog Spare-parts catalog "Machine"
Spare-parts catalog specific to articles to be produced, otherwise known as
"Personalized" or "Custom" parts
We would be grateful if you could spare a few moments to complete this survey. Your responses will be carefully
analysed to enable us to better understand your expectations and thereby improve our technical documentation.
4.1 Your details
Company
Address
Country
Name / First name

Functions
Email
Telephone no.
4.2 Your technical documentation reference
You will find the information you need to complete the sections below on the cover page for each technical
manual.
Machine type and number

Company
Publication date
4.3 Survey
Please respond by giving a score of between "1" and "4".

4.3.1 Using the documentation

(1 = never, 2 = rarely, 3 = regularly, 4 = systematically. )
Question Score
1234
Do you use the technical documentation?
Do you use the Spare Parts Catalogue?
30/03/2015 VI - 4 - 1/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part VI User Manual / Document package survey
4.3.2 The document package

(1 = bad, 2 = average, 3 = good, 4 = very good. )
Question Score
1234
Is it easy to use the document package?
How do you rate the quality of the support (paper, binding etc.)?
How do you rate the print quality?
Is the document package suitable for industrial use?
4.3.3 Technical documentation

Question Score
1234
Is the translation satisfactory?
Is the breakdown of information in each manual satisfactory?
Is it easy to navigate through the manuals?
Is it easy to find the information you are looking for?
4.3.3.1 The Presentation Manual

Question Score
1234
Did the technical content of this manual enable you to gain knowledge of the machine
before delivery?
Did the technical content of this manual enable you to correctly prepare the conditions
for the delivery of your machine?
Does the presentation of the information in this manual appear correct to you?
4.3.3.2 User and Servicing Procedure Manuals

Question Score
1234
How do you rate the technical content of these manuals?
Is the technical level suited to your needs?
Are the operating modes easy to use?
Is the information sufficient to maintain the machine at an operational level?
Is the information regarding article changes sufficient?
4.3.4 Spare Parts Catalog

VI - 4 - 2/4 30/03/2015
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
User Manual / Document package survey Part VI
Question Score
1234
Is the content of the catalog sufficient?
Is it easy to find the information you are looking for?
4.4 How do I return the survey?
SIDEL
Service Documentation Technique
Avenue de la patrouille de France
Postal
Octeville sur mer
BP 204
76 053 Le Havre Cedex FRANCE
Service Documentation Technique
FAX
(33) (0)2 32 85 81 29
Email techdocs.octeville@sidel.com
30/03/2015 VI - 4 - 3/4
SBO 24/24 N° 13115
Part VI User Manual / Document package survey
VI - 4 - 4/4 30/03/2015

User Manual: SBO 24/24 - #13115

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual: SBO 24/24 - #13115

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Translation of the original technical documentation

SBO 24/24 - N° 13115

CRYSTAL GEYSER WATER COMPANY

©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

INFORMATION ON THE MANUAL Part I

DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE Part II

Oven ventilation system ...................................................................................................................................... 20

Bottle outfeed wheel ............................................................................................................................................ 33

OPERATION Part III

INSTALLATION AND START-UP Part IV

©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

INFORMATION ON THE MANUAL Part I

USING THIS MANUAL 2

©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

1.2.1 Documents supplied with the machine

- Back-up copy of the PCC (DVD-ROM) application.

©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

2 USING THIS MANUAL

Obligatory before carrying out a procedure.

Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action.

Remark or observation on the results of an operation.

Production process procedure

Inspecting / cleaning procedure

m "List of procedures" table

Example of a "Servicing Procedure List".

xNM-041, xNM-052, xNM-065, xNE-003, xNE-012

xDM-002, xDM-010, xDM-025

xRM-005, xRM-009, xRM-012, xRE-003, xRE-015, xRE-020, xRE-027

m Words in bold in the text

m Words in blue in the text

3.2 Qualified personnel

3.4 Warranty and responsibility

3.5 Registered trademark

©SIDEL Translation of the original technical documentation

INFORMATION ON THE MANUAL Part I

CONTROL AND COMMAND PANEL 3

Description ................................................................................................................................................. 3.5.2

Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 3.8.3

HIGH PRESSURE AIR CIRCUIT 4

STEAM STERILIZATION MODULE (OPTION) 5

LOW PRESSURE AIR CIRCUIT 6

WATER CHARACTERISTICS AND TREATMENT 8

TH (Total Hardness) ........................................................................................................................................... 8.3

ELECTRICAL CABINET AND BOXES 9

PREFORM DECONTAMINATION MODULE 12

Transmission .................................................................................................................................................... 12.4

Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 12.6.3

SURFACE DISINFECTION SYSTEM 13

SPINDLE CHAIN SYSTEM 16

EXTERNAL PREFORM DECONTAMINATION 17

FALSE LAMP SUPPORT 19

OVEN VENTILATION SYSTEM 20

AERAULIC SYSTEMS IN THE OVEN 21

OVEN EXTRACTOR UNIT 24

TRANSFER ARM AND TURNTABLE 25

ITEM EJECTION SYSTEM 28

Description ............................................................................................................................................... 30.5.2

BLOWING MACHINE AERAULIC SYSTEM 31

RETRACTABLE BOTTLE OUTFEED 32

BOTTLE OUTFEED WHEEL 33

BOTTLE OUTFEED RETRACTABLE GUIDE 34

BLOWER/FILLER SEPARATING WALL 35

BOTTLE OUTFEED AIR CIRCUIT 36